Wyoming High School Activities Association

[0]

Wyoming High School

Activities Association

Educational Excellence Through Activities

[1]

TABLE OF CONTENTS

WHSAA STAFF ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2

BOARD OF DIRECTORS ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3

CONSTITUTION................................................................................................................................................................................................ 9

1.00 ADMINISTRATION ........................................................................................................................................................................... 12

2.00 ASSOCIATION PROGRAMS AND POLICIES .................................................................................................................................. 14

2.7.0 WHSAA AWARDS ............................................................................................................................................................................ 19

3.0.0 GENERAL ASSOCIATION RULES AND REGULATIONS ................................................................................................................ 21

4.00 GENERAL MEMBER SCHOOL RULES AND REGULATIONS ......................................................................................................... 28

5.0.0 GENERAL STUDENT RULES AND REGULATIONS ........................................................................................................................ 31

6.0.0 PARTICIPANT ELIGIBILITY RULES AND REGULATIONS .............................................................................................................. 35

7.0.0 SPECIFIC SPORTS RULES AND REGULATIONS ........................................................................................................................... 39

7.5.0 BASKETBALL ................................................................................................................................................................................... 43

7.6.0 CROSS COUNTRY ........................................................................................................................................................................... 44

7.7.0 BOYS FOOTBALL ............................................................................................................................................................................ 44

7.8.0 GOLF ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 48

7.10.0 NORDIC SKIING .......................................................................................................................................................................... 50

7.10.5 ALPINE SKIING ........................................................................................................................................................................... 54

7.11.0 SOCCER...................................................................................................................................................................................... 60

7.11.5 SOFTBALL ................................................................................................................................................................................... 62

7.12.0 SWIMMING AND DIVING ............................................................................................................................................................ 64

7.13.0 TENNIS ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 65

7.14.0 TRACK ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 69

7.14.6 INDOOR TRACK .......................................................................................................................................................................... 72

7.15.0 GIRLS VOLLEYBALL ................................................................................................................................................................... 73

7.16.0 WRESTLING ................................................................................................................................................................................ 74

8.0.0 SPECIFIC ACTIVITY RULES AND REGULATIONS ......................................................................................................................... 76

8.0.5 SPIRIT GROUPS .............................................................................................................................................................................. 76

8.1.0 JOURNALISM ................................................................................................................................................................................... 78

8.2.0 MUSIC .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 80

8.2.5 STATE STRING CLINIC ................................................................................................................................................................... 84

8.2.6 WYOMING STATE MARCHING BAND FESTIVAL ........................................................................................................................... 84

8.2.7 ALL-STATE MUSIC GROUPS .......................................................................................................................................................... 88

8.3.0 SPEECH ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 92

8.4.0 STATE THESPIAN TOURNAMENT ................................................................................................................................................ 119

8.5.0 WYOMING ASSOCIATION OF STUDENT COUNCILS CONSTITUTION ....................................................................................... 133

8.6.0 WYOMING ASSOCIATION OF DECA (WyADECA) ........................................................................................................................ 135

8.7.0 FUTURE BUSINESS LEADERS OF AMERICA .............................................................................................................................. 141

8.8.0 WYOMING FFA ASSOCIATION, INC. ............................................................................................................................................ 142

8.9.0 FAMILY CAREER COMMUNITY LEADERS OF AMERICA ............................................................................................................ 148

8.9.9 ART - WYOMING SECONDARY ART EDUCATOR'S ASSOCIATION ............................................................................................ 154

8.10.0 WYOMING ASSOCIATION OF SkillsUSA .................................................................................................................................. 155

WYOMING SPORTS OFFICIALS ASSOCATION BOARD OF DIRECTORS ................................................................................................. 162

INDEX ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 172

[2]

WYOMING HIGH SCHOOL ACTIVITIES ASSOCIATION

6571 EAST 2ND STREET - CASPER, WYOMING 82609

(307) 577-0614

FAX (307) 577-0637

http://www.whsaa.org

WHSAA STAFF

TREVOR WILSON

Commissioner

CHAD WHITWORTH

Associate Commissioner

SCOTT MCCASH

Technology Director

BRENT ROSE

Director of Fine Arts and Activities

LANA GLANZ

Officials

SHERRI VEST

Event Sanctions &

School Correspondence

MIKE MALONEY

Director of Officiating

[3]

BOARD OF DIRECTORS

TBA

2A-Southwest

MATTHEW

DAVIDSON

Big Horn County

School District #1

1A-Northwest

ROBERT

ERICKSON

Star Valley

4A-Southwest

BEAU GARCIA

Upton

1A-Northeast

WILL GRAY

Pine Bluffs

2A-Southeast

LOREN HETH

Lusk

Wyoming School

Boards Association

TERRY HOOKER

Casper

4A-Northeast

JASON HORSLEY

Lincoln County

School District #2

1A-Southwest

MADISON LACEY

State Department of

Education

MIKE LASHLEY

Lingle-Ft. Laramie

1A-Southeast

RYAN MACKEY

Douglas

3A-Southeast

RYAN MADER

Buffalo

3A-Northeast

CARL MANNING

Riverton

Wyoming School

Boards Association

REGGIE MILLER

Riverton

4A-Northwest

MAX MILLS

Shoshoni

2A-Northwest

DAMIEN SMITH

Uinta County

School District #6

3A-Southwest

SEROL

STAUFFENBERG

Lander

3A-Northwest

RON WAGNER

Laramie

4A-Southeast

LARRY YERADI

Wright

2A-Northeast

[4]

WHSAA BOARD OF DIRECTORS

TBA ......................................................................... (2A SW) ............. TBA ................................................................ TBA

(July 1, 2022 - June 30, 2025 – completing term of Keith Bauder)

DAVIDSON, Matthew ............................... (1A NW) ............ Big Horn County School District #1 ......... 548-2254

(July 1, 2022 - June 30, 2025 – first term)

ERICKSON, Robert ................................. (4A SW).............. Star Valley .............................................. 885-7113

(July 1, 2024 – June 30, 2027 – first term)

GARCIA, Beau .......................................... (1A NE) ............. Upton ...................................................... 468-2361

(July 1, 2024 – June 30, 2027 – second term)

GRAY, Will .................................................. (2A SE).............. Pine Bluffs ............................................. 245-4013

(July 1, 2023 - June 30, 2026 – first term)

HETH, Loren ............................................... ........................... Lusk ........................................................ 216-0401

(Representative of Wyoming School Boards Association, November 2020-November 2024)

HOOKER, Terry ........................................ (4A NE) .............. Casper ................................................... 253-5460

(July 1, 2022 - June 30, 2025 – first term)

HORSLEY, Jason ............................................ (1A SW) ............. Lincoln County School District #2 ........... 885-3811

(July 1, 2024 – June 30, 2027 – first term)

LACEY, Madison ....................................... ........................... Cheyenne ............................................... 777-6840

(Representative of State Department of Education)

LASHLEY, Mike........................................ (1A SE)............... Lingle-Ft. Laramie ................................... 837-2296

(July 1, 2023 – June 30, 2026 – first term)

MACKEY, Ryan - President....................... (3A SE)............... Douglas ................................................. 358-2940

(July 1, 2022- June 30, 2025 – first term)

MADER, Ryan ........................................... (3A NE) .............. Buffalo .................................................... 684-2269

(July 1, 2022- June 30, 2025 – first term)

MANNING, Carl ........................................ ........................... Riverton .................................................. 851-3440

(Representative of Wyoming School Boards Association, November 2022-November 2026)

MILLER, Reggie ........................................ (4A NW) ............ Riverton ................................................. 856-6557

(July 1, 2024 – June 30, 2027 – second term)

MILLS, Max ................................................ (2A NW) ............. Shoshoni................................................. 876-2576

(July 1, 2023 – June 30, 2026 – first term)

SMITH, Damien .......................................... (3A SW).............. Uinta County School District #6 ............... 786-4100

(July 1, 2023 - June 30, 2026 – first term)

STAUFFENBERG, Serol ........................ (3A NW) ............ Lander ................................................... 332-3640

(July 1, 2024 – June 30, 2027 – first term)

WAGNER, Ron ......................................... (4A SE)............... Laramie .................................................. 721-4420

(July 1, 2024 – June 30, 2027 – first term)

YERADI, Larry ........................................... (2A NE) ............. Wright ..................................................... 464-1604

(July 1, 2023 - June 30, 2026 – first term)

[5]

WYOMING HIGH SCHOOL ACTIVITIES ASSOCIATION

6571 EAST 2ND STREET - CASPER, WYOMING 82609

(307) 577-0614

FAX (307) 577-0637

SUMMARY OF WHSAA RULE CHANGES FOR 2024-25

(Rule changes are shaded in the text of Handbook)

1.1.1 – Reclassification structure for member schools

2.4.7 – Emergency Action Plans – New Rule

2.6.6 – Updates to the Lightning Policy

4.6.25 – Increase in Officiating Fees starting 2024-25 school year

7.5.0 – Adoption of the use of a 35 second shot clock in all 1A/2A/3A/4A basketball contests

7.8.9 – Update to Golf Coaches

7.11.40 – Change to the 4A regular season soccer overtime procedure

This is a summary of the new rules. For specific wording and interpretation

of each new rule, please refer to the rule number and read entire rule in the

handbook.

[6]

FROM THE NATIONAL FEDERATION OF STATE HIGH SCHOOL ASSOCIATIONS AND THE WYOMING HIGH SCHOOL

ACTIVITIES ASSOCIATION

The National Federation consists of the fifty individual state high school athletic and/or activities associations and the association of the District

of Columbia. Also affiliate, are ten interscholastic organizations from the Canadian Provinces of Alberta, British Columbia, Manitoba, New

Brunswick, Newfoundland-Labrador, Nova Scotia, Ontario, Prince Edward Island, Quebec, and Saskatchewan as well as the Canadian School

Sports Federation and the associations of the Republic of the Philippines, Okinawa, Guam, and St. Thomas. These associations have united

to secure the benefits of cooperative action which eliminate unnecessary duplication of effort and which increase efficiency through the pooling

and coordinating of ideas of all who are engaged in the administration of high school athletic and activities programs.

ORIGIN AND GROWTH

The national organization had its beginning at a meeting at Chicago on May 14, 1920. L.W. Smith, secretary of the Illinois High School Athletic

Association, issued invitations to neighboring states and state association representatives came from Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Michigan, and

Wisconsin. The primary purpose of the meeting was to discuss problems which had resulted from high school contests which were organized

by colleges and universities or by other clubs or promoters. In many cases, little attention was paid to the eligibility rules of the high school

associations or to other school group regulations and chaotic conditions had developed. At this first meeting it was decided that the welfare of

the high schools required a more active part in the control of such athletic activities be exercised by the high schools through the state

associations, and this control necessitated the formation of a national organization. A Constitution and Bylaws were adopted and the group

decided on the name "Midwest Federation of State High School Athletic Associations.” In 1921, four states, Illinois, Iowa, Michigan, and

Wisconsin, continued their interest and became charter members through formal ratification of the Constitution. Largely due to their efforts the

national organization grew during the early years. In 1922, the Chicago annual meeting was attended by representatives from 11 states, and

the name of the National Federation of State High School Athletic Associations was adopted. A number of college and university

representatives who attended the meeting expressed sympathy for an interest in the efforts to introduce a high degree of order in the

regulation of interscholastic contests. Since that time, the National Federation has had a healthy growth to its present nationwide membership.

By 1940, a national office with a full-time executive staff became necessary and such office was established in September of that year. The

Wyoming High School Activities Association has been a member of the National Federation since February 24, 1936. The legislative body is

the National Council made up of one representative from each member state association. Each representative must be a state association

executive officer or member of the state board of control. The executive body is the Board of Directors of at least eight members from the eight

territorial sections as outlined in the Constitution. Their election is by the National Council at its summer meeting.

STATEMENT OF PHILOSOPHY

The purpose of the National Federation of State High School Associations is to coordinate the efforts of its member state associations toward

the ultimate objectives of interscholastic activities. It shall provide a means for state high school associations to cooperate in order to enhance

and protect their interscholastic programs. In order to accomplish this, the National Federation is guided by a philosophy consistent with the

accepted purposes of secondary education. Member state associations' programs must be administered in accordance with the following

basic beliefs: Interscholastic activities shall be an integral part of the total secondary school educational program which has as its purpose to

provide educational experiences not otherwise provided in the curriculum, which will develop learning outcomes in the area of knowledge,

skills, and emotional patterns and will contribute to the development of better citizens. Emphasis shall be upon teaching "through" activities in

addition to teaching the "skills" of activities. Inter-school activities shall be primarily for the benefit of the high school students who participate

directly and vicariously in them. The interscholastic activity program shall exist mainly for the value which it has for students and not for the

benefit of the sponsoring institutions. The activities and contests involved shall be psychologically sound by being tailored to the physical,

mental, and emotional maturity levels of the youth participating in them. Any district and/or state athletic meet competition to determine a so-

called champion shall provide opportunities for schools to demonstrate and to evaluate the best taught in their programs with the best taught in

other schools and in other areas of the state. Participation in interscholastic activities is a privilege to be granted to those students who meet

the minimum standards of eligibility adopted cooperatively by the schools through their state associations, and those additional standards

established by each school for its own students. The state high school associations and the National Federation shall be concerned with the

development of those standards, policies, and regulations essential to assist their member schools in the implementation of their philosophy of

interscholastic activities. Non-school activities sponsored primarily for the benefit of the participants in accordance with a philosophy

compatible with the school philosophy of interscholastics may have values for youth. When they do not interfere with the academic and

interscholastic programs and do not result in exploitation of youth, they shall be considered as a worthwhile supplement to inter-school

activities. The National Federation headquarters building is located at 1802 Alonzo Watford Sr. Drive, P.O. Box 690, Indianapolis, IN 46206;

Phone: 317-972-6900. The National Federation is the major rules writing body for interscholastic sports in the United States. Playing rules for

junior high and high school competition as written, published, and printed by the National Federation have been adopted by the WHSAA in all

sports except golf, tennis, and skiing.

HISTORY AND PURPOSE

Originally founded in the 1920s to regulate athletic competition, the WYOMING HIGH SCHOOL ACTIVITIES ASSOCIATION has become

much more than a regulatory agency. The WHSAA has survived on the premise of providing service to all member schools while promoting,

coordinating, and controlling interscholastic activities in Wyoming. The purpose of the WYOMING HIGH SCHOOL ACTIVITIES

ASSOCIATION is to ensure that interscholastic activities in Wyoming are administered in a manner that is safe and fair to all. The Association

is matched in every state and Canadian province by their own particular associations, all belonging to the National Federation of State High

School Associations, which provide a means for State High School Associations to coordinate, to enhance, and to protect their interscholastic

programs. The WHSAA is a private nonprofit association that is funded by membership dues and the gate receipts from the various

culminating events in each activity. Membership is voluntary.

MISSION AND PHILOSOPHY

The mission of the WYOMING HIGH SCHOOL ACTIVITIES ASSOCIATION, both as a service and regulatory organization, is to coordinate

the efforts of the member schools toward the ultimate objectives of interscholastic activities. Unification through the WHSAA provides the

means for member schools to cooperate in protecting and enhancing their interscholastic programs to more effectively serve students.

The WHSAA recognizes that the academic program must have top priority in the educational process. While promoting the importance of the

activities program, the Association recognizes that activities should not overshadow the emphasis placed on classroom work, but that the two

should go hand-in-hand.

[7]

MEMBERSHIP

Any public or private high school accredited by the Wyoming State Department of Education or which meets requirements designated by the

WHSAA Board of Directors may become member schools of the WYOMING HIGH SCHOOL ACTIVITIES ASSOCIATION, which is guided by

a Board of Directors and managed by a commissioner. Elected by the vote of member schools for a three year term, the Board members

represent each classification and each of four geographic administrative regions. In addition, two members elected by the Wyoming School

Boards Association and a staff person from the Wyoming State Department of Education are voting members. Rules pertaining to academic

standards, transfer, awards, season limitations, as well as other policies which govern WHSAA activities, are adopted by the Board of

Directors, and are part of the By-Laws. Amendments to the Constitution are voted on by each member school.

SCOPE

The WHSAA fosters leadership for students through activities in fine arts, vocation education, and athletics. The activity programs of the

WHSAA are available to all Wyoming high school students belonging to a member high school or affiliate member school. The programs

include art, basketball, cross country, drama, football, golf, indoor track, journalism, music, skiing, soccer, softball, speech and debate, spirit

groups, student council, swimming, tennis, track & field, volleyball, and wrestling. In addition, the WHSAA acts as the coordinating agency for

the vocational activities DECA, FBLA, FFA, FCCLA and SkillsUSA.

The WHSAA sponsors culminating events leading to the determination of team and/or individual champions in these activities and provides

trophies, medals, and certificates for the teams in these events.

VALUES

The WYOMING HIGH SCHOOL ACTIVITIES ASSOCIATION believes that interscholastic activities programs are essential to the education of

youth, and therefore, are an integral part of the school curriculum. By promoting activities, the WHSAA establishes its belief that Wyoming

youth gain immeasurable values from these programs and reaffirms its conviction that excellence in education can be achieved through

activities. The values of high school activities and their impact upon the lives of Americans are immeasurable. The experiences and lifelong

lessons provided by participation have earned interscholastic activities an integral role in the educational process. Not only do interscholastic

activities benefit and directly influence participants, but they also instill pride and unifying spirit among students, fans, schools, and

communities throughout the nation. The inherent values of activity programs are both realistic and vivid. Participation provides the opportunity

to build strong minds and bodies, fosters a cooperative spirit and sportsmanship, creates poise and confidence and teaches discipline and the

self-satisfaction of accomplishing goals.

SERVICES

Over the past years, the WHSAA has experienced an ever increasing demand from schools, students, and communities to provide them with

the necessary services to meet the needs of growing activities programs and the information required to manage them effectively.

In addition to coordinating all culminating events, the Association serves as a clearing house for all activities, rules information, records, and

Association information. Acting as the representative for high school activities, the WHSAA also works with other education-related agencies

to ensure the place of co-curricular activities in the education spectrum.

WHSAA CULMINATING EVENT PHILOSOPHY

Culminating Event is defined as any and all district, regional, and state tournaments.

#1 PRIORITIES FOR STUDENTS:

The culminating events should feature:

• quality participants and teams from each regional.

• a positive learning experience for all involved.

• equal opportunities to qualify for the State Finals.

• the best officials available.

• the opportunity to play before a large, enthusiastic crowd.

• a safe, orderly environment.

• a carefully planned tournament format including qualifying procedures and tournaments as well as the State Finals.

• good sportsmanship on behalf of participants and spectators.

• what best suits the student/athletes for that gender, sport, and classification.

• the opportunity to play on/in quality facilities that enhance performance.

#2 PRIORITIES FOR SCHOOLS:

Schools should experience:

• a minimal loss of student-teacher contact time.

• competition against teams of similar ability and similar enrollment.

• an opportunity to showcase their best participants.

#3 PRIORITIES FOR PARENTS:

Parents should always model examples of good sportsmanship and have the opportunity for the following:

• motel rooms and dining establishments close to the tournament site.

• events scheduled to not conflict with the traditional workweek as much as possible.

• opportunity for seating in tournament.

#4 PRIORITIES FOR OTHERS:

Communities should have:

• the opportunity to host regional tournaments, based on appropriate criteria.

• the opportunity to make proposals for state culminating events through an objective proposal process.

Administrative WHSAA districts should have:

• the opportunity to set times of games as allowed within the WHSAA tournament formats.

The Wyoming High School Activities Association should have:

• the opportunity to increase the percentage of funding of the WHSAA office based on gate receipts and associated revenues

realized from state events.

[8]

RECOMMENDED FACILITY SPECIFICATIONS TO HOST REGIONAL TOURNAMENTS

ACTIVITY 4A 3A 2A 1A OTHER

SEATING SEATING SEATING SEATING

VOLLEYBALL 750 750 500 350

Center court available 23' minimum

overhead obstruction.

BASKETBALL 1200 1000 500 500

Court not less than 84' by 48' with all

markings including coaches box.

West Regional Minimum 25' ceiling.

1500

WRESTLING 1000 750 500 Area for two mats in one gym.

TRACK 1000 750 300 200 Six/eight lane track with 42" lanes.

FOOTBALL 1500 1000 300 200

Other specs common to all sports:

• The facility must be adequately constructed to control the entry and exit of spectators for the purpose of charging admission.

• The facility must have a minimum of two restrooms (one male and one female) for public use.

• The facility must have an electronic clock and scoreboard clearly visible to both teams areas and spectators.

• The facility must have a public address system.

• The facility must have separate dressing areas for home and visiting teams with restroom and shower facilities.

• The facility must have a separate dressing area for officials, preferably with access to restroom and shower facilities.

[9]

CONSTITUTION

PREAMBLE

Recognizing the educational value of interscholastic activities, we voluntarily agree to unite in this Association to regulate, control, and enjoy

the greatest benefits to be derived from participation in them. It is not our desire to interfere in any manner, whatsoever, with the local

autonomy of schools, but rather to be devoted to the elimination of excesses and abuses of over enthusiastic promotion which accompanies

unrestricted interscholastic activities, and we are resolved to foster desirable outcomes through the Constitution, rules, and interpretation of

the rules of this Association.

ARTICLE I - NAME

The name of this organization shall be the Wyoming High School Activities Association.

ARTICLE II - PURPOSE

The general purpose of this organization shall be to supervise and conduct approved activities of the Association.

ARTICLE III - MEMBERSHIP

Any high school, public or private, in the state of Wyoming may become a member of this Association upon meeting the requirements of

membership as set forth in the rules.

ARTICLE IV - ADMINISTRATION DISTRICTS

For the purposes of administration only, the state shall be divided into four administrative districts as follows:

DISTRICT NO. I: Lincoln, Uinta, Sweetwater, Carbon, Teton, and Sublette Counties.

DISTRICT NO. 2: Albany, Laramie, Platte, Goshen, Converse, and Niobrara Counties.

DISTRICT NO. 3: Fremont, Park, Big Horn, Washakie, and Hot Springs Counties.

DISTRICT NO. 4: Sheridan, Johnson, Campbell, Weston, Crook, and Natrona Counties.

ARTICLE V - ADMINISTRATION

There shall be established a Board of Directors of nineteen members. There shall be one Class 1A, one Class 2A, one Class 3A, and one

Class 4A representative from each Administrative District and they shall be elected for three year terms in a manner to be established by the

Board of Directors in the rules of the Association.

Also serving on the Board of Directors, with full voting rights, will be two members of the Wyoming School Boards Association elected by its

membership and one professional staff member of the State Department of Education appointed by the State Superintendent of Public

Instruction.

ARTICLE VI - DUTIES OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS

The duties of the Board of Directors shall be as follows:

1. To exercise general supervision of the activities of the Association and to convene when necessary to conduct the affairs of the

Association.

2. To supervise and control the fiscal affairs of the Association.

3. To interpret the rules of the Association.

4. To enforce the rules of the Association.

5. To employ a Commissioner and other personnel to conduct the activities of the Association and to act in periods of time when

the Board of Directors is not in session.

6. To hold at least four regular meetings each year.

7. To establish classifications, assign districts, regions, and assign member schools therein and direct the culminating events at

regional and state levels.

ARTICLE VII - VIOLATIONS

The Board of Directors shall, through their Commissioner, investigate violations of the constitution and rules of the Association.

The Commissioner shall have the authority to take disciplinary action against offending member schools of the Association. Any disciplinary

action taken shall be reviewed by the Board of Directors.

Disciplinary action in the form of suspension or expulsion shall be limited to not more than one calendar year.

ARTICLE VIII - MEMBERSHIP MEETING

The Board of Directors may call a meeting of all member schools of the Association and shall notify each school in writing of the meeting.

The membership meeting will be held with no less than two-thirds majority present. Each member school shall be entitled to one vote to be

cast by each school’s official representative who must be a certificated school administrator.

[10]

The President shall rule out of order any motion that would deprive a representative of his/her vote.

ARTICLE IX - AMENDMENTS

Proposed amendments to the constitution of this Association shall be submitted from administrative districts in writing to the office of the

Commissioner not less than sixty days prior to a meeting of the Board of Directors. Member schools shall be notified by the Commissioner of

all proposed amendments not less than thirty days before the Board of Directors meeting. Any proposed amendments shall be submitted to

the Board of Directors meeting. If a two-thirds majority of the Board of Directors vote in-favor, the amendment shall be submitted to the entire

membership for a mail referendum vote. An affirmative vote of two-thirds of the member schools who voted within twenty days shall be

required for ratification.

ARTICLE X - RULES

Rules for the conduct of the activities of the Association shall be established and shall conform to the articles of the constitution and may be

adopted, revised, or repealed in the following manner:

1. By a majority vote of the members present and voting at a scheduled meeting of the Board of Directors.

2. At the request of two or more administrative districts, a vote will be taken of all member schools to change a rule of the

WHSAA. If a majority of the schools voting within twenty days vote to change a rule, it shall be done and will become effective

July 1, next.

ARTICLE XI - ELIGIBILITY

There shall be established rules of eligibility for all student participants in the activities of the Association.

ARTICLE XII - HEARINGS

1. Aggrieved Parties May Appeal Decision

If a participant, parent, contest official, coach, or member school is dissatisfied with a decision of the Board of Directors or the

Commissioners’ interpretation of a provision or provisions of the Constitution, Bylaws, or rules and regulations of the

Association and such individual or school is an aggrieved and affected party, such a party may within 15 days of the receipt of

the decision, submit in writing by certified mail or email, return receipt requested, a notice of appeal of the decision and a

request for a formal hearing.

2. Investigation

The Commissioner or his staff, or such representative of the Association designated by the Board of Directors shall investigate

all matters upon which the appeal is based. Investigations shall be performed so as to bring the matter to hearing, unless for

cause otherwise shown, no later than the next regularly scheduled meeting of the Board.

3. Notice

After completion of the investigation, the Commissioner shall notify the appealing party, by certified mail, return receipt

requested, of the time and place set for a hearing on the appeal. The notice shall be given at least seven days in advance of

the time set for the hearing. The hearing shall be conducted in conjunction with a regularly scheduled meeting of the Board.

However the matter may be heard at a special meeting of the Board in the event that the appealing party agrees to pay all the

costs incidental to such a special meeting. Prepayment in the form of a cashier's check or cash for the minimum of 50% of the

estimated cost is required.

4. Attendance at the Hearing

Representatives of member schools, contest officials, students, parents, and coaches who are appealing parties are entitled to

attend hearings. In the instance of a student submitting the appeal, such student may be represented by the member school

that the student attends. Any person entitled to be in attendance at such hearing may represent themselves. Such persons are

also entitled to be represented by counsel, provided that they notify all other parties involved in the appeal of the name,

address, and telephone number of such counsel at least three days in advance of the hearing.

5. Board of Directors to Hear Appeals

The Board of Directors of the Association shall hear all appeals brought under the provisions of these rules. The President of

the Board of Directors may appoint a Hearing Officer to preside over the hearing or he may act as the Hearing Officer himself.

The Hearing Officer may, at the beginning of the hearing, ask for statements clarifying the issues involved or upon which

factual matters the appealing party will stipulate and agree to.

The Commissioner shall make available written copies of his/her investigation and may give testimony relative thereto. The

appealing party shall present its defense and proofs. The parties may offer such evidence, including the testimony of

witnesses, as they desire and which is relative to the proceedings. All testimony shall be given under oath. The Hearing Officer

will have the authority to administer the oaths. Each party shall have the right to cross examine witnesses of the adverse party.

All parties shall be afforded the opportunity to examine all documents introduced. Upon request of any party, the proceedings

of the hearing may be reported stenographically or by any other appropriate means as determined by the Hearing Officer. The

party requesting that the proceedings be reported, shall pay the cost thereof and shall also pay for the cost of transcription.

6. Closing of Hearing

The Hearing Officer shall specifically inquire of all parties whether they have further evidence. Upon receiving negative replies,

the Hearing Officer shall declare the hearing closed.

7. Hearing in Absence of a Member

The hearing may proceed in the absence of any party, who after it is shown has received due notice thereof, fails to be present

or fails to request an adjournment. Adjournments may be requested of the Hearing Officer upon the request of a party or upon

[11]

the initiative of the Hearing Officer. However, a decision shall not be made solely upon the default of a party, but shall be based

upon the evidence in the matter before the Board.

8. Decision of Board

The decision of the Board of Directors shall be made within seven days of the closing of the hearing. The decision shall be in

writing, signed by the Commissioner, and shall state the findings and conclusions of the Board. It shall be mailed to the

appealing party by certified mail, return receipt requested.

ARTICLE XIII - REPRESENTATION

Each member school shall appoint an official representative who is certificated and active as a school administrator to act as their agent in the

affairs of the Association. All communications between the Association and the member schools shall be directed to the agent so appointed

and/or to the Commissioner of the Association. It is further provided that whenever any communication in regard to a disciplinary action is

directed to said agent, a copy also shall be directed to the Clerk of the Board of Trustees of the agent's school district.

MEMBERSHIP

1. All high schools in the state now holding membership in the Association are automatically members upon submission of the

application form and payment of dues.

2. All member schools will pay dues by September 1. Schools that fail to submit dues by October 1 will forfeit all contests to that

date and will be excluded from participation in culminating events until dues are remitted.

3. Schools which are not members and wish to apply for membership must be accredited by the State Department of Education.

Private schools that request membership in the Association must meet accreditation requirements as designated by the Board

of Directors.

4. To obtain membership in the Association, an accredited school must submit the appropriate application and resolution to the

Board of Directors.

5. Application must be filed for each school year.

6. Pay dues on the following schedule (grades nine through twelve):

Group 1 Class 4A $1100

Group 2 Class 3A $1100

Group 3 Class 2A $1100

Group 4 Class 1A $1100

In addition, a $60 base fee per activity will be assessed. Schools that participate in activities that lose money will be assessed

an additional fee in the succeeding fall. A member school which does not re-enroll in an activity that experiences a financial

shortfall during the year that it is enrolled, shall be assessed the amount of the shortfall for the subsequent year only. The

Board will review these fees yearly at their April meeting for possible revision. Dues and/or fees per activity may be adjusted by

the Board of Directors based on the needs of the WHSAA.

7. If a member high school or affiliate member school does not offer a sport or activity it may apply for a combination school

agreement with a member high school that offers that sport. If such an agreement can be worked out, the visiting school's

enrollment figure of all eligible students of the gender of the sport concerned shall be added to the host school's spring

enrollment figure to determine classification. Administrators of both schools must agree to such participation. Only the host

school will be assessed the fee for participation when combining school's activities.

8. The Board of Directors may levy special assessments as deemed necessary to finance and conduct activities of the

Association, but shall not exceed 20 per cent of annual dues.

9. The Board of Directors will act upon all applications at its next regular meeting after the applications and dues have been

received in the office of the Association and will notify the applicant school of acceptance or rejection by return mail. In case of

rejection, the school so rejected shall be notified of the reason within ten days. If membership is rejected, the school is entitled

to a hearing.

10. The Association will maintain a list of approved schools. This list should be made and sent out to the concerned schools from

time to time.

11. Member schools may not participate in any activity with non-member schools except with written permission of the

Commissioner.

12. Permission to participate with out-of-state schools shall be approved only if the host out-of-state school is a member in good

standing of its state association.

[12]

1.00 ADMINISTRATION

1.1.0 BOARD OF DIRECTORS

1.1.1 For the purposes of electing Board of Directors, the schools in the several administrative districts shall be divided into four groups,

determined by enrollment:

Group 4A will be those schools with 700 or more students, grades nine through twelve.

Group 3A will be those schools with 201 – 699 students, grades nine through twelve.

Group 2A will be those schools with 110 – 209 students, grades nine through twelve.

Group 1A will be those schools with 109 or fewer students, grades nine through twelve.

1.1.2 A member of the Board of Directors must be either a certificated administrator or a Certified Athletic Administrator (CAA) designated

by the National Interscholastic Athletic Administrators Association and acting as a secondary school or district administrator in his or

her school district.

1.1.3 The term of office of members of the Board of Directors shall be for three years. Board members may serve no more than two

consecutive three year terms.

1.1.4 New members shall be elected according to the following schedule and every three years thereafter.

SW District 1A 2027

2A 2025

3A 2026

4A 2027

SE District 1A 2026

2A 2026

3A 2025

4A 2027

NW District 1A 2025

2A 2026

3A 2027

4A 2027

NE District 1A 2027

2A 2026

3A 2025

4A 2025

1.1.5 Also serving on the Board of Directors, with full voting rights, will be two members of the Wyoming School Boards Association

elected by its membership and one professional staff member of the State Department of Education appointed by the State

Superintendent of Public Instruction.

1.1.6 A President and a President-elect shall be elected by the Board of Directors from its membership for a one year term. No member

shall serve as President for more than two consecutive terms.

1.1.7 A vacancy existing during the year in any office except that of the presidency shall be filled by appointment by the President until the

next regular meeting of the District Administrators' Association. The District shall then elect a representative for the balance of the

term. In case of a vacancy for the presidency, the President-elect shall act as President for the unexpired term.

1.1.8 Representatives not able to attend a Board meeting shall notify their District President. The District President shall appoint a

representative for that meeting.

1.2.0 DUTIES OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS

1.2.1 Regular meetings of the Board of Directors shall be scheduled by the Board of Directors in February, April, September, and

November of each year.

1.2.2 The President of the Board of Directors may call special meetings when he/she deems it necessary.

1.2.3 In preparing the agenda, the President and/or Commissioner may include appropriate items. The WHSAA Board of Directors

agenda items must be presented in writing through the administrative districts. All proposals must meet the following deadlines in

order to be discussed at the four district meetings: September 1st for the first district meetings, October 1st for the second district

meetings, January 1st for the third district meetings, and March 1st for the fourth district meetings. If proposals are presented after

the above deadlines, the proposal will not be considered for first reading until the following round of district meetings.

The Board of Directors may add items which were not previously published on the agenda at the time of the meeting provided it is

done by two-thirds vote of the Board.

1.2.4 Member schools will file, with the Commissioner, all reports as directed by the Board of Directors.

1.2.5 Financial statements will be mailed to each member school once each year or prior to the time a special assessment might be

made.

[13]

1.2.6 The books of the WHSAA will be maintained by office staff and a financial review will be conducted annually by a certified public

accountant. The financial review will be submitted to the Board of Directors no later than the November meeting. Reports will be

made each quarter to the Board of Directors.

1.3.0 COMMISSIONER'S RESPONSIBILITY ON DISCIPLINARY ACTION

1.3.1 The Commissioner of the WHSAA has the authority to take suitable disciplinary action against member schools. Such action shall

be subject to review by the Board of Directors at its next regular or special meeting.

1.3.2 A special meeting of the Board to consider disciplinary action will be called at the request of a member school providing this request

is made by official action of the local school board and the member school agrees to reimburse the WHSAA for the expense of the

meeting.

1.3.3 PROCEDURE FOR ADDRESSING VIOLATIONS

1.3.4 The Board of Directors, through its Commissioner, will investigate all alleged violations of the rules or constitution when:

1. The Board members or its Commissioner have either personally or through written documentation gained knowledge of a

violation.

2. The Board of Directors or the Commissioner has received a written protest by a member school.

1.3.5 The Commissioner shall have the authority to take disciplinary action against offending member schools of the WHSAA. Any

disciplinary action taken shall be reviewed by the Board of Directors.

1.3.6 Disciplinary action in the form of warning, probation, or suspension shall be limited to not more than one calendar year.

1.3.7 Review procedure to be followed.

1. By the WHSAA:

a. The Commissioner shall obtain written statements from any available witnesses.

b. Said statements will be studied by the Commissioner and reported to the Board of Directors.

c. If, in the opinion of the Board of Directors, further investigation is necessary, the Commissioner or the Board of

Directors may meet with the agent or the Board of Trustees of the offending school.

d. If further disciplinary action of any type is deemed necessary, the Board of Directors or Commissioner will take

such action and communicate it to the offending schools, administrators, and the President and Clerk of the

School Board of the offending school.

2. By member schools:

a. File the complaint with the Commissioner.

b. If the initial complaint is not filed in writing, then it must be filed in writing within seven days of the initial

complaint.

c. Furnish affidavits if deemed necessary by the Commissioner or Board of Directors.

d. Attend the hearing if deemed necessary by the Commissioner or Board of Directors.

1.4.0 DISCIPLINARY ACTION

1.4.1 Late Assessment Fee For Failure to File Proper Form Prior to Participation

If the Record of Transfer or Foreign Exchange Student form is not posted or is posted by the member school following the

participation of a student who is eligible under all WHSAA eligibility requirements.

In addition, if the Record of Transfer or Foreign Exchange Student form is not posted or is posted by the member school following

the participation of a student who is ineligible under any WHSAA eligibility requirement. The member school shall forfeit any

contests in which that student participates in accordance with WHSAA Rule 5.0.7.

1.4.2 Forfeiture

Forfeiture is an official action taken when a school plays an ineligible participant, exceeds the contest level of a participant, or

exceeds the maximum contest limit for a squad. A school may also be required to forfeit a contest for other actions not covered

through other disciplinary action.

1.4.3 Warning

A warning is official notice that an inexcusable, unethical, or unsportsmanlike action is a matter of record and that such an action

must not occur again.

1.4.4 Probation

This is a more severe type of warning. A school on probation may be restricted from participating in any district, regional or state

level activity or an individual organization of the school may be so restricted for a designated period of time. This also implies that a

repeat offense would mean automatic suspension.

1.4.5 Suspension

Any school suspended from the WHSAA may not participate against any member school of the WHSAA nor against any member

school of any state association which is affiliated with the National Federation of State High School Associations during the period of

suspension. No school may be suspended from the WHSAA for more than one calendar year. Following notification to the school

board and the administration of the offending school, the WHSAA may publicize disciplinary action taken against member schools.

1.5.0 WHSAA Hearing Procedure

1. The proceedings for an appeal as outlined in Article XII of the Wyoming High School Activities Association Constitution

shall be conducted in the following manner:

[14]

a. Introduction of Board Members, appealing party, WHSAA staff, etc. Handout of any written materials with time

for Board and appealing party to review by reading.

b. Opening statements shall be allowed from the Wyoming High School Activities Association and followed by the

Appealing Party. The opening statements shall include identification of any witnesses to be called.

c. The Hearing Officer shall have the authority to administer the oaths and shall swear in all witnesses presenting

evidence at the hearing.

d. The Commissioner and/or the designated representative of the Wyoming High School Activities Association

shall present the information gathered and coordinated by the Commissioner regarding the investigation of the

matters concerning the appeal. A written copy of the investigation shall be submitted to all parties and the Board

of Directors for their consideration and review.

e. The appealing parties shall have the opportunity to cross-examine any witnesses or testimony received by the

Commissioner and/or other witnesses presented through his investigation.

f. The appealing parties shall then present its arguments, witnesses and evidence regarding the matters on

appeal.

g. The Wyoming High School Activities Association Board of Directors and/or its counsel shall have the right to

cross-examine any witnesses that testify upon behalf of the appealing parties.

h. The Hearing Officer shall specifically inquire of all the parties whether they have further evidence. Upon

receiving negative replies, the Hearing Officer shall call for closing statements.

i. The Wyoming High School Activities Association, through its attorney, shall present its closing statements to its

Board of Directors.

j. The appealing parties shall make their closing statements to the Board of Directors of the Wyoming High School

Activities Association.

k. Upon hearing the closing statements of each party, the Hearing Officer shall declare the hearing closed and the

Board of Directors shall retire to make its decision in closed chambers.

2. The decision of the Board of Directors shall be in writing, signed by the Commissioner and shall state the findings and

conclusions of the Board of Directors. It shall be mailed to the appealing parties by certified mail, return receipt requested.

3. The Hearing Officer and Board of Directors of the Wyoming High School Activities Association shall be allowed to ask

questions of any of the parties, witnesses or other persons appearing in the formal hearing.

4. As provided by Article XII of the Wyoming High School Activities Association Constitution, the President of the Board of

Directors may act as Hearing Officer for the formal hearing or may appoint an independent party to act as the Hearing

Officer. The duties of the Hearing Officer shall be to conduct the hearing as outlined in Section 1 of this Procedure

Statement and it is understood and agreed that the Hearing Officer appointed for this hearing shall not cast a vote in the

decision made by the Board of Directors with regard to findings of fact and conclusions from the hearing.

5. The attorney for the Wyoming High School Activities Association, shall draft the findings and conclusions on behalf of the

Board of Directors.

2.00 ASSOCIATION PROGRAMS AND POLICIES

2.2.0 CATASTROPHIC INSURANCE

The WHSAA will make a catastrophic insurance program available to member schools in which each member school must enroll all

students in grades five (5) through twelve (12) that participate in an activity sanctioned by the WHSAA.

2.3.0 WHSAA BOARD OF DIRECTORS POLICIES AND PROCEDURES

2.3.1 WHSAA BOARD OF DIRECTORS PROCEDURE FOR ADOPTING, REVISING, OR REPEALING A RULE

1. First Reading

The appropriate committee will present all first reading items to the Board with a recommendation. Reaction to the

proposal is heard and the question may be called. An amendment to an original motion may be considered and acted

upon. All first reading items that pass by a majority vote will be taken back to the member schools to solicit further input.

2. Second Reading

The appropriate committee will present all second reading items to the Board with a recommendation. Reaction to the

proposal is heard and the question may be called. An amendment to an original motion may be considered and acted

upon without further readings being required. However, if additional information is needed, the proposal may be tabled.

3. The Board of Directors may suspend rules on first reading with a motion to suspend and a 2/3 affirmative vote for

handbook editorial changes and items needing immediate attention.

2.3.2 WHSAA BOARD OF DIRECTORS MEETING SCHEDULE

[15]

Unless by a favorable two-thirds vote of the majority of WHSAA Board members present at a meeting of the WHSAA Board,

WHSAA Rules, Regulations, and or policies may be introduced for first reading at the September or November Board meetings.

Business designated for Board meetings shall be as follows

FIRST MEETING OF THE YEAR (SEPTEMBER/OCTOBER)

1. Introduction to new year

2. Goal setting

3. Appointments to committees

4. First reading of proposed changes

5. Second reading of proposed changes

6. Second Reading Reclassification Proposal (At appropriate meeting during reclassification cycle)

SECOND MEETING OF THE YEAR (OCTOBER/NOVEMBER)

1. First reading of proposed changes

2. Second Reading of proposed changes

3. Approval of yearly audit

THIRD MEETING OF THE YEAR (FEBRUARY)

1. First reading of proposed changes

2. Second reading of proposed changes

3. Approval of State Culminating Event Proposals

4. Approval of the next school year’s calendar

FOURTH MEETING OF THE YEAR (APRIL)

1. First reading of proposed changes

2. Second reading of proposed changes

3. Evaluation and renewal of Commissioner’s contract

4. Approval of budget

5. Ball, award, photography and t-shirt bids when appropriate

6. First Reading Reclassification Proposal (At appropriate meeting during reclassification cycle)

2.3.3 POLICY FOR EXECUTIVE DECISION-MAKING PROCESS WHEN WHSAA RULES AND REGULATIONS DO NOT ADDRESS A

SPECIFIC ITEM

When the Commissioner determines that a specific situation or case does not fall within the parameter of WHSAA rules and

regulations, he/ she may request the advice of the Executive Council.

In the absence of the Commissioner or when the Commissioner determines, the Executive Council may serve as a rule interpreting

or goal setting body for the WHSAA.

The WHSAA Executive Council shall consist of at least five individuals and will include the following members:

1. The WHSAA President

2. The WHSAA President-elect

3. The WHSAA immediate Past-President

4. The chairperson of all WHSAA committees

5. If a particular group is not represented in the aforementioned categories, the following members shall be

appointed by the President

a. One member from each classification

b. One member from each of the four administrative districts.

2.3.4 RECOGNITION OF SERVICE

The Wyoming High School Activities Association recognizes three levels of service.

Level 1: The Wyoming High School Activities Association Meritorious Service Award is the Association's highest award and is

presented by the Board of Directors for extraordinary contributions to Wyoming high school activities. The recipient will

also receive the WHSAA "Gold Pass:'

Level 2: The second level of service recognized by the WHSAA is the "Gold Pass" which is awarded to any retiring school person

who has provided outstanding service to a member school. The "Gold Pass", which is a lifetime pass, admits the holder

free of charge to any activity held in any member school's facility, including tournaments. All those individuals earning

selection to the Wyoming Coaches Association Hall of Fame receive this award.

The individual must be nominated by a Board member or the Commissioner to receive the "Gold Pass." Each nomination

must be accompanied by a resume of the services rendered by the nominated person. Each member of the Board of

Directors will also receive this pass.

Level 3: The third level of service recognized by the WHSAA is the "Gold Certificate" This certificate is a gesture of appreciation by

the Association to any person who has made a significant contribution to the WHSAA.

A nomination for this award must be made by a Board of Director's member or the Commissioner.

This nomination must be in writing and must receive a favorable vote by the Board members. Presentation of this award

may be through the mail.

2.4.0 CONTAGIOUS DISEASE POLICY

[16]

In order to address concerns about the spread of contagious diseases, (AIDS, hepatitis, etc.) the WHSAA Board of Directors has

adopted the following policy:

2.4.1 Before competing in a practice or contest, a student/athlete must cover any open wound on his/her body. This will reduce the risk of

transmission of a blood-borne pathogen from his/her open wound to the open wound or mucous membrane of another person or

vice versa.

If the bleeding resumes, the practice or contest must be stopped again and any potentially contaminated surfaces cleaned. It is up

to the discretion of the official in charge of the competition (i.e. referee in football and basketball, etc.) as to how many times the

competition should be stopped due to a student/athlete's bleeding before that student/athlete is disqualified from further participation

in that contest.

Whenever a participant suffers a laceration or wound where oozing or bleeding occurs, the practice or game should be stopped at

the earliest possible time, and the player should be escorted from the area for the appropriate treatment. The student/athlete should

not return to the game/practice until bleeding has been arrested and the open wound properly covered.

2.4.2 The referee should stop the contest as prescribed by National Federation rules if it is necessary to clean blood-spill and/or provide

first aid. The referee must NOT clean up the blood spill.

If the contestant must change uniforms, he/she will be allowed to do so without penalty as provided by National Federation rules for

that sport.

2.4.3 Whenever possible, the individual should give themselves first aid to avoid getting blood into another's mouth, eyes, or open sore. If

such exposure occurs, rinse exposed body area thoroughly with water.

1. If the individual has any breaks in the skin, use an antibacterial to cleanse the wound and cover it with a dressing.

2. If the participant's uniform is soaked with blood, the uniform should be changed.

2.4.4 The host school is responsible for cleaning the area in the following manner:

1. A solution made from 1 - 10 dilution of household bleach or similar commercial product should be used.

2. While wearing rubber gloves, personnel should wipe the area clean with towels and then dispose of the towels into a

plastic bag.

3. While wearing rubber gloves, personnel should then scrub the area with a solution of disinfectant. Rubber gloves should

be disposed into a plastic bag. The user should then wash his/her hands immediately.

4. The referee should then restart the contest as prescribed by the National Federation Rules.

2.4.5 UNCONSCIOUS ATHLETE

Any student who loses consciousness during an event will not be allowed to participate for the remainder of that day. In order to

return to practice or play in the future, the student must be cleared by an appropriate health care professional.

2.4.6 CONCUSSIONS

Any student who exhibits signs, symptoms or behaviors consistent with a concussion (such as loss of consciousness, headache,

dizziness, confusion, or balance problems) shall be immediately removed from the contest or practice and shall not return to play

until cleared by an appropriate health care professional.

Each School District should determine which appropriate health care professionals will be allowed to clear students to return to play

(RTP).

2.4.7 EMERGENCY ACTION PLANS

Emergency action plans are required for all practice and competition venues/locations. Plans are required to be shared with all

pertinent school personnel, including, but not limited to students, coaches, athletic trainers, school nurses and administrators in case

of an emergency.

2.5.0 EQUITY IN WHSAA OFFERINGS

The Wyoming High School Activities Association fully supports equal opportunity for the youth of Wyoming.

2.6.0 TEAMS/INDIVIDUALS UNABLE TO ARRIVE FOR SCHEDULED COMPETITION AT A CULMINATING EVENT

The WHSAA believes that all teams/individuals that earn the right to participate in culminating events should have those rights

protected as much as possible.

A culminating event shall be defined as the event(s) of post-season competition, inclusive of regional and state competition.

It shall be the responsibility of the competing school(s) to notify the WHSAA office or the event manager if the school is having

difficulty traveling to the event site and may not arrive in time for the scheduled event(s). Notification shall be made as soon as

possible after it becomes evident that the team/individual is having difficulty.

School personnel have the responsibility of making alternative travel plans to tournament sites based upon weather forecasts and

any other pertinent information. As a common factor, input and recommendations are to be sought from the Highway Patrol and/or

the Department of Transportation.

[17]

Specific circumstances not covered by this policy are left to the discretion of the Commissioner of the WHSAA and/or the WHSAA

Executive Council.

1. If a team/individual is unable to arrive at a culminating event site for their scheduled competition due to circumstances

beyond their control, that team/individual will be allowed to participate in their scheduled event provided they arrive at the

event site and are able to compete on the day of their scheduled event. The WHSAA Commissioner, in cooperation with

the event manager, shall adjust the schedule of the event for the purpose of allowing maximum participation for all

qualified schools.

If the team/individual is unable to arrive to compete on the day of its event, a forfeit is recorded and that team/individual

shall move into the consolation bracket or be dropped from competition, whichever is applicable to the particular event.

2. When the number of teams/individuals unable to reach the event site for their scheduled event exceeds 25% of those

participating, the event manager, the WHSAA Commissioner, shall consider postponement or cancellation of all or part of

the day's activities. An alternative schedule shall be determined by the events manager after consultation with the

WHSAA Commissioner and a representative of the participating schools.

3. Should the need arise for the schedule of a culminating event to be altered, the WHSAA rule regarding the ban on Sunday

activities may be waived. However, such action should be taken only as a last resort.

4. For the purpose of this policy, the TOTAL number of schools/teams scheduled to attend the event shall be the number

used from which to obtain the percentage of those needed, regardless of the number of classifications scheduled to

attend the event.

5. For the purpose of this policy, when the percentage used results in a number that is not a whole number, the number shall

be rounded up to the next whole number. For example, if a tournament is being held for 30 teams, 25% of the total would

be 7.5 which would be rounded up to 8.

6. In football, should one team be unable to arrive at a culminating site due to circumstances beyond its control, the contest

shall be rescheduled to allow maximum participation for all qualified schools.

2.6.1 OUTDOOR EVENT PLAYING CONDITIONS

The WHSAA believes that the safety of participants is of the utmost importance and at the same time realizes that many times

teams/individuals participating in outdoor events, particularly football playoffs, have traveled a great distance. Therefore, site

managers must take these concerns into consideration while determining if a playoff contest shall be held if weather conditions are

poor.

The site manager shall consider the temperature, the wind and its effect on the temperature, and the condition of the playing

surface. The site manager shall also receive input from individuals representing both competing schools and the WHSAA

Commissioner.

2.6.2 POLITICAL DISPLAYS AND/OR SOLICITATION

The WHSAA shall not allow any political displays and/or solicitation at the site of its regional or state events. In addition, all

commercial displays and/or solicitation shall be prohibited unless prior approval has been granted through an agreement with the

host school and/or the WHSAA.

2.6.3 BANDS AT CULMINATING EVENTS CRITERIA

1. The tournament manager will determine the availability of space, and if space is available, will assign seating for bands.

2. A school's band will be admitted free only for those sessions during which its team is playing.

3. The band director accompanies and vouches for each member

4. Music may not be played during live ball.

5. Drums may be used only to accompany a musical selection.

6. If two bands are attending, bands will alternate selections or play the same selection together.

7. The home team's band will play the National Anthem if a singer is not assigned.

8. Bands are limited in size to 45 participants or less.

2.6.4 WHSAA AFFILIATE MEMBER PARTICIPATION PROGRAM

The WHSAA recognizes two types of affiliate members. Those students that are home schooled and those students that attend a

State Department of Education accredited virtual school in which their home district has chosen not to sign a memorandum of

understanding (MOU).

Home School Definition

Home school is a program of educational instruction provided to a child by the child’s parent or legal guardian or by a person

designated by the parent or legal guardian. An instructional program provided to more than one (1) family unit does not constitute a

home school.

These home school Affiliate Members:

1. Must apply for Affiliate WHSAA Membership each year before the first practice of the appropriate fall, winter or spring

season.

2. Have no voting powers within the WHSAA.

3. Must pay the enrollment fee each school year as outlined below:

[18]

a. One hundred dollar affiliate membership fee per home school.

b. The Catastrophic Insurance Fee

c. The assessed WHSAA activity fee for each activity in which the Affiliate Member wishes to participate. (The fee

is not charged to Affiliate Member Home Schools that enter into a combination school agreement as the visiting

school.)

d. If the Affiliate Member enters into a combination school agreement as the visiting school, the host school

becomes the student’s school of choice for all sports and activities offered by the host school. If there is a

change from the original agreement to an agreement with a different host school, all transfer rules will apply.

4. Must satisfy the statutory requirements of the State of Wyoming as specified for home school educational programs while

an Affiliate Member of the WHSAA.

Virtual School Definition

Those students in which their home district has chosen not to sign a memorandum of understanding (MOU) with a State Department

of Education accredited virtual school will be eligible to apply as an Affiliate Member.

These virtual school Affiliate Members:

1. Must apply for Affiliate WHSAA Membership each year before the first practice of the appropriate fall, winter or spring

season.

2. Have no voting powers within the WHSAA.

3. Must pay the enrollment fee each school year as outlined below:

a. One hundred dollar affiliate membership fee per virtual school family.

b. The Catastrophic Insurance Fee

c. The assessed WHSAA activity fee for each activity in which the Affiliate Member wishes to participate. (The fee

is not charged to Affiliate Member Virtual Schools that enter into a combination school agreement as the visiting

school.)

d. If the Affiliate Member enters into a combination school agreement as the visiting school, the host school

becomes the student’s school of choice for all sports and activities offered by the host school. If there is a

change from the original agreement to an agreement with a different host school, all transfer rules will apply.

WHSAA Rules and Regulations

Affiliate Member schools must abide by the WHSAA Constitution, and all bylaws, rules and regulations of the association.

The Affiliate Member’s schools student must meet the guidelines for activity participation required for all other students as defined in

the current WHSAA Handbook.

2.6.5 WHSAA REIMBURSEMENT POLICY

The WHSAA realizes the financial impact that providing quality activity programs has upon local districts' budgets and makes this

opportunity available to help districts continue in their efforts to provide the best learning environment possible for Wyoming

students.

Reimbursement is available for sanctioned school sponsored student activity group travel to WHSAA State Tournaments and

Events according to the following schedule.

Over 300 miles one way = $100.00

Over 380 miles one way = $150.00

Over 420 miles one way = $200.00

Mileage is determined by the distances as recorded by the Wyoming State map of the Wyoming State Highway Commission.

Member schools must submit the WHSAA Reimbursement Form within thirty (30) days of the State Culminating Event in order to

qualify.

2.6.6 Lightning Policy Recommendation

A chain of command and designated decision-maker should be established for each organized practice and competition. It is

recommended to assign staff member(s) to watch the weather. This could be administration, athletic trainer, and/or coach, etc. The

person(s) identified shall actively watch/monitor the weather and must be able to see 360 degrees around without any obstructions

as lightning can strike up to 10 miles from the location of the main storm

Establishing a Lightning Safety Plan

A thorough, documented lightning safety plan is the most effective way for high schools to prevent lightning related casualties or

injuries in their activity programs. The information in the plan must be disseminated to the correct, qualified personnel and practiced

on a routine basis.

It is important to formulate and implement a proactive, comprehensive lightning emergency plan that should include:

• Advance Planning

• A systematic approach for monitoring local weather conditions

• Education of staff to recognize signs of nearby lightning activity

• Criteria for suspension and resumption of play

• Evacuation plan including nearby safe shelters

• Periodic review and practice of the plan by appropriate high school personnel

Criteria for Suspension and Resumption of Activity

A distance of ten miles, which should provide ample opportunity to remove any athletes from the outdoor playing field, area and

indoor/outdoor swimming pools, and get them into a fully enclosed building with wiring & plumbing. The plumbing and electricity

within a building act as a conductor to direct the electricity away from the building and use of these should be avoided during an

[19]

electrical storm. For the same reason the use of an indoor pool should be avoided, unless proven otherwise by the engineer of the

pool. If building is not available then a fully enclosed vehicle or bus would be recommended. Unsafe locations also include tents,

dugouts, screened porches, storage sheds, gazebos, press boxes, and open garages.

After suspension, the plan should include strict, documented criteria for the resumption of activities. It is recommended to wait 30

minutes after the last flash of lightning is witnessed or thunder is heard, or once lightning has been more than 10 miles away for 30

minutes. Any subsequent lightning or thunder after the beginning of the 30 minute count should restart the clock and another count

should begin.

Lightning detection equipment is available on the market and could be included and used as a supplement in a lightning policy.

Recommended reliable means of monitoring the weather:

• www.weather.gov

• Internet link to the NWS Forecast office

• Weather radios with continual updates on the most recent forecasts

• Commercial real-time lightning detection network

o US National Lightning Detection Network

o US Precision Lightning Network

o Weather Bug Total Lightning Network

o Thor Guard

o Perry Weather

Supplemental devices to be used in conjunction with the above recommendations

• Pager, cell phone, smart phone, or email can transmit via automatic notification

o (Please note these only work with already formed active thunderstorms moving into the area).

• Handheld lightning detectors

o (Performance of these have not been independently verified & should not be used as the sole source for

determining when to move to a safe location).

2.7.0 WHSAA AWARDS

2.7.1 The awards listed are provided by the Wyoming High School Activities Association. Should a true tie exist for a team trophy or

individual medal, the additional item(s) will be provided by the WHSAA. Should a member school wish additional, individual awards,

they may purchase them by contacting the WHSAA office.

Basketball

Team Awards

Regionals 1A, 2A, 3A and 4A - Four plaque plates - 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th

State (All four classes) - Four trophies - 1st, 2nd, 3rd and Consolation

Individual Awards

District & Regional - Championship team receives 12 medals

State - Championship and runner-up teams receive 12 medals

Spirit Groups

State Team Awards - Dance 3A and 4A

Three trophies - 1st, 2nd and 3rd when six (6) or seven (7) teams are competing in a classification.

Four trophies - 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th when eight (8) or more teams are competing in a classification.

State Team Awards - Cheer 3A and 4A

Three trophies - 1st, 2nd and 3rd when six (6) or seven (7) teams are competing in a category.

Four trophies - 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th when eight (8) or more teams are competing in a category.

Cross Country

Team Awards

State 2A/3A/4A Boys and Girls - Four trophies - 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th

Individual Awards

State 2A/3A/4A Boys and Girls - Medals for top ten finishers

Football

Team Awards

State Championship Series - Two trophies in each class - 1st and 2nd

Individual Awards

State – Championship team only: 4A receives 50 medals, 3A receives 45 medals, 2A receives 35 medals, 1A

receives 30 medals, 1A-6man receives 20 medals,

Golf

Team Awards

State - Boys and Girls 2A/3A/4A - Four trophies each - 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th

Individual Awards

State - 2A/3A/4A Boys and Girls - Medals for top ten finishers

Indoor Track

Team Awards

State - Boys and Girls - Four Trophies - 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th

Individual Awards

State - Boys and Girls - Medals for top 8 finishers in each event

Skiing

Team Awards

State - Boys and Girls, Alpine and Nordic - Two trophies each, 1st and 2nd

Individual Awards

[20]

State - Boys and Girls - Alpine - Medals for each event’s top five finishers

Nordic - Medals for each event’s top ten finishers

Soccer

Team Awards

Regionals - Boys and Girls - Four plaque plates each, 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th

State - Boys and Girls - Four trophies each - 1st, 2nd, 3rd and Consolation

Individual Awards

Regionals - Championship team receives 20 medals

State - Championship and runner-up teams receive 20 medals

Softball

Team Awards

Regionals – Girls - Four plaque plates each, 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th

State - Girls - Four trophies - 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th

Individual Awards

Regionals - Championship team receives 18 medals

State Girls - Championship and runner-up teams receive 18 medals

Swimming

Team Awards

State - 3A/4A Boys and Girls – Four trophies each - 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th

Individual Awards

State 3A/4A Boys and Girls - Medals for each event’s top six finishers

Tennis

Team Awards

Regionals - Boys and Girls - Three plaque plates - 1st, 2nd and 3rd

State - Boys and Girls -Four trophies - 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th

Individual Awards

Regionals - Boys and Girls - Medals to top four finishers in each bracket.

State - Boys and Girls - Medals to top four finishers in each bracket.

Track

Team Awards

Regionals - If six or more teams participate in the regional meet, three plaque plates are awarded - 1st, 2nd and

3rd.

If less than six participate, two plaque plates are awarded - 1st and 2nd

State - All four classes, Boys and Girls - Four trophies - 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th

Individual Awards

Regionals - Medals for each event’s individuals who qualifies by place for state at this meet. Medals for each

individual on a relay team that qualifies by place for state at this meet.

State - Medals for each event’s top eight finishers

Volleyball

Team Awards

Regionals 1A, 2A, 3A and 4A - Four plaque plates - 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th

State - All four classes - Four trophies - 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th.

Individual Awards

Regionals - Championship team receives 12 medals

State - Championship and runner-up teams receive 12 medals

Wrestling

Boys Team Awards

2A, 3A and 4A Regionals - Three plaque plates - 1st, 2nd and 3rd

State - All three classes - Four trophies - 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th

Girls Team Awards

Regionals - Three plaque plates - 1st, 2nd and 3rd

State – One class - Four trophies - 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th

Boys Individual Awards

Regionals - Medals for each weight division’s top four finishers

State - Medals for each weight division’s top six finishers

Girls Individual Awards

Regionals - Medals for each weight division’s top four finishers

State - Medals for each weight division’s top six finishers

Drama

Team Awards

Sweepstakes – Three winner and three runner-up trophies - 4A, 3A and 1A/2A

State - Three trophies - 1st, 2nd and 3rd for Proscenium, Arena, and Group Performance Art

Individual Awards

State - Dramatic Monologues, Humorous Monologues, Dramatic Two-Person Scene, Humorous Two Person

Scene, Scenic Design (1st through 4th year), Costume Design (1st through 4th year), Lighting Design (1st

through 4th year), Publicity Design (1st through 4th year), Real Make-up (1st through 4th year) and Fantasy

Make-up (1st through 4th year), Original Scripts (Monologues, Two-Person Scenes, and One-Act Plays) - 1st,

2nd and 3rd Place Medals In Each Level Of Each Acting And Technical Category. Each member of the

Wyoming All-State Cast receives a medal. Honorable Mention Certificates as deemed by the judges.

Marching Band

Team Awards

State -Trophies will be awarded to each band earning a superior rating.

Speech

Team Awards

[21]

State - Three trophies for each of three classes - Sweepstakes, Sweepstakes Runner-up and Sweepstakes

Third Place. If eight or more 1A schools enter the state tournament, a separate 1A sweepstakes trophy will be

awarded.

Individual Awards

State - All-class individual events - Six medals for each event's top six finishers.

All-class team events - Three medals for each event's top three finishers

Each class individual and team events - Three medals for each event's top three finishers

Student Council

Council Awards

State - Wyoming State Honor Council is awarded to each council which receives an 80% on established criteria.

Wyoming State Honor Council with Meritorious Distinction is awarded to each council which receives a 95% on

established criteria.

3.0.0 GENERAL ASSOCIATION RULES AND REGULATIONS

3.1.0 CLASSIFICATION OF SENIOR HIGH SCHOOLS

3.1.1 All member senior high schools shall be divided into classes, There shall be five classifications in football and four in basketball,

track and volleyball. The number of classifications in all other activities shall be divided from the four classification system. Please

see sport specific information in Rule 7.0.0 for each sport's classification.

3.1.2 The WHSAA Board of Directors will review classification at least every two years in all activities based upon the member schools’

enrollments figures. For the purpose of clarification, the enrollment figures shall be based on the ADM figure provided by each

member school to the State Department of Education in the spring of the school year prior to discussion on reclassification. Spring

2023 ADM figures will be used to determine classifications for 2024-25 and 2025-26, and spring 2025 ADM figures will be used to

determine classifications for 2026-27 and 2027-28, and so forth. Ninth grade students in WHSAA member schools are counted in

their ADM when figuring WHSAA Classifications. A school may petition to change classification if it feels its classification is unjust.

This request must be made in writing to the WHSAA office and should be made before the November WHSAA Board of Directors

Meeting of the year that the reclassification cycle is finalized.

3.1.21 WHSAA Board of Directors Meetings on First and Second Readings of the Reclassification Proposal developed by the

Reclassification Committee will be First Reading at the April WHSAA Board Meeting during the cycle and Second Reading at the

September WHSAA Board Meeting during the cycle.

3.1.22 Participating Outside The Classification Determined by the WHSAA Board of Directors

All schools will compete in culminating events in the classification their enrollment figure (as per ADM count as per WHSAA Rule

3.1.2) dictates as determined by the WHSAA Board. A member school may petition the WHSAA Board to move up in classification

in a sport or activity for the two years of the reclassification cycle and if that request is granted, they will also compete in the

culminating event in that new classification. This request must be made before the November WHSAA Board Meeting of the year

that the reclassification cycle is finalized. A member school must participate in its assigned classification or petition to move up a

classification to be eligible to participate in the WHSAA culminating event in that activity.

3.1.23 Reclassification When Closing A School

When a member school is closed or discontinued, the total number of those students who enroll in another member school shall be

added to the most current ADM of the receiving school. As soon as students enroll in a receiving school they shall be added to the

receiving school’s most current ADM figures and if this moves the receiving school up into a higher classification the move shall

happen immediately. The WHSAA office shall notify the member school of such a move. The member school(s) involved in a move

up because of adding new students will be the only school(s) to change classification.

Reclassification When Adding A School

When a school district plans to add an additional school involving students in grades 9-12, they should work with the WHSAA office

in developing a plan concerning classification for this new school and their existing school(s) well in advance of the reclassification

cycle that will be in effect when the new school opens. Any school opening with less than the traditional 9-12 grade levels, will be

classified by prorating their current enrollment to the equivalent of four grade levels. For example: a school with a class of 125

sophomores, and 130 freshman would be classified the same as a school of 510 students.

3.1.25 POLICY ON HANDLING OF CULMINATING EVENT PROPOSALS WITH RECLASSIFICATION ITEMS

Proposals that would affect WHSAA regional and state culminating events by necessitating changes in any of the following list of

items will be considered during the April and September Meetings of the reclassification year:

1. Date of Culminating events

2. Number of qualifiers

3. Bracketing format

4. Size of tournament

5. Changes in qualifying procedures from regional to state

6. Schools changing regionals

7. Class size for tournament

Member schools and groups should plan ahead and present proposals well in advance to district groups for discussion and final

revisions before sending them on to the WHSAA Board of Directors for placement on the agendas of the meetings listed above.

[22]

3.1.26 POLICY ON DISTRICTS COMBINING FOR A REGIONAL TOURNAMENT

Two WHSAA administrative districts are allowed to combine to determine their qualifiers to the WHSAA State culminating event.

This can be done by class and by sport. The number of state qualifiers from a regional tournament will not exceed the combined

total for both of the original district allotments.

In the event that two districts combine, the WHSAA will establish appropriate state first round pairings.

A request to combine must be submitted to and approved by the WHSAA Board on or before the February meeting prior to the

desired school year. This request must first be approved by a simple majority of each of the combining administrative district's class

membership and signed documentation must be included with the request.

3.1.3 COMBINATION SCHOOL

3.1.31 A member school or affiliate member school can combine with another member school only for those activities not sponsored by

one of the member schools.

3.1.32 The principal from the visiting school shall complete the portions of the Combination School Agreement form that pertains directly to

his/her high school and forward to the host school. The host school principal shall complete the remaining portions of the

Combination School Agreement and return it to the WHSAA office.

The Combination School Agreement form is to be submitted to the WHSAA office before the first date of the competition of the

season in which the team competes as a combined team.

3.1.33 The visiting school must count the enrollment of all eligible students of that gender for that activity at the time of the combining.

When an enrollment figure is not available for fall activities, the last day’s enrollment of the preceding school year shall be used. (if

combining for boys cross country, then only boys would be counted.) This figure shall be added to the home school's projected (8-

11) spring enrollment figure to determine if there will be a move up in classification. The host school shall be the larger of the two

schools when entering into a combination agreement.

3.1.34 Enrollment notification and number of students eligible for each activity will be sent to the home school and the WHSAA.

3.1.35 Encouraging participation may be done only after approval for the combining has been secured from all schools involved, and after

the WHSAA has reviewed the request. Contact may be made only with approval of each school's administration. Encouraging

participation may be done only if no other conflicting activities are offered at the visiting school.

3.1.36 Visiting schools may send students to only one school for each activity. An exception to add another school for the same activity

may be made by the Commissioner if he deems a hardship exists that would prohibit a student’s participation in the activity. If the

activity is an individual sport such as wrestling, track, indoor track, swimming, skiing, cross country, tennis, golf, and all fine arts and

vocational education programs, the combined school team must compete as designated for the regular season as well as

culminating events.

3.1.37 All WHSAA rules involving transfers, hardships, and scholastic eligibility will apply.

3.1.38 The Commissioner will review the agreement on all combination school requests and place the combined school's team in the

appropriate classification. If the Commissioner determines that a combined team will adversely affect the classification structure, the

Commissioner will deny the request for combining.

3.1.39 Once an agreement is reached to combine, reapplication must be made annually to the WHSAA.

If a visiting school chooses to enter into a combination school agreement with a different host school in the same activity, all transfer

rules will apply. An exception may be made by the Commissioner if he deems a hardship exists.

3.1.391 Combining schools should resolve issues that address the following:

1. Expenses normally associated with issues that address the following

2. Expenses associated with travel such as meals and lodging, and travel expense to and from home school

3. Gate receipts and student and adult activity passes

4. Practice time that affects loss of school time

5. Scheduling, development, and enforcement of eligibility rules, and the rights of visiting schools students

6. Geographical location of combining schools

7. Medical and catastrophic insurance

8. Cheerleaders

9. Use of team uniforms

10. Copy of local school board action from all participating schools that stipulates the action taken.

3.1.4 WHSAA member schools may compete against only those schools that are members of the WHSAA or are a school allowed to

compete with members of another state's association. Students are allowed to compete in cultural exchange programs.

EXCEPTIONS: Member schools may participate against the Worland Industrial Institute and the Sheridan Girls School. Students

from these two schools participating against other Wyoming high school teams shall meet WHSAA age rule (6.3.1) requirements.

3.2.0 NATIONAL FEDERATION OF STATE HIGH SCHOOL ASSOCIATIONS

3.2.1 All athletic contests shall be conducted under the official rules of the National Federation of State High School Associations or as

modified by the WHSAA.

[23]

3.3.0 DATES AND LOCATION OF SITES

3.3.1 The Board of Directors will select sites for all culminating events. Communities desiring to host culminating events should submit a

proposal to the WHSAA office. The Board will accept multi-year proposals of state culminating events up to a maximum of four

years.

3.3.2 All Wyoming culminating events will be held in Wyoming.

3.3.3 The Board of Directors will develop and maintain a seven year calendar for the purpose of establishing continuity in scheduling.

3.3.4 At each April meeting of the Board of Directors, the dates of the eighth year on the long term calendar will be set.

3.4.0 ENTRY FEES, TICKET PRICES, AND FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING

3.4.1 Entry fees and ticket prices for culminating events shall be set by the Board of Directors.

3.4.2 Local managers appointed by the WHSAA shall conduct WHSAA activities. Itemized statements of income and expenses shall be

submitted to the WHSAA by the local managers.

3.4.25 High school pupils must present their WHSAA identification cards or high school ID card in order to purchase tickets at the student

price. If no identification card is presented, adult prices will be charged. High school graduates and older are considered adults.

3.4.3 Established ticket prices.

REGIONAL

STATE

BASKETBALL

Adults

Students

Adults

Students

• Per Day

5.00

4.00

10.00

8.00

Thursday

• All Session

13.00

10.00

11.00

9.00

Friday

13.00

11.00

Saturday

25.00

20.00

All Session

SPIRIT COMPETITION

Adults

Students

5.00

4.00

General Admission

10.00

8.00

Lower Reserved Section

8.00

6.00

Upper Reserved Section

FOOTBALL

Adults

Students

Adults

Students

• All Classes - Championship

Series

5.00

3.00

11.00

8.00

Per Day

16.00

11.00

All Session

INDOOR TRACK AND FIELD

Adults

Students

8.00

6.00

3A Meet Pass

8.00

6.00

4A Meet Pass

ALL STATE MUSIC CONCERT

Adults

Students

5.00

4.00

MARCHING BAND FESTIVAL

Adults

Students

6.00

5.00

SWIMMING AND DIVING

Adults

Students

6.00

4.00

Day Pass

8.00

5.00

3A or 4A All Session Meet Pass

TRACK AND FIELD

Adults

Students

Adults

Students

• Per Day

5.00

3.00

5.00

3.00

Thursday

• All Session

8.00

5.00

6.00

4.00

Friday or Saturday

13.00

9.00

All Session

SOCCER

Adults

Students

Adults

Students

• Thursday or Friday

5.00

4.00

• Saturday

7.00

5.00

10.00

7.00

Per Day

• All-Session

10.00

7.00

22.00

17.00

All Session

SOFTBALL

Adults

Students

Adults

Students

• Per Day

5.00

4.00

9.00

7.00

Per Day

• All Session

13.00

10.00

22.00

17.00

All Session

VOLLEYBALL

Adults

Students

Adults

Students

• Friday

4.00

3.00

7.00

5.00

Thursday or Friday

• Saturday

6.00

4.00

10.00

8.00

Saturday

• All-Session

9.00

6.00

20.00

14.00

All Session

WRESTLING

Adults

Students

Adults

Students

[24]

• All-Session

9.00

6.00

11.00

8.00

Per Day

20.00

14.00

All Session

ALL SPORTS

Adults

Students

• Pig Tail Games

3.00

2.00

• Double Header Pig Tail Games

5.00

3.00

3.5.0 UNSPORTSMANLIKE CONDUCT

3.5.1 Participants are guests of the host school/community, and as such, should conduct themselves in an exemplary manner. Prior to,

during, or following any activity, unsportsmanlike conduct will not be tolerated. In athletic events, officials are directed to take action

to control such conduct, even to the point of forfeiture of the game.

3.5.2 Any player who has been disqualified from a contest for committing an unsportsmanlike act shall be disqualified for the remainder of

that contest, activity, or tournament. In addition, for football, soccer, indoor track, track, cross country, tennis, golf, skiing, and

swimming, the player shall be disqualified from the next contest at the level of play from which the player was disqualified. The

basketball, softball, volleyball, or wrestling contestant shall be disqualified from the next two contests. In all sports, this

disqualification shall include all contests at any level until the contestant has served the suspension at the level of play from which

the player was disqualified and successfully completed the NFHS “Sportsmanship” course located on www.nfhslearn.com. (See

3.5.25 below). Unsportsmanlike acts either prior to or following a contest will result in similar penalties. A contest shall be defined by

the criteria developed by the national governing body whose rules are utilized for the sport in which the disqualification shall be

enforced. If the disqualification occurs in the last contest of the season, the player will be required to serve their suspension in the

next sport in which they participate. A student may not go out for another sport just to serve the suspension penalty unless the

student successfully completes the entire season for that sport.

3.5.25 WHSAA STUDENT GOOD STANDING BUY BACK PROGRAM

All ejected students must successfully complete the NFHS “Sportsmanship” course located on www.nfhslearn.com before becoming

eligible for any further interscholastic competition. The WHSAA member school must fax or email the certificate of completion to the

WHSAA office.

3.5.3 Should a participant be ejected from more than one contest during any one school year, that participant's suspension, as described

in Rule 3.5.2, shall be doubled for each additional ejection.

3.5.35 COACHES BUY BACK PROGRAM

Any coach who has been disqualified from a contest for committing an unsportsmanlike act shall be disqualified for the remainder of

that contest, activity or tournament. In addition, for football, soccer, indoor track, track, cross country, tennis, golf, skiing, and

swimming, the coach may be disqualified from the next contest at the level of play from which the coach was ejected. The

basketball, softball, volleyball, or wrestling coach may be disqualified from the next two contests. In all sports, this disqualification

shall include all contests at any level until the coach has served the suspension of the level of play from which the coach was

ejected. Unsportsmanlike acts either prior to or following a contest will result in similar penalties. A contest shall be defined by the

criteria developed by the national governing body whose rules are utilized for that sport. The coach shall be prohibited from

attendance at any contests during the disqualification period.

In addition, the coach will be required to complete the “Teaching and Modeling Behavior” course. The course is available online at

www.nfhslearn.com. Once the suspension is served and the WHSAA receives the certificate of completion for the course, the school

will be notified.

Once the Commissioner has been notified of an incident, he/she will be in contact with the school’s administration and will ask for a

written account of the situation.

The Commissioner will render a decision as soon as he/she has received and reviewed all relevant information. A school may

appeal the official’s decision to the Commissioner, and a decision the Commissioner renders may be appealed to the WHSAA

Board of Directors.

3.5.4 Unsportsmanlike conduct by coaches, student body, and/or spectator(s) may also cause the offending school to be warned and/or

placed on probation for the first offense. The second offense may cause probation and/or suspension for a one year period.

3.5.5 A coach's ejection from a contest may result in his/her school or sport being placed on warning, probation or suspension according

to policies established by the Board of Directors in WHSAA Rule 1.4.0.

When a lone coach is ejected from a contest and no other qualified coach who has been assigned to that sport by that school is

present to coach the team, the game will end and the contest will be forfeited.

3.5.6 The game official who disqualifies an individual through an unsportsmanlike act must notify the Wyoming High School Activities

Association. In addition, the WHSAA office must notify the school of the disqualification and confirm that it has acknowledged the

official report.

3.5.7 Any player who physically assaults a referee or other official in connection with an association contest shall immediately become

ineligible for further interscholastic competition. It shall be the responsibility of the tournament manager or principal of the school

hosting the event to notify the WHSAA Commissioner as soon as possible. The official involved must report the incident in writing to

the WHSAA office within three days of its occurrence.

[25]

The coach and principal of the student involved are responsible for keeping that student from further interscholastic participation

pending a ruling by the WHSAA Commissioner. The Commissioner shall have the power to suspend the violating participant from

further interscholastic competition for a period not to exceed one calendar year from the same calendar week of the infraction.

Should an infraction occur during a culminating event, the Commissioner may withhold the student from the entire corresponding

event in the succeeding school year.

3.5.8 The school may appeal the disqualification of a player or coach for the unsportsmanlike conduct or the assault of an official to the

Commissioner.

3.6.0 SUPERVISION OF PUPILS

3.6.1 A school is responsible for the conduct of its team, coaches, students, and fans at any interscholastic event in which the school is

participating.

3.6.2 Failure to uphold proper standards of conduct is responsible for much of the criticism and adverse publicity given toward

interscholastic events. Furthermore, it is one of the reasons why the potential educational values of interscholastic athletics are not

achieved. Only with a conscientious effort of everyone involved can we achieve the most worthwhile objective of interscholastic

competition.

One of the prime functions of interscholastic competition is to foster the traits of good sportsmanship. The WHSAA strongly urges

administrators to stress to their athletes, student bodies, and fans the importance of sportsmanlike conduct during all WHSAA

contests, and to make them aware of WHSAA rules, policies, and bylaws concerning crowd control.

The WHSAA places the primary obligation upon the administrators of member schools to control their students, staff members, and

fans at all WHSAA contests.

When a violation of the principles of good sportsmanship occurs so as to endanger the personal safety of any individuals involved,

hinder the normal progress of an WHSAA contest, or create situations that may lead to restriction or discontinuance of

interscholastic competition, the Commissioner of the WHSAA shall contact the administration of the school(s) involved to discuss

the situation and attempt to cooperatively formulate a solution to the problem.

If the violation is flagrant or the situation persists, the Commissioner shall have the power to invoke penalties upon the member

school(s). The penalties that may be imposed against the school(s) may consist of those listed in the penalty section (1.4.0).

3.7.0 CROWD CONTROL AT WHSAA CONTESTS, RECOMMENDED GUIDELINES

Believing that working toward prevention is better than seeking a cure, the WHSAA offers the following guidelines to aid in planning

crowd control strategy which will help insure the safety of contestants and fans. Good sportsmanship must become a common goal.

I. Schools should understand the true purposes of athletic contests and educate their patrons to that purpose. Athletic

contests are not to become rivalries to the point of losing the primary objectives of the game.

A. Provide worthwhile educational experiences for all students, players, and spectators.

B. Provide enjoyable recreation regardless of whether the game is won or lost.

II. A full knowledge of each game's rules applying to sportsmanship which have their purpose to enhance the

educational values of interscholastic athletics should be taught. How these are taught will depend upon the

innovation of the school personnel. Schools might be wise to insert in their eligibility rules some concern over the

misconduct of players.

III. Copies of game rules pertaining to sportsmanship should be made available to fans. These rules could be printed in

the game programs, along with the sport's recent rule changes. In the buildings where contests are being held,

bulletin boards and other means of conveying the information can be used to inform the public.

IV. Leadership must be provided by the high school faculty with the superintendent or principal leading the way and

delegating authority. However, they are completely responsible for the entire program.

V. Ample help, even involving law enforcement officers, stationed at strategic points and alerted to potential problems

will help prevent the initial onset of any conflict.

VI. All schools should inform their people involved in any contest that there is a specific role for the visiting participants

to play as well as the host school. Amenities and courtesies should be displayed and extended to the visiting

organizations without flaunting of rivalries.

VII. Spectators should not be allowed to enter a building where a contest is being held if they are observed in the

possession of alcohol or other mood altering substances or are believed to be under the influence of these

substances.

VIII. Schools should eliminate possible confrontations by close observations of people who might contribute to any

confrontation such as people under the influence of these mood altering substances.

IX. In the event a spectator assaults a referee or other official in connection with a WHSAA contest, he/she should be

prosecuted to the full extent of the law. To save the status of interscholastic competition, schools will have to work

together and be alert to potential dangers in their own communities and when they are visiting other communities.

Coaching Staff

[26]

The coach bears the greatest burden of responsibility for sportsmanship. His/her influence upon the attitudes and

behavior of the players, the student body, and the community is unequaled. In order for good sportsmanship to become a

reality, it is essential that the coach subscribe to the values of sportsmanship and teach its principles through word and

deed. Specifically, it is recommended that the coach:

1. Always set a good example for others to follow

2. Instruct the players about their sportsmanship responsibilities

3. Discipline those players who display unsportsmanlike behavior. If necessary, forfeit their privileges of

representing the school

4. Be a good host to opponents; treat them as guests

5. Provide opportunities for social interaction among coaches and players of both teams before and after the

contest

6. Select only officials who have demonstrated the highest ethical standards

7. Respect the officials' judgment and interpretation of the rules. Question them with respect and dignity only when

the game rules permit

8. Publicly shake hands with the officials and opposing coach before and after the contest.

Players

The responsibility of the players for sportsmanship is second in importance only to the coach. Because players are

admired and respected, they exert a great deal of influence over the actions and behavior of the spectators. Desirable

behavior for players would be as follows:

1. Treat opponents with respect that is due them as guests and fellow human beings

2. Shake hands with opponents and wish them good luck before the contest

3. Exercise self-control at all times, accepting decisions and abiding by them

4. Respect the officials' judgment and interpretations of the rules. Never argue or make gestures indicating dislike

for a decision

5. Do not communicate with the officials regarding the clarification of a ruling. This is the captain's responsibility.

Cheerleaders

Cheerleaders must play a vital role in promoting good sporting attitudes.

1. Stimulate and control crowd response

2. Choose the right cheers at the right time

3. Be certain that words used in a cheer do not inflame an audience

4. Do not use bells, horns, and noisemakers

5. Use gestures that are synchronized, pleasing to watch, and easy to follow

6. Divert the crowd's attention by starting a popular yell if booing develops

7. Do not conduct a cheer at the same time as the visiting cheerleading squad

8. Cheer for your team

Students

Students' habits and reaction as spectators determine the quality of sportsmanship which reflects upon the reputation of

the school. Profane and abusive language and obnoxious behavior have no place at an athletic contest.

1. Know and demonstrate good sportsmanship

2. Respect and cooperate with the cheerleaders

3. Respect the property of the school and the authority of the school officials

4. Show respect for an injured player and do not heckle or jeer the opposing team

5. Remember athletic contests and mood altering substances do not mix

6. Cheer for your team.

Spectators

Fan behavior whether at home or away at athletic contests reflects on the entire community. Hometown fans should treat

out-of-town guests with respect. Similarly, visiting fans should treat their hosts - both individuals and property - with the

proper appreciation.

1. Know and demonstrate good sportsmanship

2. Be positive. Cheer for your team rather than against the opposition

3. Refrain from booing and name calling

4. Respect the official's point of view. He/she is in charge and is doing his/her best

5. Remember athletic contests are, in one respect, just like driving; they do not mix with mood altering substances.

Officials

1. Know the rules and accepted officiating procedures

2. Make decisions promptly and fairly

3. Be consistent

4. Be neat and friendly, but businesslike

5. Be on time and start the game on time

6. Refrain from placing hands on players during an athletic contest

7. During the pregame conference make reference to the fact that you expect captains to exhibit sportsmanlike

behavior and demand it from all team members.

Police and Staff Supervisors

1. Check with the athletic director prior to the contest time for assignments

2. Arrive on time

3. Discourage small groups from gathering near entrances and exits

4. Keep playing area clear of spectators before, during, and after the contest

5. Move with the crowd

6. Have adult violators escorted to the police station. Call parents of youthful offenders to escort them home

[27]

7. Survey the area after the contest.

Administrative Staff

1. Arrange for a supervision and crowd control committee meeting before the fall season. The committee should

be comprised of:

a. Superintendent of Schools

b. High School and/or Junior High School Principal

c. Athletic Director

d. Cheerleader Advisor

e. Student Council Representative

f. Community Civic Club Representative or Booster Club Representative

g. Police Representative

2. Publicize the recommendation of the supervision and crowd control committee.

a. Meet with the Chief of Police and Highway Patrol prior to the opening of school.

b. Hire off-duty police as game and conditions warrant. Assign duties, times, etc.

c. Establish traffic patterns in and around the contest site. Use community volunteers or student groups.

d. Erect restraining fences and/or rope off areas appropriately.

e. Man gates at all times and prohibit free entry to anyone during the entire contest.

f. Check the physical facility to see that it is in the best possible condition to accommodate crowds.

g. Provide first-aid capability and/or medical doctor availability.

Athletic Director

1. Review game management responsibilities.

2. Explore crowd control ideas with other schools in your conference.

3. Discuss crowd control with civic and/or booster organizations.

4. Schedule preseason school assemblies to review contest rules, good sportsmanship, and spectator behavior.

5. Review with security personnel their assignments prior to each contest.

6. Review assignments with staff prior to each contest.

7. Make sure that officials and their dressing area are taken care of in the proper manner.

8. Announce that no spectator is allowed on the field or court prior to, during, or after a contest.

9. Check with police and staff at halftime.

10. Provide a check of the facilities after the contest.

3.8.0 SUNDAY PARTICIPATION

There shall be no interscholastic activity, including practice, held on Sunday unless Rule 2.6.0 must be invoked. This excludes

Weeks 47 – Week 5. This includes open gyms.

3.9.0 SANCTION OF WHSAA ACTIVITIES

3.9.1 Eight member schools must be committed to participation for a new activity to be sanctioned by the WHSAA.

3.9.2 Disbandment Policy - At such time that fewer than six member schools participate in a WHSAA-sanctioned activity for two

consecutive years, the activity will be discontinued beginning with the third year.

3.9.25 Member schools must notify the WHSAA office, in writing, before the Statewide Scheduling Meeting the year preceding their adding

a new sport in football, volleyball, basketball, soccer and softball in order to be eligible the following year for the culminating event in

that sport. If this timeline is not followed, member schools adding a new sport in football, volleyball, basketball and soccer

understand they will not be eligible for the culminating event. Member schools adding an individual sport may be eligible for the

culminating event depending on the timing of their request. The commissioner shall have the discretion of making this decision.

3.9.26 Process for requesting WHSAA sanctioning of additional Activity

1. Request must be made by an administrator of a WHSAA member school

2. Request must be made on appropriate form

3. Letters of commitment from schools committed to the sponsoring of the activity must accompany the request.

4. Request will be placed on the agenda for the next regularly scheduled meeting of the WHSAA Handbook Committee for

their recommendation.

5. Handbook Committee will review the request and forward a recommendation on to the WHSAA Board of Directors. This

could involve a request for gathering additional information which might mean that the Handbook Committee’s

recommendation would not go before the WHSAA Board at their accompanying meeting.

6. The WHSAA Board will act on the Handbook Committee’s recommendation at the next regularly scheduled meeting.

7. The request for sanctioning would have to pass readings at two WHSAA Board Meetings.

8. The implementing of any new activities sanctioned by the WHSAA would have to follow the guidelines of WHSAA Rule

3.1.25

3.9.3 SANCTIONING OF OUT-OF-STATE EVENTS

3.9.4 If an event involves schools from non-bordering states or is sponsored/cosponsored by an organization outside the school, then the

appropriate National Federation sanctioning form must be completely filled out and submitted, with attachments or fees if necessary,

to the WHSAA for approval.

3.9.5 THREE HUNDRED MILE LIMIT

[28]

No school group, school organization, nor any individual representing a school organization may travel outside the state more than

300 miles one way to compete in any type of activity during the school year without the written approval of the Commissioner. Out-

of-state participation by school groups in non-competitive activities will be at the discretion of local school administrations and

boards.

3.10.0 BREAKING TIES FOR AWARDS

In case of ties for individual or team awards, duplicate awards will be provided. Golf will follow WHSAA rule 7.8.68.

3.11.0 T-SHIRT CONCESSIONS

The WHSAA office will be responsible for providing a memorabilia concessionaire for those state culminating events for which sales

are feasible.

3.12.0 RAFFLES NOT ALLOWED

Neither raffles nor other forms of solicitation are allowed at regional nor state culminating events.

3.13.0 ADVERTISEMENTS (ALCOHOL/TOBACCO)

Any entity choosing to advertise at any WHSAA event, shall not refer to any tobacco, alcoholic beverage or any product or service

which is contrary to the accepted principles of high school training and the WHSAA.

3.14.0 RODEO

Rodeo is not a WHSAA sanctioned activity.

No school or school group may sponsor a high school rodeo. High school pupils may not enter any rodeo as a member representing

a high school or high school group. A pupil may enter as an individual without affecting his amateur standing. A student may

compete in a rodeo as an individual without affecting his/her eligibility.

3.15.0 SPORTS MEDICINE ADVISORY COMMITTEE

3.15.1 The mission of the WHSAA Sports Medicine Advisory Committee will be to provide the Board of Directors with accurate information

to ensure the safe participation of the student/athletes in Wyoming. The health and safety of the student/athletes of Wyoming high

schools is vital to the mission of the WHSAA, and therefore must be protected proactively by the committee and the Board of

Directors.

3.15.2 The committee will include a licensed physician, a school administrator, a coach, and two certified athletic trainers.

3.15.4 The Board of Directors and/or the Commissioner will direct the committee to address specific sports medicine issues directed at

questions regarding rules changes, participation questions, and medical coverage for events.

4.00 GENERAL MEMBER SCHOOL RULES AND REGULATIONS

4.1.0 UNDUE INFLUENCE

4.1.1 The use of undue influence, by any person or persons to secure or to retain one or both parents or guardians of a pupil as residents,

may cause the pupil to be ineligible for high school participation in activities for a period subject to the determination of the

Commissioner. The school shall also be subject to disciplinary action.

4.1.2 The use of undue influence, by any person or persons in attempt to have a participant move to their school for interscholastic

competition may cause the pupil to be ineligible in high school activities for a period of time to be determined by the Commissioner.

The school shall also be subject to disciplinary action.

4.1.3 HAZING OR INITIATION

Hazing or initiations are not acceptable behaviors. Hazing, by definition, is “Any humiliating or dangerous activity expected of a

student to belong to a group, regardless of their willingness to participate.” It is of utmost importance on all teams, but especially on

those teams with underclassmen, that there be absolutely no hazing or so called initiation rites. This is demeaning to all involved

and is a most blatant form of discrimination. Hazing obstructs the development of good citizens, escalates the risks of participation,

negates positive contributions, and destroys respect for self, others and the environment.

4.2.0 FILMING, VIDEO TAPING

4.2.1 If, in the opinion of event management or game officials, the use of flash cameras is determined to be a distraction, the

photographer will be asked to move to an area where the distraction no longer exists.

4.2.2 Television/video replay broadcast policy - The WHSAA Board of Directors has established the policy that live telecasts and video

replays are subject to rights fees established by the WHSAA Board of Directors.

4.3.0 CONDUCT AT EVENTS

4.3.1 Artificial noisemakers such as but not limited to air horns and cowbells are not allowed indoors.

[29]

4.3.2 Bands are not allowed to play during live ball situations (Indoors or Outdoors) or during free throws or serves during indoor sport

events.

4.3.3 Bands are allowed at regional and state culminating events.

4.3.4 Unusual noise at any activity that is created by fans or participants that would interfere with the competition or the enjoyment of the

fans is prohibited.

4.3.5 Pep posters are not permitted inside the playing area at district/regional and state indoor events. Only signs made of non-rigid

materials such as styrofoam, cloth and paper are permitted. Signs may be no larger than can be held by one person. No additional

sign or flag supports of rigid materials such as wooden dowels, paint paddles, golf club shafts, etc., will be allowed.

4.3.6 There shall be no reserved spectator seating at any district/regional or state event other than handicapped and team areas

designated by meet management. Exception: There will be reserved seating for the State Spirit Competition.

4.4.0 RETURNING FORMS TO THE WHSAA

4.4.1 Occasionally the WHSAA will need to receive immediate and/or documented feedback from member schools. The returning of

forms, surveys, or questionnaires is imperative for the operation of the Association and your consideration is appreciated.

4.4.2 Failure by schools to comply with deadline dates specified on various items may cause that school’s individuals or teams to be

eliminated from culminating events.

4.5.0 QUALIFICATION OF COACHES

Coaches can have a powerful influence on the young men and women they coach. Having qualified coaches is essential to enhance

the experience of the student/athletes.

4.5.1 Every person employed as a coach for a member school of the WHSAA in any interscholastic activity which falls under the

jurisdiction of the WHSAA must be in compliance with standards established by the Professional Teaching Standards Board.

4.5.2 A member school is responsible for the actions of either employed or volunteer personnel that are used by that school for its

activities.

4.5.3 All head coaches are required to view the WHSAA rules video in their sport prior to their first contest. Schools whose coaches

refuse to view the rules video will be subject to the disciplinary action as listed in WHSAA Rule 1.4.0.

4.5.4 All head coaches in swimming/diving, football, volleyball, wrestling, basketball, soccer and track must pass (80%) the NFHS open

book rules test each year in their respective sport prior to their first contest. Schools whose coaches do not pass the test will be

subject to the disciplinary action as listed in WHSAA Rule 1.4.0.

4.5.5 NEGATIVE COMMENTS MADE BY COACHES ABOUT OFFICIALS TO THE MEDIA

Coaches are reminded that they have an obligation to maintain the integrity of high school activities. Their efforts must include

keeping their relationship with contest officials on the professional level. To that end, coaches should not make negative comments

about contest officials or their officiating to the media, social media, facebook, twitter, etc.

4.5.5.5 PUBLIC CRITICISM OF OFFICIALS OR COACHES

Any official who publicly criticizes another official or coach through the media, social media, facebook, twitter, etc. shall be reported

to the WHSAA/WSOA and shall be subject to a hearing for suspension of membership from the WHSAA/WSOA.

4.6.0 ATHLETIC OFFICIALS

4.6.1 All officials hired by member schools for all contests must be registered with the WHSAA.

4.6.2 To be a registered official, you are required to attend a WHSAA Rules Interpretation Clinic, pay the registration fee and successfully

complete the written examination.

4.6.3 Officials attending out-of-state clinics must furnish the WHSAA with proof of attendance.

4.6.4 Out-of-state officials must be registered in Wyoming before they can officiate varsity contests.

4.6.5 Officials must submit an application requesting registration in the sport or sports in which an official desires to officiate. This

application shall be on file in the WHSAA office.

4.6.5.5 A person that has been convicted of a felony will not be allowed to register as a sports official in Wyoming without requesting a

review by the WSOA Board. Recognizing there are differences and each situation is unique a person can request a review by a

panel of the WSOA Board of Directors.

4.6.6 Official licensure by the WHSAA is a privilege and not a right. All licensed officials, all applicants for licensure, and all applicants for

renewal of licensure agree to abide by the policies, purposes, rules and regulations of the WHSAA. Approval of applications for

licensure and application for renewal of license shall be at the discretion of the Commissioner. The Commissioner may revoke the

license of an official for cause which shall include, but not be limited to, the violation of the policies, purposes, rules and regulations

[30]

of the WHSAA and any conduct, both on or off the field or court which would have a negative or detrimental effect upon the

WHSAA, its member schools, students or the public.

4.6.7 Each official must pay a registration fee which is determined by the WHSAA Board of Directors.

4.6.8 Officials must adhere to the uniform requirements as specified by the National Federation rule books, or as adopted by the Board of

Directors.

4.6.9 Varsity officials must be at least 18 years old.

4.6.10 Officials for regional and state tournaments/playoffs are assigned by the WHSAA office. The host team will assign officials for all

other events.

4.6.11 The use of contracts between officials and the host school is recommended for the protection of both parties.

4.6.12 School personnel of either competing team may officiate with prior approval of all schools involved.

4.6.13 Schools wishing to deny an official the opportunity of officiating in any of their contests taking place in the succeeding season must

submit the name of the official to the WHSAA Commissioner and to opponent schools, no less than 30 days nor more than 60 days

after the culminating event takes place. Each request must have the signed approval of the school’s WHSAA representative. Failure

to notify the proper parties identified above shall result in agreement on officials. Failure or refusal to play a contest or event where

the officials are agreed upon shall result in a forfeiture by the individual or team failing or refusing to play.

4.6.14 When teams agree on an official, the official’s decision during the period of time they are in charge of a contest or event shall be

final. A school or participant cannot protest a decision made by an official during the time they are in charge of the contest or event.

If a school feels an official has set aside (not followed correctly) a rule, the official WHSAA Representative from that school may

contact the WHSAA to lodge a complaint. The WHSAA will decide if disciplinary action is necessary against the official(s).

For more information about the Wyoming Sports Officials Association, please see section 9.0.

4.6.15 OFFICIALS FEE SCHEDULES FOR VARSITY CONTESTS

Each driver receives a mileage allowance at a rate established by the State of Wyoming on July 1 of the upcoming school year (67

cents as of July 2024). This rate is paid per mile round trip. Exception - the driver of a five-man football crew receives an additional

four cents per mile round trip. Each official excluding the driver receives fifteen cents per mile round trip for per diem. The driver

receives five cents per mile round trip for per diem. Mileage figures will be based upon those provided on the official map of the

state of Wyoming. Officials must receive mileage from either their place of residence or their local association site. No official shall

enter into a contract to officiate any WHSAA contest for any game or mileage fees which are not in accordance with the specified

rates and fees. Any rate change by the State of Wyoming will be reflected the school year following the rate change by the state.

4.6.15.5 If an official under contract to a school is chosen to officiate at a culminating event, the school is encouraged to cooperate by finding

a replacement for that official. The official is expected to assist the school in finding a replacement if the school requests such

assistance.

4.6.16 BASKETBALL – All classes. Two or three registered officials paid $90 each. When more than two schools come together to

participate during regular season play, schools have the option to negotiate fees with basketball officials. Three person crews will be

used for all regional and state tournaments.

4.6.17 FOOTBALL - All Classes: At least five registered officials, paid $105 each.

4.6.18 SOCCER - One referee and two linesmen, who are registered officials, will be used in all soccer games. Each official will be paid

$90. Four officials will be used, with the fourth official receiving $65.

4.6.19 SOFTBALL - Two or three registered officials paid $80 each. When more than two schools come together to participate during

regular season play, schools have the option to negotiate fees with softball officials. Three person crews will be used for the state

tournament.

4.6.20 SWIMMING - All “on deck” officials shall be registered officials. Dual meet: $75 for each official; invitation/triangular meets: $90 per

session; one day invitationals: $110. Schools have the option to negotiate fees with swimming officials on invitational meets.

Swimming/diving coaches are eligible to be diving judge officials in regular season, conference and WHSAA State Swim Events

upon 1) registering with the WHSAA office for a fee of $50, 2) attending a WHSAA rules clinic and 3) successfully completing an

official’s (open book) exam for diving. Diving coaches who work as diving judge officials will not receive pay for those meets where

their team is participating.

4.6.21 TRACK - The meet referee, director, and starter shall be registered officials. The field judge, clerk of course, and finish judge shall

attend the rules clinic.

4.6.22 VOLLEYBALL - All classes: Must have two registered officials who shall be paid $80 per match. During regular season play, schools

have the option to negotiate fees with volleyball officials when more than two schools come together to play.

4.6.23 WRESTLING - All classes: Officials must be registered - $90 per match for dual and double dual match. When more than two

schools come together to participate during regular season play, schools have the option to negotiate fees with wrestling officials.

4.6.24 CULMINATING EVENTS

[31]

Each official receives mileage of 67 cents per mile round trip. Exception: the driver of a five-person football crew receives an

additional four cents per mile round trip. The driver receives five cents per mile round trip for per diem. Each official (riders),

excluding the driver, receives 15 cents per mile (under 100 miles round trip) per diem round trip, or $70 per diem per day of the

event if the culminating event site is 100 miles round trip or over (if mileage is over 400 miles round trip, one extra day per diem will

be paid) as determined by the mileage on the Wyoming State map.

Sport

Regional

State

Basketball

$100

$105

Football

$115

$120

Soccer

$100

$105

Softball

$90

$95

Swimming

$440

($110 per session)

Track

$130 per day

(Starter)

Volleyball *

$90

$95

Wrestling

$325

$230 per day

* Line judges at Regional/State volleyball tournaments will be paid $45 per match by the WHSAA if they are registered officials

assigned by the host school meet director.

It is recommended that all lower-level officials (freshman, sophomore, and junior varsity) should be paid $20 less than the varsity

rate in each sport. Junior high/middle school officials should be paid $25 less than the varsity rate in each sport. Exception, junior

high/middle school wrestling officials should be paid $30 per hour or $4 per match. Mileage should also be paid if using out of town

officials for lower level events.

4.6.25 Official’s fees will increase by five dollars ($5.00) per sport every two years, beginning with the 2024 – 2025 school year. Future

increase years will be 2026 – 2027, 2028 – 2029, 2030 – 2031.

4.7.0 GAME CONTRACTS

4.7.1 Any school violating a varsity contract, either written or verbal, could be fined up to $1000, with money going to the offended school.

If both schools agree to not honor the contract, the fine will not be applied. Lack of paying the fine within thirty (30) days after the

contest could be cause for immediate suspension. In addition to the above actions, the WHSAA may sanction the violating school as

provided in Rules 1.4.2 through 1.4.5.

4.7.2 ATHLETIC CONTRACTS

Athletic contracts between schools shall be limited to a maximum of two years.

4.8.0 ATHLETIC SCHEDULE

4.8.1 Schools are required to exchange event schedules with the home game officials listed.

5.0.0 GENERAL STUDENT RULES AND REGULATIONS

5.0.1 Unless otherwise specified in the rule, the following regulations apply to all students participating in an interschool activity program

grades 9-12.

5.0.2 These eligibility rules are minimum requirements and member schools may establish any additional rules which will benefit the

particular case. The Board of Directors has the authority to set aside any eligibility rule when, in its opinion, the rule fails to

accomplish the purpose for which it is intended. Furthermore, the Board has this same authority in cases in which a rule causes

undue hardship pursuant to Article VI (5) of the Constitution, the Board of Directors may delegate its authority to set aside any

eligibility rule to the Commissioner when a decision must be made prior to a regularly scheduled Board meeting. Such delegation of

authority shall be made by the President of the Board of Directors who shall grant said delegation in writing and upon review of the

necessity of the delegation.

5.0.3 REQUIREMENTS FOR ELIGIBILITY FOR PARTICIPATION IN AN ASSOCIATION CONTEST

The Commissioner is responsible for the interpretation and enforcement of the eligibility rules. This interpretation and enforcement

must be uniform and consistent. The Commissioner does not have power to modify eligibility rules or to make new eligibility rules. At

times, the enforcement of these rules may appear to result in injustice to a student or a school in a situation arising from lack of

familiarity with the rules, misunderstanding of the rules, or negligence on the part of some individual. In such a case, it must be

recognized that the Commissioner cannot, through sympathy, permit exceptions to the rules. He/she has no such power. When

appealed to for an interpretation, the Board of Directors will make a decision in the light of the facts and the intent of the rule.

5.0.4 When WHSAA rules, regulations, or policy do not address a specific concern, the Commissioner will determine the appropriate

ruling and may consult with the Executive Council when appropriate. The Commissioner’s ruling will be reviewed and presented for

action at the next regularly scheduled meeting of the WHSAA Board of Directors.

5.0.5 Each school principal will have on file in his/her office a list of all pupils who are eligible to participate.

5.0.6 Teams and players recognized as eligible to participate in interscholastic contests under the rules of the Wyoming High School

Activities Association will be eligible to participate in WHSAA culminating events. Member school administrators are cautioned to

carefully check over their lists of potential players and make certain that each student whose name is submitted is fully qualified

under the WHSAA rules.

[32]

5.0.7 RULES OF ELIGIBILITY

The responsibility of educating and guiding student participants in the rules of eligibility governing member schools of this

Association shall rest with the administration of each school. The WHSAA pamphlet “How to Protect Your Eligibility for High School

Activities” shall be used in this process.

1. While the WHSAA Commissioner, in conjunction with the WHSAA Board of Directors, is solely responsible for the

interpretation of Association rules, regulations and policies, the administration of the member school shall be responsible

for the eligibility of its students, including but not limited to the determination of credits in transfer cases, and it shall be the

responsibility of one member school to call to the attention of another member school possible violations of WHSAA rules.

Should a member school administrator misapply a WHSAA eligibility rule as determined by the Commissioner in

conjunction with the Board of Directors, the member school shall be held responsible for such action.

2. The minimum penalty for using a student who is ineligible either during the regular season or in WHSAA tournament

activity is as follows:

a. Team Sports (Basketball, football, soccer, softball and volleyball)

The school must -

i. Forfeit all contests involved.

ii. Adjust its place in conference standings and/or relinquish its place in tournament standings.

iii. Return team and individual awards.

b. Individual Sports (Cross country, golf, indoor track, skiing, swimming, tennis, track & field, and wrestling) The school

must

i. Eliminate all matches, places, points, scores, and awards of involved student as an individual, and

eliminate all contributions made by involved student toward team score.

ii. Reduce team points (score) and adjust conference standings and/or tournament places.

iii. Return awards of individual(s) and, if appropriate, after adjusting standings, team awards.

c. Tournaments (including WHSAA tournaments) - Team or student most recently defeated, upon discovery of violation,

replaces offending team or student for remainder of tournament series.

3. If a violation is flagrant or the situation persists, the Board of Directors shall have the power to invoke penalties upon the

member school(s). The penalties that may be imposed against the school may consist of those listed in Rule 1.4.0 -

Disciplinary Action (warning, probation, and suspension).

5.0.8 MIXED GENDER TEAMS

Where permitted by the provisions of Title IX, and after considering the activities offered by the WHSAA, gender mixed teams are

prohibited.

In such cases, boys may not compete on or against a girls’ team nor may girls compete on or against a boys’ team.

5.0.81 WAIVER REQUIREMENTS OF MIXED GENDER TEAM RULE

Under certain conditions the Commissioner may waive the Mixed Gender Team Rule to allow participation by a student. The

following requirements must be met to be considered for a waiver. Application for waiver must be submitted for each school year.

1. Student must meet all other WHSAA and school rules and regulations.

2. Petition must be for waiver of an athletic activity that is not offered separately for boys and girls.

3. Petition must be for a student of the gender that has been judged to have had a history of past discrimination in athletic

activity.

4. Student must have a history of interest in the athletic activity in question.

5. Student and parent must agree to all terms and conditions of the petition and indicate so by signing on each appropriate

signature line.

5.1.0 DUAL PARTICIPATION

5.1.1 A pupil may not participate in two school sports at the same time. However, during a season when one sport is over, a student may

switch to another sport which runs concurrently. A sports season ends after the completion of that sport’s culminating event. As per

7.4.0, a member school’s season ends the day after elimination from the culminating event in that sport.

5.1.2 Pupils may participate in athletic activities and be on the spirit squad at the same time.

5.2.0 UNITED STATES OLYMPIC COMMITTEE-SPONSORED NATIONAL TRIALS AND COMPETITIONS

5.2.1 Not withstanding the other rules of the WHSAA, a student may participate as an individual (not representing his/her school) without

loss of interscholastic eligibility:

1. As a member of a National Team (and the actual, direct tryouts therefore), which is defined as one selected by the

national governing body of the sport on a national qualification basis either through a defined selective process or actual

tryouts for the purpose of international competition which requires the entries to officially represent their respective

nations, although it is not necessary there be team scoring by nation; or

2. In an Olympic Development Program, which is defined as a training program or competition:

a. Conducted or sponsored by the United States Olympic Committee (USOC); or

b. Directly funded and conducted by the USOC member national governing body (NGB) on a national level

(e.g. NGB national championship competition and the direct qualifications therefore); or

PROVIDED, HOWEVER, participation as described in (a) and (b) above is an exception to the other rules

of the WHSAA only if:

i. The participation, if during the school year, is approved by the student’s high school principal at

least 30 days prior to the start of the program; and

[33]

ii. The student makes prior arrangements to complete missed academic lessons, assignments, and

tests before the last day of classes of the credit grading period in which the student’s absence

occurs; and

iii. The student misses no WHSAA-sponsored post-season athletic event involving a team in that

sport.

5.3.0 OUT-OF-SEASON PRACTICE

5.3.1 These rules are intended to regulate only those WHSAA athletic activities that are sponsored by the school.

5.3.2 Member schools subscribe to rules and regulations governing the start and close of each sport season. Each sport’s season begins

with the starting practice date for that sport and ends after the state culminating event in that sport.

5.3.3 The use of high school gymnasiums and other athletic facilities between the close of one season and the opening of the next

season is permitted. However, there shall be no compulsion for athletes to participate in any out-of-season training program as a

qualification for being on a high school team. Between seasons, student/athletes shall be encouraged to participate in a broad range

of activities and shall not be compelled to participate in pre-season or post-season programs in lieu of succeeding activity programs.

Athletes shall be permitted to choose their activities in the off-season without compulsion of coaches.

5.3.4 School team practice during the WHSAA calendar year (Week 5, or week 4 for 4A football, tennis and golf, through Week 46)

outside of the sport season is a violation of the out-of-season rule and cannot be included in an out-of-season training program.

Coaches may work with individuals on individual sports techniques out-of-season at a participant’s request. However, team

concepts may neither be taught nor practiced through support of a member school. Coaches may coach non-school teams.

5.3.5 Each sport is allowed fourteen (14) days of practice between WHSAA calendar week 47 and Week 5, Week 4 for 4A football.

Practice leading up to team camps would count toward the fourteen day limit, however the team camp will not count toward the

fourteen day limit. As per our open gym rules, these practices must not be mandatory and are to be for students to participate on a

voluntary basis without pressure from the coach.

5.3.6 Except for supervision of open gyms as provided in WHSAA Rule 5.5.0, the teaching of sport specific techniques or team concepts

must cease and desist two weeks prior to the first allowable practice date. Exception: A coach may run a camp for the youth (non-

high school) of their community and use their high school players to assist, during the two weeks prior to the beginning of a sport

season, provided there is no direct instruction to the high school players. The Commissioner, or his designee, may approve

exceptions to Rules 5.3.5 and 5.3.6 when deemed not to be in violation of the intent of said rules.

5.3.7 Intramural programs organized in between regular seasons must be conducted in a manner which may not be construed as

organized practice.

5.3.8 Schools offering instruction in any sport as a part of their regular physical education program must be certain that classes are

conducted in a manner which may not be construed as organized practice.

5.3.9 A summer weight program is not a violation as long as it is handled as an activity in a program and is open to all youngsters in a

given area.

5.3.9.5 As designated by rule, each season ends on the last day of the state culminating event for each respective sport. Seasons in

addition to the designated seasons by rule are not permitted (for example, spring football is prohibited).

5.4.0 SPECIALIZED (Individualized technique) SPORTS CAMPS

5.4.1 Specialized sports camps for all athletic activities are permitted with no stipulation concerning the number of participants from any

single school.

5.4.2 A high school student may attend any individual or team specialized sports camp(s)/clinic(s) of his/her choice.

5.4.3 No coach or school representative may directly or by implication direct a student to attend camps/clinics as a condition to practicing,

participating, or otherwise influencing a student’s opportunity to participate in any school interscholastic athletic program.

5.4.4 No student shall participate in a specialized sports camp/clinic during which individual skills are taught for a period greater than two

calendar weeks (fourteen days) during any calendar year in which any of his/her coaches or high school faculty members are

involved.

5.4.5 There shall be no participation in a specialized sports camp/clinic the two weeks prior to the beginning of a sport season if the

student's coach(es) is a clinician. Exception: A coach may run a camp for the youth (non-high school) of their community and use

their high school players to assist, during the two weeks prior to the beginning of a sport season, provided there is no direct

instruction to the high school players.

5.4.7 Students who attend specialized sports camps will not be covered by school insurance.

5.5.0 OPEN GYMS/FACILITIES

5.5.1 The WHSAA approves of open gym/facilities that are not limited to specific team candidates. There shall be no open gyms on

Sundays (3.8.0).

5.5.2 Open gyms/facilities are for students to use on a voluntary basis without pressure from the coach.

[34]

5.5.3 A coach violates the intent of the open gym/facility when he/she has mandatory or "so-called" voluntary attendance at open

gyms/facilities. "So-called" voluntary attendance is an implied requirement for an individual to attend open gyms/facilities as a

prerequisite to team membership.

5.5.4 Coaches cannot use the open gyms/facilities to coach team techniques of activities provided in the school's interscholastic athletic

program.

5.6.0 AWARDS STANDARDS - Only awards with values not greater than $250.00 may be accepted by a student/athlete as a result of

participation in school or non-school competition in a sport that is sanctioned by the WHSAA, except for golf, which will follow the

rules of the USGA(Rule 7.8.41).

5.6.1 A student may receive the following without violating this standard: unattached school letters or emblems, medals, ribbons, plaques,

trophies, certificates, or other similar symbolic awards.

5.6.4 Any award presented by a non-school person or organization must have the approval of the school administrator and meet the

$250.00 retail value limit. This limitation does not apply to any high school participants at WHSAA member schools who receive an

Operation Gold Award.

5.6.5 A non-school sponsored banquet shall not constitute a violation if arranged with the approval of the school administrator.

5.6.6 Awards in the form of high school scholarships or concessions on tuition because of athletic ability shall cause the student to

become ineligible for future competition in all interscholastic sports.

5.6.7 Individual students may receive monetary rewards for participation in luck-of-the-draw or lottery type programs. This type of

competition must be limited to individual type competition and not pit one contestant against another. There is no limit on the amount

of monetary award for this type of competition. (Examples: Shooting baskets at half time at professional basketball games; shooting

hockey pucks at goals during intermissions at hockey events.)

5.6.8 The student and the school shall be held accountable to the WHSAA for any violation of this rule by individuals or groups before, at,

or after graduation.

5.6.9 This standard shall not prevent a student from signing an agreement which binds him or her to play only for a particular team or an

athletic letter of intent with a university or college.

Application for reinstatement to eligibility may be filed with the commissioner 365 days from the date of violation. However, the

Commissioner shall not reinstate to eligibility any student who has received a scholarship, concession on tuition, or direct or indirect

financial aid because of his or her athletic ability.

5.7.0 AMATEUR STANDARDS - A student who represents a school in an interscholastic sport shall be an amateur in that sport. An

amateur athlete is one who engages in athletic competition solely for the physical, mental, social, and pleasure benefits derived from

such participation.

Operation Gold award recipients are exempt from this rule.

5.7.1 An athlete forfeits amateur status in a sport by:

1. Competing for or accepting money or other monetary compensation (it is permissible for a student to accept necessary

meals, lodging, and transportation in connection with playing a contest)

2. Receiving any award or prize of monetary value which exceeds the amount that has been approved by the WHSAA

3. Capitalizing on athletic fame by receiving money, gifts of monetary value, or merchandise

4. Signing a professional playing contract in that sport

5.7.2 Accepting a nominal standards fee or salary for instructing, supervising or officiating in an organized youth sports program or

recreation or playground activities shall not jeopardize amateur standards.

5.7.3 Violation of either the Awards or Amateur Standards shall result in the student becoming ineligible in the sport concerned.

5.8.0 OUTSIDE COMPETITION (INDEPENDENT TEAM)

5.8.1 An independent team shall be defined as any team not directly sponsored by a WHSAA member high school.

5.8.2 A student who is a member of a school athletic squad may not participate as a member of an outside team or as an independent

competitor in the same sport during the same season.

5.8.3 Students may not participate in a WHSAA sanctioned activity (non-athletic) and with an independent group in the same activity

during the season for the activity.

5.8.4 Violation of this rule shall make the student ineligible for the remainder of that sport’s (non-athletic included) season unless he/she is

reinstated by the Commissioner.

5.8.5 EXCEPTIONS: 1. Students may participate in the individual sports of skiing, tennis, track, indoor track, cross country, golf,

swimming/diving and wrestling while a member of the high school team with outside affiliations as long as permission has been

given by the local school district. During the season, skiers are allowed the opportunity to ski USSA point races. 2. Participate with

non-athletic teams at the same time. 3. College on campus individual tryouts. 4. Olympic tryouts.

[35]

5.8.6 A pupil may take part in a civic theater production and still retain eligibility for interscholastic competition provided that permission

has been obtained from his/her high school principal.

5.9.0 ALL-STAR COMPETITION

Member school facilities or equipment shall not be used for any all-star team, contests, or exhibitions involving undergraduate

students in any sport unless approved by the Wyoming High School Activities Association Board of Directors.

5.10.1 PRACTICE RULE

5.10.2 A player must participate in a minimum of the required number of practice sessions of at least one practice session per day on as

many different days for the respective sport prior to the first day of his/her participation. A day shall count as no more than one

practice. No practice is permitted on any Sunday. Two days of practice are required for golf, five days for tennis and nine days for

each remaining sport. Nine days of practice are required for football, the first three of which must be without contact for each

participant. (Please see Rule 7.7.12.) A participant becomes eligible once he/she has practiced the required number of days. A

contest in which an ineligible participant participates shall be forfeited as per WHSAA Rules 1.4.0 and 5.0.7.

5.10.3 A pupil moving from one sport to another will be allowed to count the completed practices from the first sport to meet the practice

number requirements for the second sport. To satisfy the required number of practices, there must be no break in participation

between sports other than the normal weekend. If an athlete does not attend the first scheduled practice of the new sport following

the athlete’s departure from the initial team, the required number of practices for the new sport must then be met. An athlete must

compete in at least one contest in the new sport before being eligible for any culminating event in the sport. No additional contests

may be added to an existing schedule to meet this requirement. It shall be the responsibility of the local school district to determine

the pupil’s readiness to compete in the new sport.

5.10.4 For the purpose of the practice rule, practice is defined as a physical fitness activity designed for the preparation of athletes for the

ensuing sports season and must be conducted under the supervision of a coach certified by the Professional Teaching Standards

Board. Supervision must be direct, with both coach and athlete at the same site at the same time. FaceTime, Skype and other

electronic methods will not fulfill the requirements of a supervised practice. Participation in physical education classes does not

constitute practice.

6.0.0 PARTICIPANT ELIGIBILITY RULES AND REGULATIONS

6.1.0 BONA FIDE STUDENT (HIGH SCHOOL PUPIL)

6.1.1 A student comes under the jurisdiction of the WHSAA upon completion of eighth grade requirements.

6.1.2 The student shall be a bona fide undergraduate member of his/her school. Bona fide is defined as proceeding in a satisfactory

manner toward the educational graduation standards established by the member school.

6.1.3 Every student who represents his/her high school in interscholastic activities must be in attendance in that high school in which

he/she participates or be under an approved, combined school program. Ninth graders who attend a separate junior high may

qualify under WHSAA Rule 6.7.1 and 6.7.4.

6.1.4 Each member school shall establish participation criteria for all activity participants which may extend beyond, but not supplant the

existing WHSAA rules. This criteria shall address specific academic expectations, use of tobacco, substance abuse, acceptable

conduct, and all other standards for eligibility.

6.1.5 Any student under penalty of suspension, or who is ineligible according to the school criteria for participation or WHSAA regulations,

may not participate.

6.1.6 Any student who deliberately falsifies information for eligibility purposes, will lose one year’s eligibility.

6.2.0 ACADEMIC REQUIREMENTS

6.2.1 In order to be eligible for any level of interscholastic competition, a student must be currently enrolled and must have been enrolled

in school the immediate preceding semester and received passing grades during that semester in subjects that earn a minimum of

5.0 credits or the equivalent, per year toward graduation.

6.2.2 A pupil must be passing in five solid subjects at the time of contest. A passing grade is considered to be the passing grade of the

individual school. As defined, a solid subject meets five days a week or its equivalent for the entire semester and for which one-half

Carnegie units are granted.

6.2.3 The scholarship eligibility of a transfer student must be established by school records or verification from the sending school. The

responsibility for establishing eligibility rests with the receiving school.

6.2.4 A student shall be permitted to make up work after the close of the semester for the purpose of becoming eligible. Deficiencies,

including incompletes, conditions and failures for the previous semester may be made up during a subsequent semester, summer

session, night school, correspondence, or tutoring for qualification purposes. The makeup work must match the class where the

failure occurred (ex. If an online class is taken, Algebra I for Algebra I, etc.). Credit needs to be approved by the student’s school

district The student will not become eligible until all deficiencies from the previous semester have been made up to meet Rules 6.2.1

– 6.2.2.

6.2.5 Whenever WHSAA scholarship requirements are in conflict with the OBE (Outcome-Based Education)/Mastery Learning process,

that member school shall submit a proposal and request an interpretation from the Commissioner.

[36]

6.2.6 Students ineligible because of scholastic deficiencies from the previous semester shall not be eligible until all grades have been

verified by a school official on or after the last day of the current semester provided they have met requirements.

6.2.7 A pupil who is suspended or expelled from high school during a semester and who does not finish the semester is ineligible during

all of his/her next semester since his/her record for the previous semester is incomplete.

6.2.8 High school students taking college classes will be allowed to count the college classes toward the required five solid subjects, if the

student has the approval of the school.

6.2.85 A special education student is eligible to participate upon verification by the student’s high school principal that he/she is proceeding

in a satisfactory manner towards the educational goals established for him/her.

6.2.90 WHSAA AFFILIATE HOME SCHOOL STUDENT PARTICIPANT ACADEMIC ELIGIBILITY REQUIREMENTS

The Affiliate Home School Student may establish academic eligibility through one of the following:

a. Attaining a composite score, not less than the twenty-fifth percentile, on a nationally norm referenced achievement test administered

according to the guidelines established by test in question. The test score will be used to determine academic eligibility for one

calendar year from the date of the results being received in the WHSAA office from the testing company.

b. Grades and assessments given by a teacher currently certified by the Professional Teaching Standards Board meeting 6.2.1

through 6.2.4 above. The certified teacher must have a minimum of twenty (20) class hours of contact with the Affiliate home school

student per week.

6.2.91 WHSAA AFFILIATE HOME SCHOOL STUDENT PARTICIPATION ACADEMIC ELIGIBILITY REQUIREMENTS UNDER

COMBINATION SCHOOL AGREEMENT

Submit proof of work in agreement with and to host combination member school that demonstrates compliance with subject and

class hour requirements at the same frequency as the academic eligibility of other students is determined at the member school.

Proof of work agreement may include requirements from 6.2.90 a. or b.

6.3.0 AGE REQUIREMENTS

6.3.1 A student must be under twenty years of age on August 1 for fall sports, November 1 for winter sports, and March 1 for spring

sports. Member school administrators should be alert to apply for an early start for the eligibility of students who might be affected

by this rule.

6.3.9 Bylaw Regarding Eligibility for Foreign Exchange and International Students

1. Foreign Exchange Students

a. A foreign exchange student is an international student who attends high school in the U.S. To be eligible for

interscholastic athletics in the U.S., such student must be under the auspices of and be placed with a U.S. host

family by an international student exchange program that has been accepted for listing by the Council on

Standards for International Educational Travel (CSIET) and be recognized by the U.S. Department of State. The

foreign exchange program must assign students to host families by a method that ensures that no student, or

his/her athletic interests or abilities were a component of the placement process.

b. A foreign exchange student is considered to be placed with a host family when written notice of placement is

provided by the exchange organization to the student and his/her parents, and to the host family.

1) Neither the school the student attends nor any person associated with the school shall have input

into the selection of the student.

2) No member of the school’s coaching staff, paid or voluntary, shall serve as the host family.

c. The foreign exchange student must possess a current J-1 or F-1 visa, issued by the U.S. Immigration and

Naturalization Service.

d. The foreign exchange student must comply with all eligibility requirements set forth by the Wyoming High

School Activities Association.

2. Other International Students

An international student who is not under the auspices of and placed by a CSIET listed exchange program must meet the

following requirements in order to be considered for interscholastic athletic eligibility in Wyoming.

a. The student must possess a current F-1 visa, issued by the U.S. Immigration and Naturalization Service.

b. The student must provide to the principal of the school he/she attends an official untranslated transcript and a

transcript that is translated to English, by an acceptable agent or agency, which indicated work taken in all

grades in which the student was enrolled.

c. The international student must pay tuition to the high school he/she attends as prescribed in Section 625 of U.S.

Public Law 104-208.

d. No member of the school’s coaching staff, paid or voluntary shall serve as the resident family for the student.

e. The international student must comply with all eligibility requirements set forth by the Wyoming High School

Activities Association.

Non-compliance with one or more of the foregoing provisions shall render the international student ineligible for interscholastic

athletics at any high school which is a member of the Wyoming High School Activities Association.

6.4.0 TRANSFER

The purpose of the Transfer Rule (Rule 6.4.0 thru Rule 6.4.93) is to protect, not inhibit students who participate in athletic

competition. The Transfer Rule is preventative in nature and is devised to eliminate the incentive to transfer schools when a

[37]

motivation is for athletic purposes and after a student has initially chosen the school of his/her choice. The Transfer Rule protects

students who have previously participated in athletic competition at a member school from being replaced by students who transfer

for athletic purposes and further protects students at other member schools from the affects of “school shopping” by students (Rule

4.1.2) and “recruiting” by member schools and their agents (Rule 4.1.1 and Rule 4.1.2). The Transfer Rule encourages fair play,

discourages the excesses and abuses of over enthusiastic promotion and protects the integrity of interscholastic athletic programs

for the member schools and their students. The eligibility of a transfer student must be established by school records or verification

from the sending school. The responsibility for establishing eligibility rests with the receiving school. A student’s residence is the

home in which the parent(s) or legal guardian actually, physically live. Residence can be changed only by the union of “act and

intent.” The residence of a person is where his habitation is fixed and to which, whenever he is absent, he has the intention of

returning. A change of residence can only be made by the act of removal joined with the intent to remain in another place. There can

be only one residence. The only legal guardianship that is recognized by the WHSAA for transfer rule purposes is that legal

guardianship which has been established at least 12 months prior to the student’s moving to a new school and the fact that the

student has been living with that legal guardian in their previous school setting.

6.4.1 The principal must submit an “athletic residence” record of transfer form to the WHSAA office. All information included on the

certificate must have been verified. If the Record of Transfer or Foreign Exchange Student form is not posted or is posted by the

member school following the participation of a student who is eligible under all WHSAA eligibility requirements, the member school

shall be assessed $50 per form.

In addition, if the Record of Transfer or Foreign Exchange Student form is not posted or is posted by the member school following

the participation of a student who is ineligible under any WHSAA eligibility requirement, the member school shall be assessed $50,

and the member school shall forfeit any contests in which that student participates in accordance with WHSAA Rule 5.0.7.

6.4.2 Upon completion of the requirements of Rule 6.4.1, a student shall be immediately eligible for all interscholastic athletic competition

under the following conditions:

1. A student moving from a two year junior high school to the ninth grade of a senior high school for the first time.

2. A student moving from a three year junior high to the tenth grade of a senior high school in the same attendance area for

the first time.

3. A student assigned to a foster home by court order.

4. A student returning home from a correctional institution.

5. A foreign exchange student from a foreign exchange program approved by the Council on Standards for International

Educational Travel (CSIET) or the WHSAA. All students under any foreign exchange program must meet all other

WHSAA eligibility rules and must be reported to the WHSAA office on the appropriate form. A foreign exchange student

who becomes a participant shall be eligible for three consecutive sports seasons. Any part of any season shall constitute

one complete season.

6. A student transferring from a closed or discontinued school.

EXCEPTION: A student who has graduated from a school in his/her home country may be ruled eligible if semester eligibility has

not been met.

6.4.3 A student who transfers from a school in the United States, a U.S. Territory, or U.S. Military Base (to be referred to as School A) to

School B without a change of residence on the part of the parents or legal guardian from school attendance area A to school

attendance area B, shall be eligible for athletic competition, except varsity level competition for one year from the date of enrollment,

in School B, in interscholastic sports in which the student has participated at any level and/or grade during the 12 calendar months

preceding the date of such transfer.

6.4.31 Dual Residence and Divorced/Separated Parents

The transfer bylaws are based upon the place of residence of the parents. With cases of pending divorce, legal separation, or dual

residences (only applies to divorce or legal separation situations) the student shall be eligible either at the school in the district in

which the home last occupied by both parents is located, or the WHSAA member school where the student has established

eligibility, or with the parent with court designated physical custody of the student. After a finalized divorce, and after enrollment in

the ninth grade, a student is granted one move from parent to parent involving a WHSAA member school with immediate eligibility

for all interscholastic athletic competition.

6.4.4 The eligibility of a student who transfers from one school to another before a move by his/her parents shall be determined as

provided in Rule 6.4.3. The student may be declared eligible as soon as the family’s new residence has been established within the

school’s attendance area if, at the time of the student transfer, notice is given to the member school that the parent or WHSAA

recognized legal guardian will be moving to the school’s attendance area prior to the expiration of one year from the date of

enrollment, in School B, as referred to in Rule 6.4.3.

6.4.5 Students who transfer from one attendance center to another within the same unified district (USD) when initiated by the school,

may be declared eligible without a move on the part of the parents, provided policies on such transfers are clearly defined in board

of education policy and provided both principals approve the “special” transfer.

The status of a student who transfers from one school to another without a change of residence on the part of his/her parents,

providing two or more high schools operate within the same district whether under the same or different authority, will be considered

the same as changing school districts and the same rules will apply.

This applies to 9-12 grade students who transfer from one school to another whether it is a member school or an affiliate member

school.

6.4.6 The high school which a student elects for his/her first high school attendance, School A, shall be considered his/her choice. If for

any reason the student transfers to another school, School B, he/she shall be ineligible for varsity level athletic competition for one

[38]

year from the date of enrollment in School B. This rule applies to interscholastic sports in which the student has participated at any

level and/or grade during the 12 calendar months preceding the date of such transfer.

6.4.7 Except as provided in rules 6.4.1 through 6.4.6, all other students who transfer to a member school shall be eligible for athletic

competition, except varsity level competition for one year from the date of enrollment, in School B, in interscholastic sports in which

the student has participated at any level and/or grade during the 12 calendar months preceding the date of such transfer.

6.4.71 High School Closure and Charter Schools

If a high school is closed and students are forced to attend a high school elsewhere and the following year a charter school is

granted to the school that was closed the students could return to the charter school and be eligible to participate in all WHSAA

sanctioned activities at the beginning of the school year.

6.4.8 TRANSFER RULE - HARDSHIP

If, after determination of a student's eligibility with regard to transfer, the member school administrator determines that a potential

hardship exists on the student as defined in Rule 6.4.81, the member school administrator may petition the Commissioner for a

waiver of the transfer rules. Such cases must be filed under and in accordance with the proper form. The Commissioner will rule

upon the petition for waiver on an individual case basis utilizing the hardship standard set forth in Rule 6.4.81. The Commissioner's

ruling on hardship is subject to appeal to the Board of Directors as provided in Article XII of the WHSAA's Constitution.

6.4.81 HARDSHIP DEFINED

A hardship is an unforeseeable, unavoidable AND uncorrectable act, condition or event which causes the imposition of severe and

nonathletic burden upon the student or his/her family.

1. This is to include the case of orphans, children of overseas military transfers, and children from broken homes.

2. No consideration for waiver may be granted if by doing so the action will result in a student who was ineligible in the

sending school becoming eligible in the receiving school.

3. Hardship appeals must be processed by the principal of the receiving school on the appropriate WHSAA form and in

concert with the specific guidelines.

6.4.82 DESCRIPTION OF PROCESS FOR WAIVER OF THE TRANSFER RULE.

1. Petition for waiver completed by the petitioning school

2. Petition forwarded to superintendent or principal of school from which student transferred

3. Waiver form completed by superintendent or principal of school student last attended

4. Completed form returned to the WHSAA office for a ruling from the Commissioner

6.4.9 INELIGIBLE TRANSFER STUDENT

6.4.91 Any student who deliberately falsifies information for eligibility purposes will lose one year's eligibility.

6.4.92 If by domicile outside Wyoming, a student is or would have become ineligible, he/she cannot become eligible by transferring to

Wyoming.

6.4.93 A student who would be ineligible in a member school because of disciplinary reasons or expulsion, may not become eligible by

transferring to another member school.

A student who is ineligible for any reason in a member school or affiliate member school may not become eligible by transferring to

another member or affiliate member school.

6.5.0 SEMESTER REQUIREMENTS

6.5.1 A pupil shall not be eligible for more than four fall and four spring semesters, for a total of eight semesters. These semesters will be

counted consecutively after the student enters the ninth grade. NOTE: If a student does not participate or is ineligible due to

transfer, scholarship, etc., the semester(s) during that period shall be counted toward the total number of semesters possible.

6.5.2 Enrollment of 20 or more school days shall constitute a semester of eligibility when applied to participation in school activities.

6.5.3 Students who are forced to drop out due to injury or illness may present their situation to the Commissioner for special

consideration.

6.5.4 Students ineligible because of scholastic deficiencies from the previous semester shall not be eligible until all grades have been

verified by a school official on or after the last day of the current semester provided they have met requirements.

6.5.5 SEMESTER RULE - HARDSHIP

6.5.6 If after determination of a student's eligibility with regard to semester, the member school administrator determines that certain

conditions beyond a student's control exist which create a hardship on the student, the member school administrator may petition

the Commissioner for a waiver of the semester rule. Such cases must be filed under and in accordance with the proper form. The

Commissioner will rule upon the petition for waiver on an individual case basis.

6.5.7 The semester hardship rule applies only to those students who, because of illness or other justifiable emergencies, are not able to

complete a semester after twenty days of attendance. The Commissioner may waive portions of this rule for special cases.

[39]

6.5.8 DESCRIPTION OF PROCESS FOR WAIVER OF THE SEMESTER RULE

1. Petition of waiver (front side) completed by petitioning school

2. Petition sent to WHSAA office for a ruling from the Commissioner

6.6.0 PHYSICAL EXAMINATION, IMMUNIZATION AND PARENTAL CONSENT

6.6.1 Forms shall be signed by the physician and parents. Forms for married students over 18 years of age shall be signed by both the

student and his/her spouse with the statement that the student may participate. See form A7 and A8 on the WHSAA web page

(Forms Link) for the suggested physical examination form.

6.6.2 The earliest acceptable date for a current physical examination is May 1. Medical doctors, osteopaths, physicians assistants who

are operating in a program approved and licensed by the Wyoming State Board of Medical Examiners, Licensed Advanced

Practitioners of Nursing with a specialty area of either School Nurse Practitioner, Family Nurse Practitioner, Pediatric Nurse

Practitioner or College Health Nurse, and Chiropractors are eligible to give physicals for the purpose of high school eligibility. In

addition and unless the Wyoming State Board of Medicine denies the authority, any licensed health care provider whose state

licensing board has verified that its practitioners are qualified and trained to give physical exams covering all the exam areas set

forth on the recommended Physical Exam Form, which is attached to and made a part of the WHSAA Handbook (APPENDIX A),

shall be eligible to give physicals for the purpose of high school eligibility.

6.6.3 No pupil shall be eligible to compete in any interscholastic sport or activity unless, within the current school year and preceding any

practice, he/she shall have filed a certificate of physical fitness with his/her high school principal. The medical examination form is

also a parental permission form and must be signed by the parent/legal guardian.

No pupil shall be eligible to compete in any interscholastic sport or activity unless, within the current school year and preceding any

practice, he/she shall have provided proof of immunization as defined in Wyoming Statute 21-4-309.

6.6.4 Activities that require yearly physical examinations are basketball, competitive marching band, cross country, football, golf, indoor

track, skiing, soccer, spirit squad, swimming, tennis, track, volleyball, and wrestling.

6.7.0 THREE YEAR JUNIOR HIGH SCHOOL

6.7.1 Schools may certify a ninth grader as either a junior high or high school participant. A ninth grader whose ninth grade team's starting

practice date is earlier than the WHSAA approved date cannot take part in the high school season at the conclusion of the junior

high season. He/she may wait until the official WHSAA starting date, and after completing the mandatory number of practices,

become eligible for athletic competition.

6.7.2 In schools which have a separate three year junior high, seventh and eighth grade pupils may compete with or against ninth graders

on a junior high school team without forfeiting a year of eligibility for such participation.

6.7.4 Ninth grade students will be permitted to participate in activities that are sponsored by the WHSAA if they are attending a WHSAA

member school (WHSAA Rule 6.1.3). Because Ninth grade students in a Wyoming public three year junior high school are counted

in ADM toward WHSAA classification, those students may participate at the senior high level. Ninth graders who have competed on

a high school team must attend the high school at which they competed as a ninth grader or they will be treated as transfer pupils

who must comply with WHSAA Transfer Rule 6.4.0.

6.7.5 Junior high or elementary school pupils may participate in all music, FFA and FCCLA activities as members of a high school group

without affecting their high school eligibility.

6.7.6 Eighth graders are not eligible to play with or against high school teams. If such is done, games are forfeited and the pupil loses a

corresponding number of semesters of high school competition. EXCEPTION: Elementary pupils may participate in all music

activities as members of high school groups without penalty.

6.8.0 GENDER IDENTITY PARTICIPATION

If a State of Wyoming Statute establishes law regarding Transgender participation in sports and activities, the WHSAA shall adhere

to and comply with such state Statute.

7.0.0 SPECIFIC SPORTS RULES AND REGULATIONS

7.1.0 The Wyoming High School Activities Association, in order to effectively provide equitable athletic opportunities for all students, offers

a comprehensive athletic program.

7.2.0 OFFICIAL CONTEST RULES

7.2.1 The official contest rules and rule books as published by the listed organization have been approved by the Board of Directors for all

interscholastic athletic contests in the following sports. Interscholastic competition shall be conducted using contest rules adopted by

the Board of Directors and modifications or changes in sport rules are not permitted except those provided in the current WHSAA

Handbook and approved by the Board of Directors.

BASKETBALL

NATIONAL FEDERATION

SOFTBALL

NATIONAL FEDERATION

CROSS COUNTRY

NATIONAL FEDERATION

SWIMMING AND DIVING

NATIONAL FEDERATION

FOOTBALL

NATIONAL FEDERATION

TENNIS

U.S. TENNIS ASSOC.

GOLF

U.S. GOLF ASSOC

TRACK AND FIELD

NATIONAL FEDERATION

[40]

INDOOR TRACK

NATIONAL FEDERATION

VOLLEYBALL

NATIONAL FEDERATION

SKIING

U.S. SKI ASSOC. AS MODIFIED BY WHSAA

WRESTLING

NATIONAL FEDERATION

SOCCER

NATIONAL FEDERATION

7.3.0 DEFINITION OF ASSOCIATION CONTEST

Association Contest: An "Association Contest" is an athletic contest between teams representing two high schools which are

members of the Association involving any group of students playing under the supervision of the school. All rules and regulations

that apply to an Association Contest shall apply to any athletic contest engaged in by a member school. Any game or part of a game

(scrimmage, practice, warm-up, tune-up, or similar activity), in which the students participate as a representative team of their

school with any other team not a member of their school, shall be counted as a part of the season game limit for the school's athletic

classification. The designation of a team/squad is dependent upon the majority of members on that team. For basketball that

number is three, for football the number is six, for soccer the number is six, for softball the number is five and for volleyball the

number is four.

7.3.1 DISRUPTION OF GAME/CONTEST DUE TO UNSAFE CONDITIONS

Officials and school personnel should always rule on the side of safety and postpone or delay any activity when unsafe conditions

arise. If there is any doubt as to whether the contest should be suspended, it is always better to error on the side of safety.

The decision to suspend a contest lies with the game officials and the site administrator. If this involves outdoor weather conditions,

teams should be sent to their respective locker rooms or buses and fans should be instructed to leave the stadium.

1. Resume play from the point of interruption at a later date.

2. Declare a winner based on the score at the time of interruption if the event is in the second half or by mutual agreement.

3. In football, if the score is tied, no winner will be declared.

4. In volleyball (games are 1-1 or 2-2) or basketball if the event is tied and it’s not possible to complete the contest at a later date,

the game or match will be canceled with neither team allowed to schedule a replacement contest.

5. In soccer, the match will go into the books as a tie and be treated accordingly in any tie breaking scenario.

7.3.2 USE OF DRONES DURING ASSOCIATION CONTESTS

The use of drones, in any capacity, is not allowed during any “Association Contest”. Member schools may make a local decision as

to how they wish to utilize drones during practice situations.

7.3.6 ROSTERS FOR SOCCER TOURNAMENTS

No more than twenty-two (22) players can be in uniform for any post season tournament contest. The twenty-two players whose

names are entered on the official scorebook/roster for the first tournament contest, shall be the only players used for the entire

tournament. Violation of this provision shall cause forfeiture as per WHSAA Rules 5.0.7 and 1.4.0 (Refer to Rule 7.3.0 for definition

of a contest).

7.3.7 ROSTERS FOR SOFTBALL TOURNAMENTS

No more than eighteen (18) players can be in uniform for any post season tournament contest. The eighteen players whose names

are entered on the official scorebook/roster for the first tournament contest, shall be the only players used for the entire tournament.

Violation of this provision shall cause forfeiture as per WHSAA Rules 5.0.7 and 1.4.0 (Refer to Rule 7.3.0 for definition of a contest).

7.4.0 SEASON STARTING AND ENDING DATES

Each sport's season begins with the starting practice date for that sport and ends on the day following the member schools'

involvement in that sport season. For example, if a member school's volleyball team is eliminated during its regional tournament,

involvement for that member school in the volleyball season ends on the day following elimination. Students in their eighth semester

are allowed to complete the season in which they are currently competing.

7.4.1 CULMINATING EVENTS

The WHSAA has full authority and responsibility for all culminating events. The WHSAA may delegate the administration of said

events to other parties but reserves the right to determine the time, site, and other conditions which will be required to conduct the

culminating events.

Culminating Event administration shall be subject to the direction of the WHSAA but will generally be delegated to Meet Directors.

Issues may develop during the course of the Culminating Events which require actions to be taken to ensure the Mission, Values

and Culminating Event Philosophy of the WHSAA is achieved. The WHSAA shall have the authority to take such action as it deems

necessary to accomplish its objectives including discipline or ejection of participants, coaches, officials, schools and/or guests.

[41]

THE FOLLOWING ARE RECOMMENDED REGIONAL FORMATS

RECOMMENDED BASKETBALL & VOLLEYBALL TOURNAMENT

FORMAT

BYES WOULD BE PLACED

STARTING WITH THE #1 SEED AND

PROCEED TO #2 SEED, ETC.

BYES WOULD BE DRAWN AFTER SEEDING

REGIONAL TENNIS TOURNAMENT BRACKET

[42]

RECOMMENDED REGIONAL WRESTLING

TOURNAMENT FORMAT

7.4.5 PASS DISTRIBUTION POLICY

For the Sports of Swimming, Track, and Wrestling-In addition to each individual participant, each participating school will be given

two coaches ribbons/passes, two manager ribbons/passes, and one bus driver pass. Two coaches spouses passes will be issued

for wrestling and coaches' spouses passes for swimming and track will be issued upon request.

For the Sports of Basketball and Volleyball-Each team will be given 14 participant ribbons (12 player and two manager), two

coaches ribbons, one bus driver pass, and two passes for coaches spouses. If requested on the proper form, one additional coach's

pass and one additional student manager/trainer's pass for basketball will be provided.

Cheerleader Pass Policy- If requested on the proper form, 14 cheerleader passes and one cheerleader sponsor pass will be

provided. Additional passes, over the 14 provided, may be purchased at full price.

[43]

Participants must display their ribbons for entry into all areas of the tournament. Track participants must wear their assigned

numbers to gain entrance at the state track meet. Coaches, managers, bus drivers, and cheerleaders must show their passes for

entry. There will be no exception to this condition for entry at state events. If ribbons/passes are lost, arrangements must be made to

purchase additional ribbons/ passes before entry will be allowed. Please do not ask for additional passes.

Students (whether spectators or participants) using an Administrator Pass must be accompanied by the cardholder.

7.4.7 By majority consent, regions by classification may decide their representatives to the state tournament in volleyball, wrestling,

soccer, softball and basketball by another format. This format must be both on file in the WHSAA office and published in the league

or regional by-laws before the start of the season during which that tournament is held.

7.4.8 Tie Breaking Procedure - Four teams involved

Step 1: Do any of the tied teams have an advantage/disadvantage in head to head play. (Example: If two teams are 2-1 and two

teams are 1-2, the 2-1 teams have the advantage.) If there is no advantage/disadvantage, then flip one coin per team until

there is one odd team and that team is the lowest seed out of the tie.

Step 2: In football and soccer, we will utilize their respective sports 3-way tie breaking procedures. In the other sports, look at

head to head competition of the three remaining schools. Does one team have an advantage/disadvantage? If so, that

team is either the top or bottom seed of those remaining three schools. If not, flip one coin per team until there is an odd

team and that team is the lowest seed out of the tie.

Step 3: Look at the head to head competition of the two remaining teams. If one team has an advantage, they are seeded higher.

If not, conduct a coin flip with one team calling, and the coin toss winner is the higher seed.

7.5.0 BASKETBALL

Starting in the 2026-27 Season, the WHSAA will be adopting the use of a 35 second shot clock in all contests. In accordance with

the NFHS Rule 2-14 (Shot Clock-State Association Adoption). The guidelines would follow the NFHS Rule 2-14.

7.5.1 The WHSAA recognizes four classifications in basketball. The schools with the enrollments of 700 and above shall be 4A, schools

with enrollments from 210-699 shall be 3A, schools with enrollments from 110-209 shall be 2A, and schools with enrollments of 109

and below shall be 1A.

7.5.15 The basketball season begins with the first allowable contact day on Monday of WHSAA calendar week 21. There shall be NO

CONTACT Thursday through Sunday of WHSAA Calendar week 21. The first allowable contest date is on Thursday of calendar

week 23. The basketball season will end with the 3A/4A State Tournament on Saturday of WHSAA week 36.

7.5.2 No game shall be played except those scheduled by and entirely under the control of the competing schools or the WHSAA.

7.5.3 A player may not participate in more than six quarters on any one day. (Overtime periods are considered part of the fourth quarter.)

EXCEPTION: Regular and post-season tournaments. NOTE: A player who participates in more than the limit shall be disqualified

from further play that day. Entering a contest for one live ball period counts as a quarter of participation. As per WHSAA Rule 1.4.2.

and 5.0.7 the contest in which a participant exceeds the six quarter limitation shall be forfeited.

7.5.31 Teams are to conduct pre-game and half-time warm-ups on their half of the court. If jogging or running is part of their warm-up drills,

then it is to be confined to their half of the court to warm-up. Teams are not to run under the basket of the opposing team when

entering the floor or anytime during warm-ups.

7.5.32 In any basketball contest a running clock shall be utilized when one team is 40 or more points ahead at the end of the first half. In all

classes, when a team is ahead at half time by 40 points or more, or becomes 40 points or more ahead in the second half, the clock

will run continually, except between quarters, time-outs, and when replacing an injured or disqualified player. This means the clock

will run during a free throw unless the clock had to be stopped for one of the exceptions. After the aforementioned exceptions, the

clock will be restarted when the official signals the clock to restart after a free throw attempt or when play is resumed by a throw-in.

7.5.4 REGULATIONS

7.5.41 Each member school’s team is limited to participate in no more than 18 basketball contests per season. This limit shall apply to all

squads. WHSAA regional and state tournament games shall not be counted in the maximum number of games permitted each

school. Participation in regular season tournaments shall count as two contests. Each member school should be limited to three

regular season tournaments. To assist in reducing 9th and 10th grade games during the week, the tournament limit will not be

imposed to those levels provided their tournaments are conducted on a Saturday. Players who will compose the starting five on the

varsity team may not suit up for sub-varsity level contests without WHSAA approval.

7.5.42 The season shall close with the state tournament. No game shall be played after the finals of the state tournament unless approved

by the Board of Directors.

7.5.43 The WHSAA has adopted the National Federation twenty-eight foot coaching box.

7.5.5 WHSAA tournament basketballs shall be provided by Baden.

7.5.6 There will be no removal of basketball nets immediately following any regional or state basketball contest.

[44]

7.5.7 Practice sessions on any court used for either regional or state will not be allowed at any time during the ten (10) days prior to the

respective tournament. Schools that host a regional tournament are granted an exception and are allowed to practice on their own

court even though they are hosting the event.

7.5.71 No more than twelve players can be in uniform for any tournament contest. The twelve players whose names are entered on the

official scorebook for the first tournament contest, shall be the only players used for the entire tournament. Violation of this provision

shall cause forfeiture as per WHSAA Rules 5.0.7 and 1.4.0 (Refer to Rule 7.3.0 for definition of a contest).

7.5.75 The 1A/2A State Basketball Tournament will be held during calendar week 35. The 3A/4A State Tournament will be held during

calendar week 36.

7.5.80 SEEDING FOR THE REGIONAL TOURNAMENT:

7.5.81 All schools are eligible to participate in the regional tournament in order to qualify for the state championship series. When all

schools in a regional play each other, the won-loss records will be used to determine the seeding. If this method is not used, item

7.5.82 must be used.

7.5.82 By majority consent, regions may seed their representatives to regional tournaments by another method with the prior approval of

the Commissioner.

7.5.83 Any school that refuses to comply with one of the above methods, will be seeded last in their regional tournament.

7.6.0 CROSS COUNTRY

7.6.1 The WHSAA recognizes three classifications in cross country. The schools with the twelve largest enrollments shall be 4A, the next

largest sixteen shall be 3A, and the remaining schools shall be 2A.

7.6.1.5 The cross country season begins with the first allowable practice on Monday of WHSAA calendar week 7. The first allowable contest

date is on Thursday of calendar week 8. Each cross country runner is limited to 8 contest days per season. Cross Country

participants will be allowed two (2) extra organized races (fundraisers, triathlons, fun-runs, etc.). These events must not fall under

WHSAA sanctioning. These events cannot be mandated by the coach, and the students will be participating on their own and not

representing the school. Catastrophic insurance will not cover these events. The State Meet shall not count toward the 8 day contest

limit. The cross country season will end with the State Meet on Saturday of week 16.

7.6.2 The distance at the state meet shall be 5K for both boys and girls.

7.6.3 A team shall consist of a maximum of seven runners and a minimum of five to score in 3A and 4A. 2A teams shall consist of a

maximum of seven runners and a minimum of four to score.

7.6.4 Cross country participants are limited to one meet per day.

7.6.5 The first five finishers of each team will score points according to the place in which they finish. Only one boy’s team and one girl’s

team per school is allowed at the state meet. A school may enter fewer than five participants to compete for individual awards.

7.6.6 Students, while members of the cross country team, may participate with outside affiliations as long as permission has been given

by the local school district.

7.6.80 STATE MEET

7.6.81 Each school is permitted one boys and one girls team at the state meet. National Federation entry rules will be followed.

7.6.82 A school may enter single participants to compete for the individual championship.

7.6.83 The distance for the state cross country meet is five kilometers for all classes of boys and five kilometers for all classes of girls.

7.6.84 Participants and coaches may walk the course prior to the meet during a time designated by meet management.

7.6.85 National Federation Rule 9-2 will be utilized to break team scoring ties.

7.7.0 BOYS FOOTBALL

7.7.10 The WHSAA recognizes three classifications of eleven-player football, one classification of nine-player football and one

classification of six-player football. The schools with the ten largest enrollments shall be 4A, the next largest twelve shall be 3A, and

the next largest fourteen shall be 2A, and the next largest fourteen shall be 1A 9-man. The remaining schools will be in the 1A 6-

man classification.

7.7.11 Each player must have nine days of practice prior to the first contest.

7.7.12 The first three days of football practice for each participant are designed as a conditioning period. The first two days, players may

wear helmets, mouth guards, football shoes, shorts, or sweat suits, and contact with football dummies and sleds are allowed, but no

student to student contact is allowed. The third day, players may wear shoulder pads and jerseys and contact football dummies and

sleds, but no student to student contact are allowed.

[45]

Practice Time: No single practice may exceed three hours, and the total practice time for days with multiple practice sessions may

not exceed five hours.

***Note: Warm-up, stretching, speed and agility drills and cool down are all considered part of practice.

Meetings, film study, water breaks, rest breaks and injury treatment shall not count against the three- or five- hour limits. Nor shall

weight training, voluntary conditioning and teaching period/walk through simulations without equipment, be considered practice for

the purposes of the three-or five- hour limits.

With the wide-range of football programs in the state, there are several variables to consider when planning a practice. With player

safety being our main emphasis, practice plans should reasonably limit overall exposure to multiple blows to the head and body.

Variables to consider are team size and the number of reps in your drills that may affect an athlete’s potential for injury. While the

current level of knowledge keeps us from making specific and rigid rules concerning contact, there is a consensus that lessening the

frequency of contact is likely beneficial to the athlete’s overall health.

Practice Contact: Live Action and Thud are limited to no more than 3 practices per week and 90 minutes per week. During pre-

season 120 minutes will be allowed.

***Note: When the main focus of a practice is designed as an intra-squad scrimmage, it will not count toward the live action contact

time period. Shorter scrimmages incorporated into a regular practice will be counted toward the live action contact time. During pre-

season twice-daily practices, only one session per day may include live action or thud.

Actions that require contact limitations:

Live Action: Drill is run in game-like conditions and is the only time that players are taken to the ground.

Thud: Drill is run at competitive speed through the moment of contact; no pre-determined "winner." Contact remains above the

waist, players stay on their feet and a quick whistle ends the drill.

Actions that do not require limitations:

Control: Drill is run at assigned speed until the moment of contact; one player is pre-determined the 'winner' by the coach. Contact

remains above the waist and players stay on their feet.

Bags: Drill is run against a bag or another soft-contact surface.

Air: Players run a drill unopposed without contact.

7.7.13 A player may participate in no more than eight quarters in a seven day period, nor in more than five quarters a day. Quarters are

counted from Sunday to Sunday. Any player who participates in one or more downs in one quarter shall be charged with one quarter

of participation. Exception: Quarters that players kick or punt only will not count towards the eight or five quarter limit. As per

WHSAA Rules 1.4.1 and 5.0.7 the contest in which a participant exceeds the limitation shall be forfeited.

7.7.14 Summer football camps may be conducted at member school facilities and with member school equipment providing all of the

following conditions are satisfied:

1. The camp must be held at a time during the WHSAA calendar weeks of 47 through week 3 for 4A schools and week 4 for

1A, 2A and 3A schools.

2. The camp must be staffed by high school football coaches certified by the Professional Teaching Standards Board. Guest

clinicians are allowed but must work under the supervision of the camp director.

3. Medical and liability insurance coverage must be in place either by school, coach or parent or all of the aforementioned.

4. Any student who attends a contact team football camp must have completed three days of full practice (without pads)

during the immediate ten days preceding the camp. The first two days, players may wear helmets, mouth guards, football

shoes, shorts or sweat suits and contact with football dummies and sleds are allowed, but no student to student contact is

allowed. The third day, players may wear previously mentioned items as well as shoulder pads and jerseys and contact

football dummies and sleds, but no student to student contact is allowed. Weight room attendance does not meet this

requirement. This requirement must be documented in writing by a high school coach certified by the Professional

Teaching Standards Board.

5. The camp may only be held for a maximum of three days (excluding the conditioning requirement).

6. The local school district administration must give their approval.

7. A current physical examination form is required to be on file at the school of each student taking part in the camp as a

participant. The form must be signed by the appropriate medical personnel and must include a signed parent and student

waiver that recognizes the inherent dangers of participating in football.

8. An emergency medical release form must be on file with the camp directors for each participant.

Summer contact team football camps conducted at non-member school facilities are only required to meet conditions #1 and #4 as

listed above.

7.7.15 The football season will have a first allowable practice date of the Monday of WHSAA Calendar Week 7 for 1A, 2A and 3A

classifications. 4A classification will have a first allowable practice date of the Monday of WHSAA Calendar Week 6.

1A, 2A, 3A and 4A football teams are allowed to play a zero week contest on or after the Friday of WHSAA week 8 and before the

Friday of Week 9. A contest is a scrimmage or game between two member schools. If a team chooses to play a game it must meet

all NFHS and WHSAA rules of play. This contest will not in anyway affect qualification for the culminating event playoff series for

1A, 2A and 3A, but all contests in 4A will affect qualification for the culminating event playoff series.

[46]

Scrimmages will be limited to 120 total plays per team. This total will include offense, defense, and special team plays. There may

be more than two teams at a scrimmage, however, the 120 total plays is still in effect. A player must have nine (9) days of practice

to participate in the scrimmage or game.

1A, 2A, 3A and 4A classifications are limited to one zero week contest and eight regular season contests, excluding the culminating

event playoff series. The State Championships will be on the Friday and Saturday of WHSAA Calendar Week 19.

7.7.16 The overtime procedure that will be followed appears in the National Federation Football Rule Book.

7.7.17 In any football contest a running clock shall be utilized when one team is 45 or more points ahead at the end of the first half. In all

classes, when a team is ahead at half time by 45 points or more, or becomes 45 points or more ahead in the second half, the clock

will not stop on:

1. Out of Bounds 2. Incomplete Passes

3. First Downs 4. Change of Possession (including touchbacks)

The clock will stop as required by rule on:

1. Time-outs 4. Scoring Plays

2. Penalties 5. P.A.T.s

3. Between Quarters 6. All other situations as per rule

If the point differential becomes less than 45 points, continue running clock.

This use of the rule does not eliminate the use of National Federation Football Rule 3-1-3

7.7.20 At the end of each football season, all helmets must be evaluated. Those helmets not in good condition must be reconditioned or

replaced.

7.7.21 Each school shall be responsible for providing its own headphones if the host school does not have the equipment for both teams.

The VISITING school shall inform the HOST school no later than the Tuesday of the week of the contest whether or not it will NEED

HEADPHONES. EITHER TEAM'S DECISION TO NOT USE HEADPHONES WILL NOT AFFECT THE OTHER TEAM'S DECISION.

The host school shall also provide the visiting school with press box/crows nest space if such is being utilized by the host school.

7.7.22 Schools are required to construct a barrier along both sidelines of their football contest field(s) from end zone to end zone.

7.7.30 TIE BREAKING CRITERIA TO DETERMINE STATE PLAYOFF SEEDING

1. Two Way Tie For First Place Or A Seed

a. If two teams tie for first place or a seed, the winner of the common game will be declared first place or the

higher seed.

2. Three Teams Tied For Available Seeds

a. If one team (A) defeated the other two teams (B and C), team A will be declared highest placed seed.

b. The winner of the regular season game between B and C will be declared the second highest seed.

c. If one team (A) lost to both of the other teams (B and C), A will be the lowest seed of the three tied teams. The

winner of the regular season game between B and C will be the highest seed of the three tied teams with the

loser declared as the second highest seed of the three tied teams.

d. If the tie still exists, compare the head to head result of the tied teams with the highest-ranking non-tied team.

Continue through the league standings until the tie is broken.

e. If the tie is broken by criteria 2d, the winner of the head to head contest between the two remaining teams is

seeded higher.

f. If a tie still exists, then positive and negative points will be used to determine the seeding (a maximum of 12

positive or negative points may be accumulated in any one contest). Once one team is separated by the points,

the winner of the head to head contest between the two remaining teams is the higher seed.

Example:

Team Score Points

A 42 = +12

B 0 = -12

A 7 = -3

C 10 = +3

B 21 = +7

C 14 = -7

Final Seeding based on +/- Points

A (+12 -3 = +9) would be the 1 seed, the winner of the head to head contest between B & C will be

the next higher seed.

If there is a forfeit, the winner will receive +12 points and the loser will receive -12 points for the

contest.

g. If the tie is still not broken and three seeds remain:

i. Coin flip - Odd man or team is the lowest seed of the tied teams

[47]

ii. Winner of the common game between the remaining two teams is highest seed and the loser is the

second highest seed of the tied teams.

3. Four Teams Tied Seeding – see WHSAA Rule 7.4.8

7.7.40 CULMINATING EVENT SERIES

A culminating event series will start on week 17 of the WHSAA calendar with 3 weeks of playoff competition culminating with the five

classification State Championships.

Championship Series by classification:

The top 8 teams will advance and be seeded in the first round of the playoffs based on their regular season records. The higher

seed will host the lower seed the first two rounds of the playoffs as shown below.

The Championship game will be played in Laramie at the University of Wyoming’s War Memorial Stadium, with the higher seed

being the home team.

3A, 2A, 1A-9-player and 1A-6-player

The top 4 teams from each conference will advance to the first round of the playoffs. A cross bracketing format will be used with the

conference champions hosting the 4th place finishers and the conference runner-ups hosting the 3rd place finishers from the

opposite conference, as shown below.

Each team in the upper and lower bracket will be assigned a seed number as shown in the bracket below.

The second round games will be hosted by the highest upper and lower bracketed seeds.

The Championship game will be played in Laramie at the University of Wyoming’s War Memorial Stadium, with the higher seed

being the home team. The number one seed is given based on the conference that was the home team in the championship game

the previous year. The opposite conference champion of the home team from the previous year will be the number one seed.

3A & 1A-6 MAN

2A, 1A-9 MAN

7.7.41 All schools will play the schedule set up by the WHSAA Office. Any school that refuses to comply with the schedule will eliminate

itself from playoff consideration.

7.7.42 THE FOLLOWING GUIDELINES WILL BE FOLLOWED FOR THE FOOTBALL PLAYOFFS:

7.7.43 Twenty percent of the adjusted gross income will go to the host school, with the balance to the WHSAA. The programs and

concessions will be assigned to an organization of the host school. The WHSAA will provide a memorabilia vendor for all state

championship football contests.

7.7.44 The WHSAA will provide officials and have full authority and responsibility for the activity.

7.7.45 Baden footballs will be available at all playoff and State Championship Football games. As per past procedure, each team on

offense will have their choice of any brand football.

7.7.46 WHSAA FOOTBALL PLAYOFF DATES & TIMES.

First round playoff games will be on Friday at 6:00 p.m. for fields with lights or Friday at 2:00 p.m. for fields without lights. Times and

date can be adjusted by mutual consent of participating teams in accordance with the purpose of the WHSAA/UW conflict

coordination effort.

Second round playoff games will be on Saturday at 1:00 p.m. Time and date can be adjusted by mutual consent of participating

teams in accordance with the purpose of the WHSAA/UW conflict coordination effort.

[48]

Championship games will be on Friday and Saturday of WHSAA Calendar Week 19.

7.7.76 WHSAA - UW FOOTBALL

Purpose

To avoid conflicts between high school football play-offs and the University of Wyoming home football games.

The parties agree to work together to coordinate the three week playoff period. When UW has a home football game during the

three week period, the WHSAA will work with the member schools to limit the number of conflicts of playing on the same day.

7.8.0 GOLF

7.8.1 The WHSAA recognizes three classifications in golf. The schools with enrollments OF 700 and above shall be 4A, schools with

enrollments from 210-699 shall be 3A, and the schools with enrollments from 209 and below shall be 2A.

7.8.1.5 The golf season begins with the first allowable practice on Monday of WHSAA calendar week 6. The first allowable contest date is

on Wednesday of calendar week 6. Each golfer is limited to 10 contest days per season (fall and spring). A contest is defined as a

high school sanctioned event that takes place during the season. Golf participants will be allowed two (2) extra organized events

(club championships, fundraisers, regional tournaments, etc.) These events must not fall under WHSAA sanctioning. These events

cannot be mandated by the coach, and the students will be participating on their own and not representing the school. Catastrophic

insurance will not cover these events. The State Meet shall not count toward the 10 day contest limit. The fall golf season will end

with the State Meet on Saturday of week 11. The spring golf season begins on week 39 and ends on week 46. Member schools may

participate in one day golf meets throughout the Spring season. One two-day culminating event is allowed during the Spring season.

7.8.2 The coach or school representative shall accompany participants to all meets.

7.8.3 Each competitor is expected to be neat in appearance during the entire time of his/her play. Headsets, Walkmen, Ipod and other

such paraphernalia will not be allowed during any competition.

7.8.4 Students, while members of the golf team, may participate with outside affiliations as long as permission has been given by the local

school district.

7.8.41 Golf award limits will be the same as those allowed in the rules of the USGA. (No prize money. Merchandise up to a retail value of

$750)

7.8.60 GOLF MEETS

7.8.61 The USGA rules shall prevail in the state meet, except as modified by local rules.

7.8.62 The Commissioner shall assign a Tournament Director who will be responsible for ruling on all disputes. The Tournament Director

may appoint a committee of not more than three people to assist.

7.8.63 Whenever a school moves into or out of a different classification, the WHSAA Commissioner will adjust the State Site Rotation for

the classifications involved. Should a school request to be added to the rotation, the Commissioner will make a recommendation to

the WHSAA Board as to where the school should be placed in the rotation.

State golf site rotations are located on the WHSAA website under “State Events.” 3A and 4A state golf requires an 18 hole course.

All expenses, excluding practice round fees, must be included in the proposal process. Host sites will incur all costs associated

with hosting the state golf championship. Schools may not be charged to assist in covering host sites’ costs. Host site must provide

a minimum of one adult monitor per hole.

The state meet will consist of 36 holes of medal play; eighteen on Friday and eighteen on Saturday. Should weather become an

issue, the WHSAA Commissioner or designee will work with the Tournament Director and/or golf pro of the host site to evaluate

options to complete the tournament. The proper action will depend on the circumstances in each case. Depending on the weather

forecast, the tournament may be moved to the following week or the practice round may be eliminated and the tournament will start

on Thursday, with Saturday being used as a backup in case the tournament could not be finished on the previous two days. Should

this option be utilized, no one will be allowed to have a practice round. However, once the schools have all arrived at the site and

the weather changes to where 36 holes cannot be completed, a minimum of 18 holes will determine the individual and team placing.

If 27 holes can be completed, as long as each gender plays the same nine holes, the 27 hole total will be used.

7.8.63.5 In 4A, there will be a qualifying tournament the week before the State Golf Tournament. The top 20 individual golfers, plus

individuals from the top 4 teams who are not in the top 20, will qualify for the State Golf Tournament.

7.8.64 Boys teams may consist of five players with the lowest four scores counting each day for the team score. A school may enter less

than four players for medalist play only.

7.8.65 Girls teams may consist of five players with the lowest three scores counting each day for the team score. A school may enter less

than three players for medalist play only.

7.8.66 Each competitor will be assigned to either a threesome or foursome, and the pairing of the players will be based upon their team

ranking.

7.8.67 Each starting player must finish to determine the team score. No substitution of players will be allowed.

[49]

7.8.68 In case of a tie in the team event or in case of a tie for first place in the individual standings, the tie will be broken by a sudden death

playoff.

7.8.70 Any unsportsmanlike conduct by a participant shall result in his/her immediate disqualification.

7.8.71 Each school shall be responsible for any local green fees.

7.8.72 TOURNAMENT RULES COMMITTEE

There should be a minimum of three coaches and the local golf pro for the State Tournament Rules Committee. The local pro may

be used as a rules interpreter. This rules committee, with the assistance of the local pro, will handle any dispute or doubtful point on

the rules. The committee’s decision will be final and may not be appealed.

7.8.73 DISQUALIFICATION

All individuals who are disqualified for unsportsmanlike conduct, after being reviewed by the rules committee, cannot have their

score count on the day of the disqualification nor during the remainder of the tournament. All other rules of the WHSAA will apply for

unsportsmanlike conduct.

7.8.73.1 Each competitor is expected to be properly dressed and neat in appearance. Players will be permitted to wear shorts during

competition. However, youngsters wearing inappropriate attire will not be allowed to participate. The tournament director will be

responsible for determining what is appropriate. Any participant who in any way conducts him/herself in a manner which would bring

discredit upon his/her school shall be disqualified immediately.

Any player who swears or throws a club will be assessed two strokes on the first offense. A second offense will disqualify him/her

from the meet.

When a player has completed his round, he will not be permitted to return to the course and act as a gallery for other players.

7.8.74 INJURY OR ILLNESS

Any individual whose name is entered at the start of the tournament, but due to injury or illness, cannot play both days of the

tournament, his/ her score can be used on the day he/she participates.

7.8.74.1 All golfers will be allowed the use of push/pull carts throughout the golf season.

7.8.75 HANDICAP PLAYERS

Special requests must be made to the WHSAA Commissioner for permission for special needs due to permanent handicap or injury

condition.

In such situations, pull carts or motorized carts will be permitted upon request.

7.8.76 SPECTATORS ON THE COURSE DURING TOURNAMENT PLAY

1. As spectators enter the tournament venue they will be given a list of Wyoming High School golf “spectator guidelines” and

be required to sign-in (indicating they understand the rules and risk). Lanyards will be made available with policy so

spectators can visibly display that they have agreed to the guidelines. This will be done on all tournament days.

Coaches are expected to share these guidelines with spectators and fans from their school.

2. No spectator carts are allowed on the course with the following exception: If a spectator has a disabling condition they

may rent a cart from the pro shop but will not be allowed to carry another spectator in that cart. Questions of disabling

conditions and carts will be handled by the tournament director.

3. Spectators MUST remain in designated viewing areas, on the cart paths or at least 25 yards from all contestants at all

times. Spectators are not allowed on the tee or greens at any time. Tournament directors reserve the right to not

allow spectators on their course at any time.

4. Spectators are specifically instructed not to give any advice or rulings with players. Any verbal and non-verbal contact

could be construed as giving advice (Rule 8). Therefore, conversations with players in any form are not permitted. A two

(2) stroke penalty may be assessed by the Rules Committee for violation. Spectators may assist in searching for golf

balls to help speed up pace of play.

5. Spectators must understand there is a risk of injury and assume that risk while they are on or near the golf course.

6. Cell phones must be set on silent and cannot be used to communicate with any player.

7. Coaches will be available to monitor and enforce spectator rules, as part of the tournament staff, determined by the meet

director.

* Enforcement of this policy will be implemented as follows: 1st offense – verbal warning; 2nd offense – the spectator will

be asked to leave the golf course.

For a serious breach of the spectator policy, decisions on future suspensions will be left to the discretion of WHSAA staff.

[50]

7.8.78 PLAYING PARTNERS FROM THE SAME SCHOOL

During a state tournament, no two individuals from the same school will be allowed to compete in the same foursome of play. If

there is a tie in score from players from the same school, the order in which players will be assigned in the second round will be

determined by the coaches seeding them on their team list. This rule does not have to be applied to the golfers in the last ten places

or the 2A golfers at the discretion of the tournament director and rules committee.

7.8.80 A golf meet shall not be held during the fall season at the site of the state golf meet for that classification for that year. Exception –

The 2A school hosting state golf may host one invitational event during the fall season.

7.8.81 Coaches Supervising On Course of Play

Golf coaches are allowed to supervise on the golf course during play. This supervision and assignment is the responsibility of the

Meet Director. There shall be a minimum of one monitor per hole during the State Meet. Coaches will not be allowed to play during

the State Meet.

7.8.9 Coaches may give advice to and make themselves available to seek advice from the participants representing that school each day

of the competition provided:

1. Up to 3 coaches per team can coach and must be recognized by their school district as coaches.

2. Coaches identify and make themselves known to the rules committee before the start of the competition each day.

3. Coaches may not give advice to, or seek advice from, another school’s participants.

4. Coaches may give advice at any time during the stipulated round, and/or during any suspension of play. The advice shall

not unduly delay play.

5. Penalty for breach of condition: by a participant – two strokes; by a coach – two strokes will be added to the coach’s

school’s score.

6. The tournament director will have a sign-up sheet near the scoring area for each school to identify their coaches each

day. Coaches should wear something for identification purposes.

7.10.0 NORDIC SKIING

7.10.11 The WHSAA recognizes one classification in Nordic skiing. The Nordic Ski season begins with the first allowable practice on

Monday of WHSAA calendar week 20 and ends with the State Meet on Friday and Saturday of WHSAA calendar week 34.

7.10.12 Students, while members of the high school ski team, may participate with outside affiliations as long as permission has been given

by the local school district.

7.10.20 REGULATIONS

7.10.21 Boys will not compete against girls nor will girls compete against boys, with the exception of mixed format for relays.

7.10.22 Each school may enter no more than one Nordic varsity and one Nordic JV team. Moreover, a contestant can only be entered on

one team.

7.10.24 Each skier is limited to 12 contest days per season. A contest is defined as any competition, school or non-school, that takes place

during the season. Examples are included, but not limited to: USSA Nordic Ski Meets. Athletes may compete in up to four additional

race days if they are independent of the WHSAA ski program and require no additional funding from schools. The State Meet shall

not count toward the 12 day contest limit. A Nordic Ski meet shall not be held during the season at the site of the State Nordic Ski

Meet for that year. If a school is unable to host the meet at their local area, an alternative site may be chosen by the host school.

The host school will be responsible for providing meet help, course preparation and medals.

7.10.27 Final team standings may be announced on the basis of combined point totals for each of the following teams:

1. Nordic Boys

2. Nordic Girls

7.10.28 Nordic Meet Format

1. The state meet format shall consist of one classical race and one freestyle race. The distances of these races shall be 5

and 10 kilometers. These distances will be alternated between the classic and freestyle technique on alternating years.

This will begin for the 2015 state meet with a 5K Classic and a 10K Freestyle. The 2016 state meet will have a 5K

Freestyle and a 10K Classic. This alternating pattern will then be continued with even and odd numbered years. Each

race shall be scored separately and the two scores combined to arrive at cumulative team scores.

2. Regular season meets may vary in format, scoring, and technique with these variables being set at the annual scheduling

meeting.

3. Race start times will be determined by the Meet Director.

7.10.30 SCORING

1. The Nordic Relay will be scored as follows: score number of varsity teams present times 3 and drop 3 points for each

place.

2. In individual races, points will be given each place in descending order by giving first place 30 points.

3. A maximum of 5 finishers from each school will constitute the team score for that school.

4. Places of all individuals of a team over the maximum of 5 shall be disregarded.

[51]

7.10.31 SEEDING

1. It is the coach's responsibility to get his/her seeds to the hosting school no later than Wednesday at 12:00 noon for the

Friday race. If possible, both seeds should be turned in by the Wednesday deadline. If seeds are not received by the

deadline, the team in violation may be placed at the end of the race.

2. Seed run order is to be randomly drawn by host school for each race including the State Meet for both boys and girls. This

is to be kept confidential until all seeds have been presented.

7.10.32 POSTING OF RESULTS

1. It is recommended that a blackboard or similar communicating device be used in the finish area to post the results.

2. “Unofficial results” will be posted as soon as possible after each race and marked as such.

3. Results become "official” 30 minutes after the posting of the final race if there are no protests.

4. It is the host schools responsibility to email (provide) results to the WHSAA, the Casper Star-Tribune and wyopreps.com.

7.10.33 PROTESTS

1. All protests will be submitted to the meet director in writing prior to the race being declared official.

2. A designated race jury consisting of three (3) uninvolved high school coaches will meet at a predetermined location to

discuss all protests and finalize results.

3. The decision of the jury is final.

7.10.34 NORDIC RACE CRITERIA

1. Total distance for 2-day competition shall not exceed 20km. No race shall exceed 15km.

2. Race distances shall be set at annual scheduling meeting. If race distance must be changed, changes and rationale for

change must be posted at least 2 hours before race starts.

3. It is recommended that the classic technique be on the second day of the meet.

4. Bibs will be assigned in numerical order according to the race draw.

7.10.35 DUTIES OF THE JURY

The jury must ensure that the competition is organized and carried out according to the WHSAA rules. The responsibilities begin

when the jury is appointed and are ended when protests from the final competition have been decided.

The jury must clarify and decide: whether a competition shall be postponed, interrupted or cancelled. With difficult weather

conditions (e.g., strong wind, high air humidity, heavy snowfall, or high temperature) the Jury may, in consultation with the team

coaches of the participating teams and the medical authority responsible for the competition, postpone or cancel the competition.

Decisions of the Jury are made by a majority vote.

7.10.36 DESCRIPTION OF THE NORDIC COMPETITION COURSES

Nordic courses must be laid out so that they provide a technical, tactical and physical test of the competitor's qualifications. The

degree of difficulty should be in accordance with the level of the competition. The course should be laid out as naturally as possible

to avoid any monotony, with rolling undulating sections, climbs, and downhill sections. Where possible, the course should be laid out

through woodland.

Rhythm should not be broken by too many sharp changes in direction or steep climbs. The downhill sections must be laid out so that

they create a challenge to the competitors. At the same time it should be possible to ski the course even under fast conditions.

In principle, the Nordic course should consist of:

• One-third up hills defined as climbs with a gradient between 9% (1:11) and 18% (1:5.5) with height differences over 10 meters

plus some short climbs steeper than 18%.

• One-third undulating, rolling terrain, utilizing all terrain features with short climbs and downhills (with height differences of 1-9

meters).

• One-third varied downhills, demanding versatile downhill techniques.

At WHSAA Nordic competitions the courses may only be used in the direction established for the competition.

7.10.37 TECHNIQUE DEFINITIONS

1. Classical technique includes the diagonal techniques, the double poling techniques, herringbone techniques without a

gliding phase, downhill techniques and turning techniques. Single or double skating is not allowed. Turning techniques

comprise steps and pushes in order to change directions.

2. Free technique includes all Nordic skiing techniques.

7.10.38 PREPARATION OF THE COURSE

The following are recommendations:

1. Pre-Season Preparation

[52]

Rocks, stones, roots, stumps, brush and similar obstacles should be removed. The course must be prepared before the

winter so that they can be raced even with very little snow. Sections of the course that have drainage problems must be

corrected. The summer preparations should be of a standard which allows for carrying out of competitions with

approximately 30 cm of snow. Special attention must be given to downhill sections and the need for banking the curves.

2. General Preparation for the competition

The course should be completely prepared with mechanical equipment. If heavy machines are used, they should follow

the original configuration of the ground as much as possible in order to preserve the undulations of the terrain.

The course must be prepared to the recommended width according to the format of the competition. The course must be

prepared so that competitors can ski and pass unobstructed. On slopes where the trails traverse, they must be wide

enough to allow for good preparation.

The course must be completely prepared before the official training, correctly marked and with the kilometer signs in

place. The testing tracks should have the same preparation as the competition course.

The same conditions must be ensured for all competitors during the competition. If it is snowing or blowing hard, a

sufficient number of qualified forerunners and/or course-preparing equipment must be available and utilized in order to

maintain constant conditions. This can also include a cooperation between the organizer and coaches from the

participating schools in order to utilize qualified forerunners. An action plan has to be prepared.

All use of artificial means in order to improve the glide on the snow are forbidden. In special cases, use of chemicals to

preserve a solid surface is allowed.

3. Preparation for Classical Technique

For individual competitions in classical technique a single track should be set along the ideal skiing line of the competition

course. The track is normally set in the middle of the course except through curves. In curves there should only be set

track where the skis can glide unrestrained in the set track. Where the curves are too sharp and the speed is considered

to be too high to stay in the track, the track should be removed. To decide the proper course preparation and track setting,

the best competitors and highest possible speed must be taken into consideration.

In curves, the track is to be set close to the fence to avoid the possibility of skiing between the track and the fence.

The ski tracks must be prepared so that ski control and gliding are possible without a lateral braking effect by any parts of

the bindings. The two tracks should be set 17-30 cm apart, measured from the middle of each track. The depth of the

track should be 2-5 cm, even in hard or frozen snow.

Where two tracks are used, they should be 1.00-1.20 meters apart measured from the middle of each pair of tracks.

The last straight 100 m will be the finish zone. The beginning of this zone must be clearly marked with a colored line. This

zone is normally separated into 3 corridors with set tracks. They must be clearly marked and highly visible but not

interfering with the skis.

4. Preparation for Free Technique

For individual competitions in free technique, the course must be well packed for a width of at least 4 meters. On downhill

sections where the tracks are set they must follow the ideal line of the course.

The last straight 100 m will be the finish zone. The beginning of this zone must be clearly marked with a colored line. This

zone is a minimum of 9 meters wide and is separated into 3 corridors that must be clearly marked and highly visible but

not interfering with the skis.

5. Preparation for Pursuit Competition

For Pursuit competitions the course must be well packed for a width of at least 6 meters. The start area must be

organized using 2-5 start lanes. The width of each lane must be a minimum of 2 meters.

6. Preparation for Mass Start Competitions

The Mass Start should have 100 meters of parallel tracks where the competitors are forbidden to leave their tracks. Then

there will be a zone where the course converges into a course width allowing three competitors to ski side by side without

interference over major parts of the course. There must be no factors along the course that cause congestion.

The marking of the course must be so clear that the competitor is never in doubt where the course goes.

Forks and intersections on the course must be clearly marked by visible signage, and fences must be placed across

unused parts of the course.

On courses up to 15 km one refreshment station must be provided.

Toilets must be installed for competitors near the stadium. They must be easily reached from the stadium.

Notice boards must be used for race information and unofficial results.

[53]

7.10.39 RELAY EXCHANGE ZONE

The relay exchange zone should be a rectangle 30 meters long and sufficiently wide, clearly marked and roped off and located on

flat or smoothly rising ground near to the start and finish.

7.10.40 COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS

There are three main factors to be considered by the jury regarding cold weather safety: the temperature, the duration of the

exposure and the clothing and other protection against cold weather. These factors, together with any other relevant information

such as the wind chill factor, must be taken into consideration when a decision is made regarding cold weather.

Between minus 15 and minus 25 C

If the temperature level is forecast to be between minus 15 and minus 25 C at any point on the course, recommendations regarding

cold weather protection should be made available to the participants. Under such conditions it is the responsibility of the participants

to seek the information and to follow the recommendations given by the organizer.

Minus 25 C and below

If the temperature in a major portion of the course is minus 25 C or below, the competition shall be delayed or cancelled.

Warm Weather Precautions

If the temperature is forecasted to rise above 5 degrees C during the course of the competition and exposure to sunshine is

expected, recommendations must be given to competitors concerning clothing, skin protection and the need to consume adequate

liquid before and during the competition.

7.10.45 STATE MEET CONSIDERATIONS

1. Qualifications for participation in the state meet:

a. Finish the season in good standing as a member of the affiliated school team.

b. Student participants earn 1 point per day for starting a WHSAA regular season race. Students must earn 6

points to qualify for participation at the State meet.

c. Students with extraordinary circumstances such as serious injury may petition the Commissioner for waiver of

the rule.

2. Training Opportunities

3. Timing at State Meet should be a fully automated format.

7.10.46 COMPETITORS DURING THE COMPETITION

Responsibilities

Skiers are expected to race in school approved uniforms in point and qualifying races to reflect the appropriate spirit of competition.

Athletes will be expected to conduct themselves in a sportsmanlike manner.

The competitor is responsible for arriving at the start and starting at the correct time. Competitors must follow the marked course

from start to finish and must pass all controllers and behave in a fair manner towards other competitors. They have to cover the

whole distance on their skis using only their own means of propulsion. Help from pacemakers or pushing is not allowed.

In all competitions poles may be changed. One ski may be changed if the ski or the binding is broken or damaged. The equipment

failure must be proven to the Jury after the competition. Waxing, scraping or cleaning of the competitor's skis during the competition

is forbidden. Exception: in classical technique, competitors may scrape their skis to remove snow and ice, and add wax if necessary.

The competitor must do this outside the track without help from any other people.

A competitor who is overtaken must give way on the first demand, except in sprint competitions and in marked zones. This applies

in classical technique courses even when there are two tracks and in free technique courses when the skier being overtaken may

have to restrict his skating action. When overtaken, competitors must not obstruct each other.

Once the competitors enter a zone where corridors are marked they must remain in their chosen corridor unless they are overtaking

another competitor.

In Pursuit, Mass start and Relay competitions, competitors or teams, who are lapped, have to abandon the competition, but will be

ranked in the results. The competitors must comply with the instructions of competition officials.

7.10.47 OFFICIALS AND OTHERS DURING THE COMPETITION

For order and control on the courses the following principles apply:

1. While giving intermediate times and information to competitors, officials coaches and others are not allowed to run more

than 30 meters beside the competitors

2. While doing this work, officials and others can not obstruct competitors

[54]

Wax testing and warming up on the ski competition course must always be done in the competition course direction. Anyone testing

skis on the competition course must consider the safety of others on the course and the course preparation. Electronic timing

devices used for testing skis will not be allowed on the course during the competition.

7.10.48 MARKING OF SKIS (OPTIONAL AT STATE MEET)

Procedure

For purposes of control, both skis are marked immediately before the start. The competitor must come to the official marking place

in person and in due time wearing his starting bib.

7.10.49 STARTS, TIMING, FINISH & RESULTS

Starts

A competitor who starts late must not interfere with the start of others.

Mass Start Procedure

Starting positions will be determined by a draw. Each school will draw one lane. Skiers must stay in their lane through the end of the

start zone.

Timing

Times will be measured in full tenths of a second. For example, 38:24.38 becomes 38:24.3.

Finish

When using hand timing, the time is taken when the competitor's first foot crosses the finish line.

In case of electronic timing, the time is taken when the contact is broken. The measuring point of the light or photo barrier must be at

a height of 25 cm above the snow surface.

The finish referee is responsible for keeping a list of the order in which the competitors cross the finish line. He/she gives this list to

the chief of timekeeping.

Results

The results are calculated by taking the difference between the finish and start times. If two or more competitors have the same

time, they shall have the same placing on the result list.

The unofficial result list will be distributed and posted on the official notice board as soon as possible after the completion, with the

time of its publication noted. The Jury must deal with any infractions or protests within 30 minutes of the posting of the 2nd race. The

result list becomes official immediately following the Jury's decision.

7.10.49.5 Whenever a school moves into or out of a different classification, the WHSAA Commissioner will adjust the State Site Rotation for

the classifications involved. Should a school request to be added to the rotation, the Commissioner will make a recommendation to

the WHSAA Board as to where the school should be placed in the rotation.

The State Nordic State Site Rotations may be found on the WHSAA web site under “State Events”.

7.10.5 ALPINE SKIING

7.10.50 The WHSAA recognizes one classification in Alpine skiing. Alpine Skiing starts with the first practice on Monday of WHSAA

Calendar Week 21 and ends with the State Meet on Friday and Saturday of WHSAA Calendar Week 35.

7.10.51 Students, while members of the high school ski team, may participate with outside affiliations as long as permission has been given

by the local school district.

7.10.52 Student participants earn 1 point per day for starting a WHSAA regular season race. Students must earn 6 points to qualify for

participation at the State meet. Students with extraordinary circumstances such as serious injury may petition the Commissioner for

waiver of the rule.

7.10.53 REGULATIONS

7.10.54 A Varsity Team may consist of up to five boys and five girls per event. Boys will not compete against girls. Boys and girls Alpine

teams will be scored separately.

7.10.55 A “JV” team may consist of up to five boys and five girls per event.

7.10.56 Each school may enter no more than one varsity and one JV team. Moreover, a contestant can only be entered on one team.

7.10.57 It is recommended that meets consist of two days of racing.

[55]

7.10.58 Each skier is limited to 12 contest days per season. A contest is defined as any competition, school or non-school, that takes place

during the season. Examples are included, but not limited to: USSA Ski Meets. Athletes may compete in up to four additional race

days if they are independent of the high school racing program and require no additional funding from schools. The State Meet shall

not count toward the 12 day contest limit. Each school may host one meet during the competitive season. If a school is unable to

host the meet at their local area due to snow conditions or other extenuating circumstances, that school which is involved can either:

1. trade dates with another school

2. host at another site

3. reschedule the meet

4. cancel the meet as a last option.

In the event the meet is postponed, a first and second make-up date will be built into the schedule and the postponed meet changed

to the first available date. All coaches and athletic directors of the competing schools will be notified at the earliest possible time.

7.10.59 Final team standings will be announced on the basis of combined point totals for each of the following teams:

1. Slalom

2. Giant Slalom

7.10.60 RACE ANNOUNCEMENTS

1. The host team must publish an announcement for their event. The announcement should include: date and place of

competition, names of principal officers, start time, lift ticket price, and fax number or address of entry submission location.

2. Announcements will be handed out at prior meet by host school to all head coaches. A copy will also be faxed or mailed

to competing schools.

3. Announcements for the first meet of the year will be sent out 2 weeks prior to competition; state meet announcement

should also be mailed 2 weeks prior to the state meet by the WHSAA.

7.10.61 COACHES MEETINGS

1. Each head coach or designee will be required to represent their team at all meetings. Meetings will take place each

morning at least one hour before competition begins. If necessary, a meeting may be held upon completion of the race. It

is at these meetings, the Jury, additional course setters, location of scoreboard, DQ board, and place/time of awards

ceremony are to be set or announced.

7.10.62 SCORING

1. Points will be given each place in descending order by giving first place 18 points, second place 17 points, and on down in

descending order to 18th place 1 point.

2. In case of a tie add the points together and divide by the number of tied participants.

7.10.63 SEEDING

1. The order in which racers are listed on the entry form will determine the seed. The host school will receive seeds no later

than 9:00 P.M. on Wednesday preceding the meet. Late entries will run at the end of their field.

2. The first seed start order, male and female, will be drawn randomly for each day. Each consecutive seed will be rotated

appropriately for each of the 4 (2 male, 2 female) races per meet. JV order from each school will coincide with Varsity run

order.

6 TEAM ROTATION

7 TEAM ROTATION

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7

START ORDER

1 2 3 4 5 6

START ORDER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

12 7 8 9 10 11 14 8 9 10 11 12 13

17 18 13 14 15 16 20 21 15 16 17 18 19

22 23 24 19 20 21 26 27 28 22 23 24 25

27 28 29 30 25 26 32 33 34 35 29 30 31

38 39 40 41 42 36 37

7.10.64 POSTING RESULTS

1. It is required that results be posted in the finish area. A speaker system is also recommended.

2. Any disqualifications will be posted on an official scoreboard within 30 minutes after the completion of race class (e.g.,

girls varsity, boys varsity, etc.).

7.10.65 AWARDS

1. Medals will be given to the first 5 varsity racers, girls and boys, in slalom and giant slalom.

2. Ribbons will be given to the first 5 JV racers, girls and boys, in slalom and giant slalom.

3. It is the host schools’ responsibility to provide the awards except for the State Meet.

7.10.66 OFFICIAL SEASON STATISTICS

[56]

1. Statistics will be kept for all events, both individual and team.

2. It is recommended that 2 statisticians (coaches) keep records.

3. It is the responsibility of the host school to forward results to the statistician and to the state media as soon as possible.

Each school is required to forward results to their local media.

7.10.67 THE JURY

1. The following members of the Jury, who are members of the Wyoming Coaches Association or USSCA or certified high

school coaches, are responsible for the technical matters within the closed competition area:

a. Chief of Race

b. Coach Delegate

c. Coach Delegate

2. Duties of the Jury

The Jury monitors the adherence to the rules throughout the entire race.

A meet or race begins with first coaches meeting and ends (if no protest is submitted) at expiration of protest deadline.

The coach and or school sponsor of skier/school involved in protest cannot be on jury. An alternate shall take the place of

the affected coach/ sponsor.

In the decisions of protests, the Chief of Race is the chairman of the jury. He/she will conduct the meeting and the other

two members are voting members. The Chief of Race only votes in the case of a tie.

• Checking the racecourse and the set courses

• Checking the snow conditions

• Checking the preparation of the course

• Approving the use of snow compactors and other chemicals

• Checking the crowd control system

• Checking the start, the finish area and the run-out from the finish

• Checking the first aid service

• Overseeing the work of the course setters

• Checking the gate flags

• Determining the manner of the course inspection

• Inspection of the course before the race

• Changing the start order in consideration of course conditions and in extraordinary conditions

• Giving instructions to and obtaining information from the gate judges

• Granting of re-runs

• Cancellation of the race (beforehand) if snow conditions are unsuitable if the recommendations of the Chief of

Race report have not been carried out

• Shortening the course, if snow or weather conditions make this appear necessary

• Determine how to handle termination of the race by holding coaches meeting

• Report disciplinary problems

• Decisions on protests

• Issue of particular directives throughout the entire event

• In general, the Jury makes decisions on all questions not clarified by the WHSAA Alpine Ski Rules.

3. Jury schedule rotation will be adopted at the coaches spring scheduling and rules meeting following the conclusion of the

season.

a. Laramie ~ Cody, Jackson, Kelly Walsh, Natrona County, Pinedale, Laramie

b. Kelly Walsh ~ Laramie, Pinedale, Jackson, Cody, Natrona County, Kelly Walsh

c. Cody ~ Kelly Walsh, Laramie, Natrona County, Pinedale, Jackson, Cody

d. Natrona County ~ Jackson, Cody, Pinedale, Kelly Walsh, Laramie, Natrona County

e. Pinedale ~ Natrona County, Kelly Walsh, Laramie, Jackson, Cody, Pinedale

f. Jackson ~ Pinedale, Natrona County, Cody, Laramie, Kelly Walsh, Jackson

7.10.68 DISQUALIFICATIONS

1. A competitor is disqualified by the jury if he/she:

a. does not fulfill the eligibility rules of the WHSAA

b. violates any WHSAA alpine ski competition rules

c. acts in an inappropriate manner towards the members of the jury, coaches, or other race officials

1) Inappropriate conduct by a competitor includes, but is not limited to, willful failure to follow the

directions of a meet official, using profanity or any action which could bring discredit to the

individual of his/her school and results in disqualification from that event.

2) Unsportsmanlike conduct is behavior which is unethical or dishonorable. It includes, but is not

limited to, disrespectfully addressing an official, any flagrant behavior, intentional contact, taunting,

criticizing an opponent and other team/school personnel. Results in disqualification from meet.

d. participates in the race under false pretenses

e. does not wear the official bib and number of his/her school or alters said bib in any manner

f. endangers the safety of persons and/or property

g. trains on a course closed for competitors

h. alters the course in any manner

i. acts contrary to the instructions of the jury as to the execution of the training or race

j. fails to cross the gate lines between the poles of the gates with both ski tips and both feet

k. fails to cover the course on skis

[57]

l. accepts outside help of any manner

m. fails to give way to an overtaking competitor at the first call or interferes with his/her run. A competitor who has

been overtaken is disqualified.

7.10.69 RERUNS

1. Prerequisites

A competitor who is obstructed while racing must stop immediately after the incident takes place and apply to any race

jury member or course official for a rerun. The competitor must make his/her way to the finish area along the side of the

course. In special situations (e.g., in case of missing gates or other technical failures), the jury and/or race official may

order a rerun.

2. Grounds for Interference

Grounds for interference may include:

a. blocking of the course by an official, spectator, animal, or other obstruction

b. blocking of the course by a fallen competitor who did not clear the course soon enough

c. objects in the course such as a lost ski pole or ski of previous competitor

d. activities of the first-aid service that obstruct the racer

e. absence of a gate knocked down by a previous competitor and not promptly replaced

f. malfunction of the timing equipment

3. Validity of a rerun

In the case where a jury member or course official is unable to judge the justification for a requested rerun, they may grant

a provisional rerun so as to avoid a delay for the competitor. This rerun will be valid only if it is confirmed by the jury.

If the competitor was already disqualified before the incident entitling him/her to a rerun, the rerun is not valid.

The definitively approved run remains valid even if it proves faster or slower.

If the claim for the rerun is shown to be unjustified, the competitor is disqualified.

4. Start time of a rerun

The competitor should immediately report to the assistant starter and be placed in the start sequence at the earliest

possible time.

7.10.70 PROTESTS

1. Protests are to be submitted to the Jury by the competitor’s high school coach.

2. Protest period will be within 30 minutes after posting of DQ’s.

7.10.71 SETTLEMENT OF PROTEST BY THE JURY

1. The Jury meets to deal with protests at predetermined place and time.

2. In dealing with protests against disqualification, the gate judge, and if needed, the gate judge of the adjacent gate

combinations or other involved officials, the racer in question, and the protesting coach shall be invited to attend.

3. In addition, any other requested or offered evidence, such as videotape, photos, films, etc., should be checked.

4. At the vote on protest, only the Jury members are to be present. The Chief of Race chairs the proceeding. Protest forms

are to be signed by all voting members of the Jury. The decision requires a majority of all voting members of the Jury, not

just of those present. In the case of a tie, the Chief of Race’s vote is decisive.

5. The decision of the Jury will be final.

6. There will be no further appeal.

7.10.72 ALPINE RACE CRITERIA

1. TIMING

a. Functional electronic timing will be used as primary timing device.

b. Hand times must be used as back up timing.

c. All time will be recorded in seconds out to the hundredth.

2. EVENT SAFETY

a. Adequate radio coverage is required for safety.

b. Proper fencing and safety precautions should be taken to protect athletes. Any coach should make

suggestions to Chief of Race for any safety issues.

c. Replacement gates will be inserted into snow panel first.

d. Skiers along course should be stopped while a racer is in his/her proximity.

3. COMPETITOR RESPONSIBILITY

a. Functional ski brakes are required for competition.

b. Helmets manufactured for ski racing are required for all competitors in WHSAA events.

c. Goggles are required for competition.

[58]

d. Competitors who do not attend the State Meet awards ceremony without a valid excuse lose their claim to

any award.

e. Should be familiar with all WHSAA rules.

f. Must be at the start prior to competitors seeded position, or, athlete will run at end of field.

4. BIBS

a. Bibs will be assigned to each competing school for the entire season as follows:

b. Girls – Odd Numbers

c. Boys – Even Numbers

School

Varsity #s

JV #s

Cody

1 - 10

126 – 135

Jackson

11 – 20

116 – 125

Kelly Walsh

21 – 30

136 – 145

Laramie

31 – 40

106 – 115

Natrona Co

41 – 50

96 – 105

Pinedale

51 – 60

86 – 95

Powell

61 – 70

76 – 85

Available Team

71 – 75

146 & UP

7.10.73 COMPETITION

1. RACE VENUES

a. While some areas have better terrain for certain disciplines, all race venues can be used as needed for either

discipline.

b. The recommended site(s) for hosting the State Championship meet should be legally homologated slalom

and giant slalom hills with man-made snow on their race lanes. The WHSAA Board is responsible for

selecting the site(s).

2. EVENT ORDER

a. Girls Varsity will run first each day followed by the boys field. JV girls will run before JV boys field.

b. In the second run of each race the ten fastest varsity finishers from the first run will start in reverse order of

finish with the remainder of the varsity fields starting in order of their finish.

c. All DNF’s, DQ’s, and DNS’s will run at the end of the extra field if time allows. Their start order will be

determined by first come basis.

d. Start times will be 10:00 A.M. unless otherwise indicated.

3. FORERUNNERS

a. A maximum of 4 forerunners will be used before each varsity field.

b. Coaches and seeded competitors cannot forerun.

c. Must be of appropriate skiing competency.

d. Host team will select forerunners.

e. If possible, forerunners should start approximately 5-10 minutes before scheduled start time.

f. Forerunners times should be published.

4. START CADENCE

a. The start cadence will be as follows:

Racer 10 seconds…

Ready…

HUP! (when racer opens start wand).

b. The racer may leave the start any time during the “ready” command.

c. In the event the athlete leaves the start before the “ready” command is given a false start has occurred.

d. In the case of a false start one restart will be granted, provided the competitor has not passed the second

gate.

5. EQUIPMENT FAILURE AND LOSS

a. Any skier with equipment failure or loss in the starting gate will be granted a restart provided he/she has not

passed through the second gate.

b. Loss of a ski will result in immediate disqualification for both slalom and giant slalom, with the exception of

the last two gates, which may be finished on one ski, or with both feet in case of a fall in the immediate finish

area.

7.10.74 COURSES

1. SLALOM

COURSE SETTINGS

Vertical drops should be between 100 meters and 200 meters.

GATES

Single pole slalom must be used. Single pole slalom has no outside pole, except for the first and the last

gate, a delay gate and combinations (hairpin, vertical). Where there is not outside pole, both feet and ski

tips must have passed the turning pole on the same side, following the natural race line of the slalom. The

natural race line is an imaginary line from turning pole to turning pole, which the racer has to cross. If the

racer has not correctly passed the natural race line, then he/she has to climb back up and pass around the

missed turning pole.

[59]

Consecutive gates must alternate in color (red and blue).

Maximum distance between turning gates: 12m

Recommended distance between turning gates: 8.5 – 10.5m

Recommended distance between poles in combinations: 4.5 – 6m

Recommended course length: 40 – 60 direction changes

COURSE:

The ideal slalom course must include a series of turns designed to allow the competitors to combine speed

with neat execution and precision of turns.

The slalom course should permit the rapid completion of all turns. The course should not require

acrobatics incompatible with normal ski technique. It should be a technically clever composition of figures

suited to the terrain, linked by single and multiple gates, allowing a fluent run, but testing the widest variety

of ski techniques, including changes of direction with very different radii.

Gates should never be set only down the fall line, but so that some full turns are required, interspersed

with traverses.

PREPARATION OF THE COURSE:

Slalom competitions must be raced on a slope that is as hard as possible.

WIDTH

The course should normally be 40 meters wide if two runs are set on the same terrain.

NUMBER OF GATES AND COMBINATIONS OF GATES:

Slalom must contain horizontal (open) and vertical (closed) gates as well as vertical combinations

consisting of three to four gates and at least two hairpin combinations.

SETTING

In setting a slalom, the following principles should be observed:

• Avoid monotonous series of standardized combinations of gates

• Gates that impose too sudden, sharp braking should be avoided, as they spoil the fluency of the run

without increasing the difficulty a modern slalom should have

• Before difficult combinations of gates, it is advisable to set at least one gate which allows the

competitor to ski through the difficult combination under control

• It is not advisable to set difficult figures, either right at the beginning or end of the course. The last

gates should be rather fast, so that the competitor passes the finish at a good speed

• The last gate should not be too close to the finish. It should direct competitors toward the middle part

of the finish.

2. GIANT SLALOM

COURSE SETTINGS

Vertical drop should be between 200 meters and 450 meters.

GATES

A giant slalom gate consists of 1 single GS gate/panel.

The banners are to be approximately 75 cm wide and 50 cm high. They are fastened between the poles so

that the lower edge of the flag is approximately 1 meter above the snow and must be capable of tearing or

breaking away from the pole.

Single Gate Giant Slalom must be used. Single gate giant slalom has no outside gate, except for the first

and the last gate, and delayed gates. Where there is no outside gate, both feet and ski tips must have

passed the turning pole of the turning gate on the same side, following the natural race line of the Giant

Slalom. The natural race line is an imaginary line from turning pole to turning pole, which the racer has to

cross. If the racer has not correctly passed the natural race line, then he/she has to climb back up and

pass around the missed turning pole.

Consecutive gates must alternate in color (red and blue)

Maximum distance between turning gates: 30m

Recommended distance between turning gates: 22 – 26m

Recommended course length: 30 – 40 direction changes

The giant slalom should be set so that the number of gates is equal to 11-15% of the vertical drop in

meters. A slope of 300 meters should have from 36 to 45 gates.

COURSE

The terrain should preferably be undulating and hilly. The course should normally have a width of

approximately 30 meters.

SETTING

In setting a giant slalom, the following principles should be observed:

[60]

• Both runs can be set on the same course, but the second run must be re-set

• The skillful use of the ground when setting a giant slalom is, in most cases, even more important than

for slalom, since combinations play a less important role owing to the prescribed width of the gates

and the greater distances between them. Therefore, it is better to set mainly single gates, while

exploiting the ground to the utmost. Combinations can be set, but mainly on uninteresting terrain

• A giant slalom consists of a variety of long, medium and small turns. The competitor should be free to

choose his own line between the gates. The full width of a hill should be used whenever possible.

3. USE OF SLALOM POLES

a. All poles used in the alpine disciplines are described as slalom poles and are subdivided into rigid poles (bamboo or

polycarbonates) and polycarbonate (plastic) flex poles.

b. A slalom gate consists of two slalom poles, flex poles must be used for turning gates, flex poles are suggested to be

used for target gates, rigid (bamboo or polycarbonate) poles may be used.

c. A giant slalom gate consists of 4 slalom poles and 2 flags, 2 flex poles may be used for the turning gates, but a flex

and a fixed polycarbonate pole combination is acceptable. Flex poles are suggested for the target gates, rigid

(bamboo) poles may be used.

d. Dye, chalk, or other marking substance will be used to give visible reference of a gate in snow, due to gate loss or

breakage.

4. COURSE SETTERS

a. All courses must be set by a USSCA certified course setter or certified high school coaches and accepted by the

jury.

b. It is required, that a host school coach will set only one course per day. It is necessary that other qualified setters are

utilized to vary setting styles and challenge multiple skier abilities.

5. INSPECTION OF COURSES

a. Competitors are allowed to study the course after its final setting, either by climbing on skis or by slowly skiing down

alongside of the course. The Jury decides the method of inspection. Skiing through a gate or practicing turns parallel

with the course may result in disqualification. Linking two or more turns within the race arena will result in

disqualification.

b. Competitors must visibly carry their start bibs.

c. Competitors will be given one hour for inspection of courses which may be cut to no less than 30 minutes upon jury

approval.

7.10.75 PASSAGE OF GATES; CORRECT PASSAGE:

A gate has been passed correctly when both the competitor’s ski tips and boots have passed across the gate line. If a competitor

loses a ski without committing a fault within two gates of the finish, the tip of the remaining ski and both boots must have passed the

gate line. This rule is also valid when a competitor has to climb back up to a gate.

The gate line in slalom and giant slalom is the imaginary shortest line between the turning gate and the outside gate.

In the event that competitor removes a pole from its vertical position before both the competitor's ski tips and boots have passed the

gate line, the ski tips and boots must still pass the original gate line (marking in the snow).

Once a competitor crosses the finish line in any manner the run is finished.

7.10.76 STATE MEET REGULATIONS

a. No JV competition at State Meet.

b. 6 entries from each school (girls and boys), plus 1 alternate per gender.

c. The host school will determine the number of extras to be run.

d. The top 5 skiers from each school will be scored for team points.

e. Places of all individuals of a team over the maximum of 5 shall be disregarded.

f. Boys and Girls State Team Champions will be determined as a result of the points accumulated during the State Meet.

g. It is recommended that a Technical Delegate be used at the State Meet.

7.11.0 SOCCER

7.11.0 The WHSAA recognizes two classifications in soccer. The schools with enrollments of 700 and above shall be 4A, schools with

enrollments from 699 and below will be 3A.

7.11.2 Soccer matches may be played on a regulation football field.

7.11.25 The soccer season begins with the first allowable practice on Monday of WHSAA calendar week 36. The first allowable contest date

is on Thursday of calendar week 37. The WHSAA State Tournament will be Thursday, Friday and Saturday of WHSAA week 46.

7.11.3 Soccer Team and participant limitations:

Teams shall be limited to fourteen regular season contests. A 160 minute jamboree shall count as two contests and regular matches

involving two teams shall count as one. Participation in regular season tournaments shall count as two contests. Each member

school should be limited to one regular season tournament. A player may not participate in more than three halves per day.

Exception: When two contests at the same level are scheduled in one day, then four halves are permitted. Overtimes are

considered part of the second half. Entering a contest for one live ball period counts as a half of participation. As per WHSAA rule

1.4.2, the contest in which a participant exceeds the limitation shall be forfeited.

[61]

7.11.31 Soccer Showcase

A player may participate in a college showcase tournament during the first week of practice (week 36). If a player participates in the

showcase, those days will not count toward the 9-day practice rule. This is the only time during the soccer season that a college

showcase will be allowed. Attendance at any other showcase during the soccer season will be in violation of Rule 5.8.0 and the

player will become immediately ineligible.

7.11.35 Soccer Jamboree

Soccer teams are allowed to participate in a soccer jamboree with a limit of 160 minutes of playing time during the jamboree for

each team. A jamboree counts as two contests towards the fourteen game limit.

7.11.36 Scoreboard Clock

Soccer will utilize a scoreboard clock on-site when available. The official time for all varsity soccer matches will be kept on the

clock. Schools should have a clock operator trained on NFHS Soccer signals for stopping/starting the clock.

7.11.40 Regular Season Overtime Procedures

4A Procedure

When a regular season game ends in regulation with a tied score, that shall be the end of the contest. It does not matter if the game

is a conference game or non-conference game. Points will be awarded according to 7.11.42 to seed the Regional Tournament.

3A Procedure

1. A representative from the coaching staff of each team, officials and team captains shall assemble at the halfway line to

review the procedure as outlined below:

a. The head referee shall choose the goal at which all of the kicks from the penalty line shall be taken.

b. Each coach will select and identify to the officials any five players, including the goalkeeper, on or off the field

(except those who may have been disqualified) to take the kicks.

c. A coin toss shall be held as in Rule 5-2-2 (e). The team winning the toss shall have the choice of kicking first or

second.

d. Teams will alternate kickers. There is no follow-up on the kick.

e. The defending team may change the goalkeeper prior to each penalty kick.

f. Following five kicks for each team, the team scoring on the greatest number of these kicks shall be declared the

winner.

g. Add one goal to the winning team score and credit the team with a victory.

2. If the score remains tied after each team has had five kicks:

a. Each coach will select five different players than the first five who already kicked to take the kicks in a sudden

victory situation, wherein, if one team scores and the other team does not score, the game is ended without

more kicks being taken.

b. If the score remains tied, continue the sudden victory kicks with the coach selecting any five players other than

the previous five to take the next set of alternating kicks. If a tie still remains, repeat 3-a.

3. This would eliminate ties during the regular season. The winning team would get three points for the win and the losing

team will get 1 point for tying in regular time.

7.11.41 The official WHSAA tournament ball will be provided by Baden.

7.11.41.5 WHSAA Regional/State Soccer Tie Game Procedure

When the score is tied at the end of the regulation time, the referee will instruct both teams to return to their respective team boxes.

There will be five minutes during which both teams may confer with their coaches. The head referee will instruct both teams as to

proper procedure:

1. There shall be two full ten-minute overtime periods (note - not sudden victory):

a. A coin toss shall be held as in Rule 5.2.2 (e).

b. At the end of the first ten-minute overtime period, teams shall change ends.

2. If the score still remains tied, a representative from the coaching staff of each team, officials and team captains shall

assemble at the halfway line to review the procedure as outlined below:

a. The head referee shall choose the goal at which all of the kicks from the penalty line shall be taken.

b. Each coach will select and identify to the officials any five players, including the goalkeeper, on or off the field

(except those who may have been disqualified) to take the kicks.

c. A coin toss shall be held as in Rule 5-2-2 (e). The team winning the toss shall have the choice of kicking first or

second.

d. Teams will alternate kickers. There is no follow-up on the kick.

e. The defending team may change the goal keeper prior to each penalty kick.

f. Following five kicks for each team, the team scoring on the greatest number of these kicks shall be declared the

winner.

g. Add one goal to the winning team score and credit the team with a victory. An asterisk (*) may be placed by the

team advancing to indicate the advancement was the result of a tie breaker system.

3. If the score remains tied after each team has had five kicks:

a. Each coach will select five different players than the first five who already kicked to take the kicks in a sudden

victory situation, wherein, if one team scores and the other team does not score, the game is ended without

more kicks being taken.

b. If the score remains tied, continue the sudden victory kicks with the coach selecting any five players other than

the previous five to take the next set of alternating kicks. If a tie still remains, repeat 3-a.

[62]

7.11.42 Conference Standings

The following criteria will be used to determine conference standings:

a. 3 points will be given for each win, 1 point for each tie, and 0 points for each loss in division play.

b. If two teams tie, the team with the better head to head record is declared the winner. If a tie still exists, compare the records of

the tied teams against the record of the highest ranking non-tied division team. Continue through the Division Standings until

the tie is broken. If a tie still exists, compare the tied teams records against non-division opponents. This criteria is to be used

only if the site of the competition was at home for all the tied teams or at the common opponent’s home site for all tied teams. If

a tie still exists, the team with the fewest goals allowed during divisional play will gain the advantage. Should the tie remain

after this consideration, the WHSAA Commissioner will flip a coin.

c. If three teams tie in the league standings and one did not lose to the other two teams, it would be given the advantage. If one

team lost to both of the other teams involved, it would lose the advantage. At this point, apply the tie breaking procedures

outlined in ‘b’ above.

d. If any other multiple tie exists, the WHSAA Commissioner will resolve the conflict.

7.11.44 Non-Conference Schedule

Teams are free to schedule non-conference games and jamborees up to a limit of fourteen contests including conference matches.

Scheduling, especially non-conference events, is accomplished at the November WHSAA Scheduling Meeting and would be

finalized upon the approval of all soccer schools.

7.11.45 Roster Limits

No more than twenty-two (22) players can be in uniform for any post season tournament contest. The twenty-two players whose

names are entered on the official scorebook/roster for the first tournament contest, shall be the only players used for the entire

tournament. Violation of this provision shall cause forfeiture as per WHSAA Rules 5.0.7 and 1.4.0 (Refer to Rule 7.3.0 for definition

of a contest).

7.11.46 STATE MEET

7.11.5 SOFTBALL

7.11.50 The WHSAA recognizes one classification in Softball.

7.11.51 The softball season begins with the first allowable practice on Monday of WHSAA calendar week 36. The first allowable contest will

on Thursday of calendar week 37. The softball season will end with the State Tournament on calendar week 46.

7.11.52 Teams are limited to 26 games, exclusive of the State Tournament. Teams would be allowed to participate in one tournament, which

shall count as two contests toward the maximum limit. This limit shall apply to all squads.

During the season a team may play no more than 3 games a day.

7.11.53 No game shall be played except those scheduled by and entirely under the control of the competing schools or the WHSAA.

7.11.54 The starting pitcher in a varsity game may not pitch in a JV contest on the same day unless there is an injury or extenuating

circumstances. The Commissioner or designee are the only ones who can approve a waiver to this rule.

7.11.55 The playing rules as authorized and published by the National Federation of State High School Associations for the current year

shall be followed for all games. By NFHS rule, the WHSAA will follow the following modifications:

1. Protective Mask: On defense, the positions of pitcher, third (3rd) base and first (1st) base must wear a protective mask.

The mask must be unadorned and a single solid color (excluding padding).

[63]

2. Length of Game: All varsity games shall be seven inning games except for the 10-run rule. A game shall end any time

after the fifth inning when a team is 10 or more runs behind and has completed its turn at bat.

Games may also be terminated by mutual agreement of both coaches at any time during a contest and acknowledged by

the umpire-in-chief under the following conditions:

a. When a team is ahead by 15 runs after three innings of play.

b. When a game exceeds the time limit of 1 ½ hours.

3. Called Game: If weather or darkness causes a tied game to be called, such game shall be considered a suspended

game and shall be continued from the point of suspension at a later time.

a. If a game is called before five full innings have been played and the score is not tied, such game shall also be

considered a suspended game, unless the home team has scored the greater number of runs in four or four-

and-a-fraction turns at bat than the visiting team has scored in five turns at bat, in which case it is a regulation

game.

4. Ball: A 12” ball shall be used. The yellow optic ball may be used for league play. WHSAA tournament softballs will be

provided by Baden.

5. Tie-Break Procedure: Beginning in the top of the eighth inning or upon reaching the predetermined time limit, the last

batter from the previous inning will be placed on second base at the beginning of each half inning with the game then

proceeding in a normal manner until a winner is decided.

7.11.56 WHSAA registered umpires must be used for all interscholastic contests. At least two umpires must be used for all games.

7.11.57.0 STATE TOURNAMENT

7.11.57.1 No more than eighteen players can be in uniform for any state tournament contest. The eighteen players whose names are entered

in the official scorebook for the first tournament contest, shall be the only players used for the entire tournament. Violation of this

provision shall cause forfeiture as per WHSAA rules 5.0.7 and 1.4.0 (Refer to Rule 7.3.0 for definition of a contest).

7.11.57.2 At the State Tournament, the home team for round one games shall be the higher seed and placed on the top of the bracket. In

subsequent rounds, the home team shall be the higher seed. If both seeds are the same, the seed will be determined by a coin flip.

The home team dugout shall be on the first base side.

7.11.57.3 When the State Tournament facility’s fences do not meet the NFHS standard distance for the home run fence, a fence shall be

installed at 210’, if possible.

7.11.57.4 The State Tournament will be a double elimination format. Game times will be determined by the WHSAA and tournament director.

7.11.57.5 State Tournament games suspended because of weather and/or darkness will be resumed from the point of interruption and 7

innings completed unless the 10-run rule is reached.

7.11.57.6 Inclement weather procedure for State Tournament. In the event the State Tournament cannot take place in its scheduled format,

the following procedure will be used:

1. The WHSAA representative and tournament director will evaluate all possible modifications.

2. Games will be shortened to 5 innings until original game schedule can be resumed.

3. All games on the consolation side of the bracket will be cancelled. Championship semifinal games will be 5 innings.

4. The length of championship games will be determined by the tournament director and the WHSAA.

5. If more than 4 teams remain in the tournament, and it is not possible to get the games in, the tournament may be

cancelled.

[64]

7.12.0 SWIMMING AND DIVING

7.12.1 The WHSAA recognizes two classifications in swimming. The schools with the twelve largest enrollments shall be 4A, the remaining

schools shall be 3A.

7.12.2 Only WSOA/WHSAA registered officials may be used on the deck.

7.12.3 The girls swimming and diving season begins with the first allowable practice on Monday of WHSAA calendar week 7. The first

allowable contest date is on Thursday of calendar week 8. Each swimmer and/or diver is limited to 18 contest days per season. A

contest is defined as any competition, school or non-school, that takes place during the season. Examples are included, but not

limited to: USA Swim Meets. The State Meet shall not count toward the 18 day contest limit. The swimming and diving season will

end with the State Meet on Saturday of week 18.

The boys swimming and diving season begins with the first allowable practice on Monday of WHSAA calendar week 22. The first

allowable contest date is on Thursday of calendar week 23. Each swimmer and/or diver is limited to 18 contest days per season. A

contest is defined as any competition, school or non-school, that takes place during the season. Examples are included, but not

limited to: USA Swim Meets. The State Meet shall not count toward the 18 day contest limit. The swimming and diving season will

end with the State Meet on Saturday of week 33.

7.12.4 Telephone swim meets and intrasquad meets are not allowed as a means of qualifying for the state swim meet.

7.12.5 Swimmers swimming the first leg of the 200 Freestyle Relay are eligible to qualify for the 50 Freestyle. Swimmers swimming the first

leg of the 400 Freestyle Relay are eligible to qualify for the 100 Freestyle. The lead off swimmer of each relay must be listed first on

the relay card.

7.12.60 Exhibition swimmers will be permitted to swim and qualify for the state meet provided they meet all WHSAA eligibility and rule

requirements.

7.12.61 The WHSAA allows participation in swimming during the school year if such participation is in authorized AAU programs, cultural

exchange programs, or other programs sanctioned by the Activities Association.

7.12.70 STATE MEET

7.12.71 All Schools that compete in swimming and diving are eligible for the State Meet. An accurate and complete record of meet results

must be retained, as season times will be used in assigning heats and lanes at the State Meet.

7.12.72 Before individuals may compete in individual swimming or diving events at the state swimming meet, they must have qualified

during the season. There is no qualifying time for relays.

[65]

7.12.73 Each school may enter only four athletes in each event and no more than one team in each relay. The only way a school may enter

more than four athletes in an event is if all athletes have met the qualifying standard in that event. All athletes are eligible to advance

and place in the consolation or championship finals in swimming and the final 12 in diving. Only four athletes from each school may

score per event.

7.12.74 The contestant may enter four events, two of which must be a relay.

7.12.75 Schools may enter their relay teams without individual names. It shall not count as an entry unless the competitor actually competes

in the event. Any individual listed on the team's entry sheet may swim in the prelims, swim offs and/or finals provided he/she does

not exceed the permitted number of events.

7.12.80 In the state meet the list and order of events will be as follows:

1. 200 Medley Relay 7. 100 Freestyle

2. 200 Freestyle 8. 500 Freestyle

3. 200 Individual Medley 9. 200 Freestyle Relay

4. 50 Freestyle 10. 100 Backstroke

5. One Meter Diving 11. 100 Breaststroke

6. 100 Butterfly 12. 400 Freestyle Relay

7.12.81 QUALIFICATIONS FOR THE FINALS

The six fastest swimmers in the preliminaries shall qualify for the finals. The next six fastest swimmers shall qualify for the

consolation finals.

7.12.82 POINT SCORING

Twelve places will score at the state meet. The scoring of place values shall be as follows:

RELAYS: 32-26-24-22-20-18-14-10-8-6-4-2

ALL OTHER EVENTS: 16-13-12-11-10-9-7-5-4-3-2-1

7.13.0 TENNIS

7.13.1 The WHSAA recognizes one classification in tennis. The tennis season begins with the first allowable practice on Monday of

WHSAA calendar week 6. The first allowable contest date is on Saturday of calendar week 6. Each tennis player is limited to 10

contest days per season (fall and spring). A contest is defined as any competition, school or non-school, that takes place during the

season. Examples are included, but not limited to: USTA Tournaments. The Regional and State Tournaments shall not count toward

the 10 day contest limit. The tennis season will end with the State Tournament on Saturday of week 12.

7.13.2 Dual tennis matches should be played with two singles and three doubles teams. No player will be able to participate in both.

7.13.11 Member schools may participate in one-day tennis matches throughout the Spring season. One two-day culminating event is

allowed during the Spring season. The Spring tennis season begins on week 39 and ends on week 46. The 10-day contest limit

applies to the spring season as well.

7.13.2 The following format will be used throughout the season for all varsity tennis matches. No player will be able to participate in both

singles and doubles.

Boys #1 singles Girls #1 singles

Boys #2 singles Girls #2 singles

Boys #1 doubles Girls #1 doubles

Boys #2 doubles Girls #2 doubles

Boys #3 doubles Girls #3 doubles.

7.13.21 The coach shall play the best tennis player on the team at the number one singles position. The coach then has the option of

placing, at the number two singles and number one doubles positions, the next best three tennis players. The coach will then fill in

the two and three doubles positions with the remaining four players according to the player’s ability. Best tennis player’s rankings

will be determined by inter squad match play.

7.13.3 Students, while members of the high school tennis team, may participate with an outside affiliation as long as permission has been

given by the local school district.

7.13.15 Member schools may participate in one-day tennis matches throughout the Spring season. One two-day culminating event is

allowed during the Spring season. The Spring tennis season begins on week 39 and ends on week 46.

7.13.31 Substitutions: During season play, direct substitution may be allowed by a lesser ranked player if the original player becomes

unavailable.

7.13.32 Tennis etiquette: In order to encourage better sportsmanship, tennis etiquette will be strictly enforced. Improper language or other

acts that detract from the game of tennis will be dealt with by the two coaches or the tournament directors. Disciplinary action could

result in forfeiture of a game, set, match, or ejection.

7.13.32.1 Proper tennis attire, which exclude jeans, cut-off jeans, and the like is mandatory. Team shirts will be worn that are appropriate as a

member of a school team uniform. In doubles, uniform tops must match for both players.

[66]

7.13.33 During the regular season, coaches can coach between points and any breaks of play so long as the coaching does not interfere

with play. Coaches comments can only be directed at their players and not at the opposing player when the coach is on the same

end as their player. Also, coaching by the coach or designee may take place during the changeovers, not to exceed the 90 second

limit. Coaching may also take place before the match or within the ten (10) minutes between the second and third set of split sets.

Coaches are reminded that they are responsible for their team's actions on and around the court and the actions of any spectators

from their respective schools. Do not intentionally interrupt concentration or play in any way.

During Regional and State Tournaments, coaches can only coach before the match and at the end of each set (up to one minute at

the end of set 1, and up to 10 minutes at the end of set 2, if split set). Players may receive coaching from their coaches and/or

teammates with the number of persons coaching limited to two per visit.

7.13.34 Maximum time for rest between split sets is ten (10) minutes.

7.13.35 Warm-up time for the start of a match will be ten (10) minutes from the time the match director presents the players with the new

balls.

7.13.36 The winner of a match must win two (2) out of the three (3) sets. Sets that are tied at 6-6 will employ a twelve (12) point tiebreaker.

7.13.37 In the event of inclement weather or limited time factor, competing teams may shorten the matches by mutual agreement with the

following options:

1. No-ad Scoring

2. Play one Pro-set

3. Play one Pro-Set No-ad Scoring

4. First one to win eight (8) or ten (10) games

5. A twelve (12) point tiebreaker will be used if necessary.

7.13.4 REGIONAL TENNIS TOURNAMENTS

Two regional tennis tournaments will be held with teams assigned as listed below. All entries in the regional tennis tournament will

advance to the State Meet unless otherwise disqualified.

NORTH

SOUTH

Campbell County

Natrona County

Cheyenne Central

Laramie

Cody

Powell

Cheyenne East

Rawlins

Jackson

Sheridan

Cheyenne South

Rock Springs

Kelly Walsh

Thunder Basin

Green River

Torrington

In the event both Regional Tennis Tournaments are cancelled due to weather or other concerns, the State Tennis Tournament will

use the seeds from the Conference results and seed accordingly. 1 vs. 8, 2 vs. 7, 3 vs. 6, 4 vs. 5, matching North opponents vs.

South opponents to the extent possible during the first round in each division. If one Regional is completed and the other is not, then

the Regional Tournament placing will be used for seeding from the completed tournament and the Regional that was not played will

use their Conference results for seeding into the State Tournament. All other players will be drawn in according to 7.13.51.

7.13.41 REGIONAL SCORING

Place #1 Singles

#1 Doubles

#2 Singles

#2 Doubles #3 Doubles

First

Second

Third

Fourth

Fifth & Sixth

Seventh & Eighth

7.13.42 BRACKET (see page 43)

7.13.43 RATING SHEET

Each school will submit their school conference record for each bracket to the tournament director by the due date prior to the

Regional Tournament.

7.13.44 SEEDING

All schools will be seeded in each bracket. Priority will be given to those schools who have won the most league matches in that

bracket. If a tie occurs, the tournament director will use the following tie breaking criteria:

1. Head to head competition on a two way tie.

2. One school beating others on a three way tie and then head to head competition between other two.

3. If the tie still exists or cannot be decided with the criteria above, the USTA Friend at Court Handbook of Rules and

Regulations, tie breaker procedure will be used to determine the outcome. USTA Regulations ll.b.6(c).

4. Coin flip, odd school receives lowest seed and then head to head with others.

7.13.45 DRAW FOR BYES

If there is one bye, the #1 seed shall have the option of accepting the bye or passing it to the #2 seed. If there is more than one bye,

the #1 seed will receive the first bye, the #2 seed will receive the second bye, etc. until all byes are placed.

[67]

7.13.46 SEEDING PLACEMENT

The number one and four seeds will always be in the same half of the bracket. The number two and three seeds will always be in

the same half of the bracket.

7.13.47 The regional tennis balls shall be provided by WHSAA.

7.13.48 ALTERNATES DURING REGIONAL TENNIS TOURNAMENT PLAY

If a player is unable to participate in Regional Tournament play, it will be possible to substitute the alternate listed on the WHSAA

Tennis Entry Form during tournament play under the following criteria:

1. The match being played would be defaulted if play had begun

2. The alternate would remain in the substituted spot throughout the remainder of that tournament

7.13.5 STATE MEET

7.13.51 SEEDING

The top four finishers from each region will be seeded as per 7.13.53 brackets. Those participants who finish at the seventh/eighth

position in their division at the Regional Tennis Tournament will be drawn in to play the first or second seed in their division in the

first round at the State Tennis Tournament, matching North opponents vs. South opponents to the extent possible. Those

participants who finish at the fifth/sixth position in their division at the Regional Tennis Tournament will be drawn in to play the third

or fourth seed in their division in the first round at the State Tennis Tournament, matching North opponents vs. South opponents to

the extent possible.

Players are required to play the same position at the State Tournament as they did at the Regional Tournament.

Byes will be placed in the following manner:

First bye will be placed on the top of the bottom bracket pairing.

Second bye will be placed on the bottom of the top bracket pairing.

Third bye will be placed on the top of the next to the bottom bracket pairing.

Fourth bye will be placed on the bottom of the next to the top bracket pairing.

In the event both Regional Tennis Tournaments are cancelled due to weather or other concerns, the State Tennis Tournament will

use the seeds from the Conference results and seed accordingly. 1 vs. 8, 2 vs. 7, 3 vs. 6, 4 vs. 5, matching North opponents vs.

South opponents to the extent possible during the first round in each division. If one Regional is completed and the other is not, then

the Regional Tournament placing will be used for seeding from the completed tournament and the Regional that was not played will

use their Conference results for seeding into the State Tournament. All other players will be drawn in according to 7.13.51,

paragraph 1.

7.13.52 STATE SCORING

Place #1 Singles

#1 Doubles

#2 Singles

#2 Doubles #3 Doubles

First

Second

Third

Fourth

Fifth & Sixth

Seventh & Eighth

Ninth thru Twelfth

7.13.53 BRACKETS (See Pages 68-69)

7.13.54 The state tennis balls shall be provided by WHSAA.

7.13.55 At the Regional and State Tennis Tournaments, the tournament director/WHSAA representative will make the determination in case

of inclement weather and/or limited time factor when to shorten play. The criteria from rule 7.13.37 will be used.

7.13.56 ALTERNATES DURING STATE TENNIS TOURNAMENT PLAY

If a player is unable to participate in State tournament play, it will be possible to substitute the alternate listed on the WHSAA Tennis

Entry Form during tournament play under the following criteria:

1. The match being played would be defaulted if play had begun

2. The alternate would remain in the substituted spot throughout the remainder of that tournament

3. The original player would be allowed to replace their alternate from the Regional Tournament and participate at the State

Tournament in the same position. The alternate would only be able to participate at the State Tournament in the same

position they participated in at the Regional Tournament.

4. The alternate names on the entry form may be changed for the State Tournament from what was submitted for the

Regional Tournament.

[68]

STATE HIGH SCHOOL TENNIS TOURNAMENT

#1 SINGLES BRACKET

CONSOLATION

#1 SINGLES BRACKET

STATE HIGH SCHOOL TENNIS TOURNAMENT

#2 SINGLES AND #1 DOUBLES BRACKET

CONSOLATION

#2 SINGLES AND #1 DOUBLES BRACKET

[69]

STATE HIGH SCHOOL TENNIS TOURNAMENT

#2 DOUBLES BRACKET

CONSOLATION

#2 DOUBLES BRACKET

STATE HIGH SCHOOL TENNIS TOURNAMENT

#3 DOUBLES BRACKET

CONSOLATION

#3 DOUBLES BRACKET

7.14.0 TRACK

7.14.1 The WHSAA recognizes four classifications in track. The schools with the enrollments of 700 and above shall be 4A, schools with

enrollments from 210-699 shall be 3A, schools with enrollments from 110-209 shall be 2A, and schools with enrollments of 109 and

below shall be 1A.

7.14.20 CALENDAR

[70]

The Track season begins with a first allowable practice date on the Monday of WHSAA calendar week 36. The first allowable

contest date is on Thursday of calendar week 37. Each track athlete is limited to 10 meets per season. A meet is defined as any

competition, school or non-school, that takes place during the season, between two or more schools. Examples are included, but

not limited to: running unattached or in a USTAF Meet. The Regional and State Meet shall not count toward the 10 day contest limit.

The WHSAA State Track Meet is on the Thursday, Friday and Saturday of week 46.

7.14.40 TRACK AND FIELD EVENTS - BOYS

100, 200 and 400 Meter Dashes

800, 1600 and 3200 Meter Runs

110 Meter High Hurdles

300 Meter Intermediate Hurdles

400, 1600, 3200 Meter Relays

1600 Medley Relay (200, 200, 400, 800)

Discus, High Jump, Long Jump, Pole Vault, Shot Put, Triple Jump

7.14.41 TRACK AND FIELD EVENTS - GIRLS

100, 200 and 400 Meter Dashes

800, 1600 and 3200 Meter Runs

100 Meter Intermediate Hurdles

300 Meter Low Hurdles

400, 1600 and 3200 Meter Relays

1600 Medley Relay (200, 200, 400, 800)

Discus, High Jump, Long Jump, Shot Put, Triple Jump, Pole Vault.

7.14.42 FIELD EVENTS AT STATE QUALIFYING MEETS IN WYOMING AND THE STATE TRACK MEET, SHOULD BE CONTESTED IN

THE FOLLOWING MANNER:

DISCUS AND SHOT PUT

1. Meets with Trials and Finals (includes State)

a. The competition should be divided into flights with no more than eight in one flight. The best competitors should

be in the last flight.

b. In the trials, a thrower will throw two throws in succession. After each thrower in the flights has completed

his/her first two throws, the final throw will be taken. (2-1 setup)

c. The finals should be in reverse order with each thrower throwing one throw, and continuing down through the

flight (1-1-1setup)

d. The event judge may allow an athlete to take two or more throws in succession providing he/she is being

excused to compete in another event.

2. Meets with only Finals

a. Competitors will be allowed four throws

b. Divide the competition into flights with no more than 8 to a flight.

c. Throws can be taken in a 2-2 setup or all four throws may be taken at once as determined by meet

management.

d. The event judge may allow an athlete to take two or more throws in succession providing he/she is being

excused to compete in another event.

LONG AND TRIPLE JUMP

1. In competition when both trials and finals are held, the event should be administered in the following fashion:

a. The competition should be divided into flights with no more than eight in one flight. The best competitors should

be in the last flight.

b. Jumps will be taken one at a time until the entire flight has completed their jumps.

c. The event judge may allow an athlete to take two or more jumps in succession providing he/she is being

excused to compete in another event.

2. Meets with only Finals

a. Competitors will be allowed four jumps.

b. Divide the competition into flights with no more than 8 to a flight.

c. Jumps will be taken one at a time until the flight is completed.

d. The event judge may allow an athlete to take two or more jumps in succession providing he/she is being

excused to compete in another event.

HIGH JUMP AND POLE VAULT

The order of jumping will be determined by qualifying mark. In the state meet, it would be determined by the mark from the regional

track meet.

7.14.43 CULMINATING EVENTS

7.14.44 Scoring at the regional and state track meets will be 10-8-6-5-4-3-2-1.

[71]

7.14.45 If there are ties for last place state qualifiers in the same regional track meet, only TRUE TIES in high jump and pole vault will qualify

for the state track meet.

7.14.46 Track meets that are held on tracks with eight lanes may have eight qualifiers to the finals. If a track has only six lanes, only six will

be entered in the finals.

7.14.47 Qualifiers for the finals in the regional track meets must run the final heat in that event without disqualification in order to run that

event at the state meet or meet the requirements established in Rule 7.14.53. In regional track meets, in the following field events

(shot, discus, long jump, triple jump), nine athletes qualify for the finals, eight advancing to state.

7.14.48 During the scratch session at the regional meet, a participant may be replaced by a participant from the same school; however,

additions to the original entries may not be made. If qualifiers for the state meet are unable to attend, an alternate may be named by

the region, however, that individual must either have participated in the finals at the regional meet or have met the qualifying

standard.

7.14.49 Field events will continue to be measured and recorded by English heights and distances. State Meet starting heights for the pole

vault and high jump will be determined by recommendation from the Wyoming Track Coaches Association. Throwing implements

will be provided by the WHSAA, or participants may use their own if they pass inspection.

7.14.50 PROTESTS OF OBJECTIONABLE JEWELRY AND HEADWEAR

Any protest of objectionable jewelry or headwear being worn by a runner must be called to the attention of the officials prior to the

race. When objectionable jewelry or headwear is discovered on a competitor in a field event, the objectionable material must be

removed before the competitor can resume competition. The proper procedure and form must be utilized when filing any protest.

7.14.51 Heat and lane assignment and schedule for regional meets.

Heats and lanes will be assigned by the meet director for the preliminaries. For the finals, lanes will be assigned according to the

state meet guidelines. The first place finisher from each heat and the next fastest times (regardless of heat) to fill a field of eight will

qualify for the finals. Regions may determine the order of events or follow the state meet schedule.

7.14.52 Heat and lane assignment at State

Heats and lanes for the preliminaries of running events and relays at the state meet for all classes will be seeded from regional by

both place and time, and then those who qualified by standard will be heated. The first place finisher from each heat and the next

fastest times (regardless of heat) to fill a field of eight will qualify to the finals.

The 100 meter dash, 100 and 110 meter hurdles will be run on the straight-away.

The 200 meter dash will start on the back stretch and be staggered for one complete turn. The 400 meter dash will be run in lanes

from a two-turn staggered start.

The 300 meter intermediate hurdles will be run on two straight-aways and one curve with a 200 meter stagger. The girls 100 meter

intermediate hurdles will be 33" high.

The 800, 1600 and 3200 meter runs will start in alleys and runners will be required to remain in alleys through a one turn stagger.

In all classes, there will be no preliminaries in the 800, 1600, 3200 meter runs. All semifinal and final races, except the distances

and relays, will be run in lanes.

The 400 meter relay will be run with a 400 meter stagger. In the 1600 meter relay and 1600 medley relay runners will be required to

remain in lanes through a three turn stagger.

In the 3200 meter relay, runners will be required to remain in lanes or alleys through a one turn stagger. At regional and the state

meet in the 4 x 800 relay when there are eight or fewer teams, the alley start should be waived, and each team assigned a lane.

7.14.53 QUALIFIERS TO THE STATE TRACK MEET

7.14.55 1A, 2A, 3A and 4A Regions will qualify eight (8) individuals and four (4) relay teams by place from the regional meet per event.

7.14.56 Athletes will also be allowed to qualify for State Track by meeting qualifying standards during the regular season. Hand held times

will not be used as state qualifying times. To be qualified to compete in an event at the state track meet, the athlete must be entered

in that event at a WHSAA regional track meet. All athletes that meet qualifying standards at WHSAA approved qualifying meets will

be allowed to compete and score at the regional and state track meets provided all other WHSAA and National Federation rules are

followed. NOTE: Each school may have only one relay team per relay event at the regional and state meet.

Qualifying standards are determined by multiplying the old standard by three and adding the sixth place finishing mark from the

immediate past state track meet and dividing by four.

7.14.57 Relay teams that surpass the qualifying mark at regional meets but who do not advance to the State Meet by place shall be eligible

to advance by mark. The members of a relay team that advances in this manner shall be the same at the State Track Meet. In case

of injury, the Commissioner of the WHSAA will make the final decision concerning substitution, and the injured athlete will not be

allowed to participate in any other event in the State Track Meet. NOTE: Each school may have only one relay team per relay event

at the regional and state meet.

7.14.58 Relay teams can also qualify during the season by meeting the qualifying standard. The following stipulations apply:

1. All qualifying marks must be attained at a state qualifying meet or in an out-of-state meet approved by the Commissioner

of the WHSAA.

2. At the beginning of the season, each head coach will be given State Meet Relay Qualifying forms. These forms will be for

the purpose of declaring a school's relay team as meeting the qualifying standard and for the purpose of entering that

relay team in the Wyoming State Track Meet.

3. A school may submit only ONE qualifying form to the WHSAA. That form must be submitted with the team's entries for the

Regional Track Meets.

[72]

4. A school submitting a relay qualifying form at the Regional Meets must submit that form to the meet director of the

Regional Meet in order that he may forward that form with the other official entries from the meet to the WHSAA.

5. Once a relay qualifying form is submitted, it is official and that exact relay team must compete at the State Meet.

(Exception see number 9)

a. If a runner is injured, a replacement may be entered with approval of the Commissioner of the WHSAA.

b. If an athlete is injured and an alternate replaces him, the injured athlete will not be allowed to participate in the

State Meet.

c. If an athlete is injured during the State Meet, he/she will not be allowed further participation.

6. Relay qualifying forms must include each athlete who runs; the time that the relay team ran; type of timing system used; a

signature by the Meet Director.

7. All state qualifying meets should require relay cards.

8. A relay team who has met the qualifying standard is not required to run at the Regional Meet; however, they must be

officially entered.

An official entry by that relay team counts as one of the four events in which a participant may compete.

9. A pre-qualified relay team that is entered in the Regional Track Meet, and that qualifies by place at the Regional Meet

shall be allowed to substitute relay participants at the State Track Meet.

7.14.6 INDOOR TRACK

7.14.60 The WHSAA recognizes two classifications in Indoor Track. The schools with the enrollments of 700 and above shall be 4A,

schools with enrollments from 699 and below shall be 3A.

7.14.61 A student may not participate in two sports at the same time during the Indoor Track season. Concurrent sport rule does apply

(5.1.1 & 5.10.3).

7.14.62 Due to the fact that no surrounding NFHS member states sanction indoor track, the following exception will be in place for indoor

track only.

Exception: Coaches and athletes will be allowed to attend out-of-state indoor track meets in the surrounding states where their

state association does not offer Indoor Track to their member schools. Permission must be given by the WHSAA member school’s

local school district to attend. All other WHSAA rules and regulations must be followed.

7.14.63 Only schools with proper sanctioning from an NFHS member state association may participate at indoor track meets hosted by

Wyoming member schools. Unattached individuals would not be allowed to participate.

7.14.70 CALENDAR

The Indoor Track season begins with a first allowable practice date on the Monday of WHSAA calendar week 27. The first allowable

contest date is on Thursday of calendar week 28. Each track athlete is limited to 8 track meets per season. A meet is defined as any

competition, school or non-school, that takes place during the season. Examples are included, but not limited to: running unattached

or in a USTAF Meet. The State Meet shall not count toward the 8 day meet limit. The WHSAA State Indoor Track Meet is on the

Saturday of week 35.

7.14.80 STATE MEET

7.14.81 All schools that compete in Indoor Track are eligible for the State Meet. Each school is permitted one boys and one girls team at the

State Meet. All athletes that are in a school that offers Indoor Track may participate at the State Indoor Track Meet, provided they

meet all rules for participation. Entries will be limited to 4 individuals per event. Each school will be allowed to enter one relay team.

NOTE: A “no time” will be given to an athlete unless they have a current season recorded competition time in their entered event.

Times must be verified by the school at the state meet coaches meeting if questioned.

7.14.81.5 Athletes will also be allowed to qualify for the State Meet by meeting qualifying standards during the regular season. Should a

school have more than four (4) prequalified athletes for an event, they may enter all prequalified athletes. NOTE: Each school may

have only one relay team per relay event at the State Meet. An official entry on a relay team counts as one of the four events in

which a participant may compete.

Qualifying standards are determined by multiplying the old standard by three and adding the sixth place finishing mark from the

immediate past state track meet and dividing by four.

7.14.81.6 Use open 400 meter times to determine 4x400 relay seeding times and open 800 meter times to determine 4x800 relay seeding

times for the State Indoor meet with verified 400 and 800 meter times from previous meets.

7.14.82 Events for State Indoor Track and Field

RUNNING EVENTS

FIELD EVENTS

4 x 800 Relay

55 Meter Hurdles

400 Meter Dash

High Jump

4 x 400 Relay

55 Meter Dash

800 Meter Run

Long Jump

4 x 100 Relay

200 Meter Dash

1600 Meter Run

Pole Vault

1600 Sprint Medley Relay (200, 200, 400, 800)

3200 Meter Run

Shot Put

Triple Jump

55M, 55M Hurdles, and 200M sprints will be started and finished in lanes

400M, 800M, 1600M and 3200M runs will start on two turn stagger marks/ break line at finish of 2nd turn

[73]

4X400M Relay and 4X800M Relay will start on two turn stagger marks/ break line at finish of 2nd turn

4X200M Relay and Sprint Medley Relay will start on three turn stagger marks/ break line at finish of 3rd turn

Heat maximums: 55M (8), 55M Hurdles (8), 200M (6), 400M (6), 800M (12), 1600M (18), 3200M (18), 4X200M

Relay (6), 200M/200M/400M/800M Relay (6), 4X400M Relay (6), and 4X800M Relay (2 heats)

NOTE: 4X200M Relay - no acceleration zones; same as 4X400M Relay rules outdoors

NOTE: Two heats for Finals of the 55M Hurdles and 55M Dash if there are ties

NOTE: 200M Finals will be heated slow to fast with 3 heats of four runners in lanes 6-7-5-8

For all indoor relays:

1. A relay time run during the indoor season by your team may be used by any individuals on your team.

2. If open times are used to seed your relay team, the four individuals and their open times must be the actual competitors of

that relay team.

7.14.83 Scoring will be 10-8-6-5-4-3-2-1.

7.14.84 Team trophies will be awarded to the top four teams in both boys and girls. Individual medals will be presented to the top 8 finishers.

7.14.85 The National Federation of State High School Associations rules book will be used in the running of indoor meets.

7.15.0 GIRLS VOLLEYBALL

7.15.1 The WHSAA recognizes four classifications in volleyball. The schools with the enrollments of 700 and above shall be 4A, schools

with enrollments from 210-699 shall be 3A, schools with enrollments from 110-209 shall be 2A, and schools with enrollments of 109

and below shall be 1A.

7.15.2 Teams are limited to 18 matches, exclusive of regional and state. This limit shall apply to all squads.

During the season a team will be allowed to play no more than four matches a day.

Individual players are allowed to play in no more than two levels (freshman, sophomore, junior varsity, varsity) in one day and no

more than four matches in one day. Entering a contest for one live ball counts as participation in one match. As per WHSAA Rules

1.4.1 and 5.0.7, the contest in which a participant exceeds the limitation shall be forfeited.

The volleyball season begins with the first allowable practice on Monday of WHSAA calendar week 7. The first allowable contest

date is on Thursday of calendar week 8. The WHSAA State Meet will be Thursday, Friday and Saturday of WHSAA week 18.

7.15.21 WHSAA tournament volleyballs shall be provided by Baden.

7.15.22 Match Scoring

1. All matches shall be best three-of-five games, using Rally scoring.

2. Games shall be played to 25 points (no cap), and the fifth and deciding game shall be played to 15 points (no cap).

3. The let serve shall be allowed, and play shall continue provided net contact is entirely within the net antennas.

4. Each team shall be allowed two time-outs per game.

5. Format to be used at the sub-varsity level will be two-of-three games to 25 points (no cap).

6. Regular season tournaments will be allowed to modify the above scoring but must use rally scoring.

7.15.3 Each volleyball team may enter up to four (4) invitational tournaments each season. Participation in regular season tournaments will

count as two matches.

7.15.4 Line judges for varsity level competition shall be trained. The WHSAA recommends that adults be used for varsity competition.

7.15.5 WHSAA REGIONAL VOLLEYBALL TOURNAMENTS

7.15.6 Practice sessions on any court used for regional or state will not be allowed any time during the ten (10) days prior to the respective

tournament. Schools that host a regional tournament are granted an exception and are allowed to practice on their own court even

though they are hosting the event.

7.15.61 No more than fourteen players can be in uniform for any tournament contest. The fourteen players whose names are entered on the

official scorebook for the first tournament contest, shall be the only players used for the entire tournament. Violation of this provision

shall cause forfeiture as per WHSAA Rules 5.0.7 and 1.4.0 (Refer to Rule 7.3.0 for definition of a contest).

7.15.90 STATE VOLLEYBALL TOURNAMENT

7.15.91 Each state tournament will be an eight team tournament. The state tournament bracket will be a modified double elimination bracket

with contests to determine true third and fourth place finishers.

[74]

7.16.0 WRESTLING

7.16.1 The WHSAA recognizes three classifications in boys wrestling and one classification in girls wrestling. The schools with the

enrollments of 700 and above shall be 4A, schools with enrollments from 210-699 shall be 3A, and the schools with enrollments

from 209 and below shall be 2A

7.16.12 The wrestling season begins with the first allowable contact day on Monday of WHSAA calendar week 21. There shall be NO

CONTACT Thursday through Sunday of WHSAA Calendar week 21. The first allowable contest date is on Thursday of calendar

week 23. The WHSAA State Meet will be held on WHSAA calendar week 34.

Weight certification will take place on Friday of WHSAA week 22.

7.16.15 The WHSAA recognizes fourteen weight classes in wrestling as per National Federation Rules.

7.16.2 The two pound growth allowance, as per National Federation Wrestling Rules and by WHSAA adoption, will begin on January 1st of

each season.

7.16.35 Cheerleaders are not allowed to slap the wrestling mats during cheers or any other time during the course of wrestling matches.

7.16.42 Coaches are to keep a record of all wrestler's matches and weigh-ins in order to complete the information needed for the regional

tournament entry form. The information needed is included on each wrestler's performance record and includes the following: Date

of competition, opponent's name and school, weight wrestled, dual or tournament competed in, and result of matches.

7.16.44 As per National Federation Rule 2-4-2, the accuracy of wrestling scales shall be certified annually by the WHSAA.

7.16.5 NUMBER OF ALLOWABLE EVENTS

In all classes, each wrestler is allowed to compete in 15 events per season, excluding regional and state tournaments. An event is

defined as any competition, school or non-school, that takes place during the season. Examples are included, but not limited to:

USA meets or club tournaments.

During the regular season, wrestlers may compete in up to seven tournaments which will count as one event. There is no minimum

or maximum number of teams in a tournament.

According to National Federation rules, wrestlers are allowed to wrestle in no more than five matches in one day. As per WHSAA

Rules 1.4.2 and 5.0.7, the contest in which a participant exceeds the limitation shall be forfeited.

1. Dual Meets - Count as one event per wrestler

2. Multiple Dual Meet - Competition that is completed in one day.

a. Double Dual - Count as two events per wrestler

b. Triangular - Count as two events per wrestler

c. Quad - Count as two events per wrestler

3. Dual Tournament - Count as a tournament or as two events per day of the tournament.

Whenever pupils from two schools have wrestling competition, it will count as a match. Practice matches between schools are not

allowed.

7.16.6 WEIGHT MANAGEMENT PROGRAM

The purpose of the WHSAA Wrestling Weight Management Program is to prevent undue weight reduction for competitive purposes

- reductions which might jeopardize the physical well-being of the pupil. During the wrestling season the pupil should eat and drink

normally and gain weight regularly and consistently even though in training and participating in wrestling activities.

As per National Federation rules, each state association shall develop and utilize a weight-management program that includes:

1) A specific gravity not to exceed 1.025

2) A body fat assessment no lower than 7% for males / 12% for females

3) A monitored weekly weight loss plan not to exceed 1.5% a week

The details of the WHSAA Weight Management Program are located on the WHSAA web site at www.whsaa.org

7.16.7 REGIONAL TOURNAMENTS

7.16.71 SEEDING CRITERIA

1. Head to head competition

2. Record against common opponents

3. Returning state placers at any weight (order of place)

4. Best overall record (minimum of ten varsity matches)

5. Coin flip

6. Wrestlers that are not seeded will be randomly drawn into the bracket.

7. Once seeding begins for each weight class, a wrestler may not be taken off the board for consideration.

7.16.72 Either a one day or two day Regional qualifying tournament will be conducted by the WHSAA with each school allowed to enter two

wrestlers per weight class. Only one wrestler per weight class per school will be scored. Eight wrestlers will advance to the State

[75]

Tournament from each Regional Tournament. Whenever two wrestlers from the same school wrestle a match, pin points will

automatically be awarded to the winner, regardless of the outcome of the match. The official entry deadline for the WHSAA Regional

Tournament is the seeding meeting or completion of tournament weigh-ins whichever occurs first. If the seeding meeting is first,

substitutions may be made up until the end of weigh-ins under the following conditions:

1. If for injury or illness, the substitution will be permitted only with a doctor’s written excuse submitted to the tournament

director

2. If for disciplinary action, the substitution will be permitted only if the reasons are verified in writing by the school’s

administration to the tournament director. Wrestlers not making weight may be moved to replace an entered teammate or

fill a team’s unused entry slot. If a substitution is allowed, the substitute designated to replace his teammate will do so in

the position of the original draw unless the substitute is replacing a “seeded” wrestler, whereby there shall be a re-seeding

and re-drawing of that weight class. If a change in weight class is made for an entered participant, then the above shall

apply; or if the change adds a participant to a weight class then that weight class shall be re-drawn.

3. If less than 8 competitors in the weight class, the possibility of taking more than 8 from the opposite region exists.

a. After all weights have been seeded in each region, the regional directors or designated persons will contact

each other and exchange numbers in each weight class. Wherever a region has less than 8 wrestlers in a

weight class, the opposite region shall wrestle to qualify any number of wrestlers available at that weight to

reach a maximum of 16 wrestlers in each weight class. ALL of these matches would be non-team scoring

matches. All Wrestlers involved in these matches must make weight each day of the regional tournament.

b. A wrestler that has qualified for the state meet on day one of a regional and still has a match on day two, but

does not make weight on day 2, CAN NOT be replaced by a wrestler from the opposite region or from his own.

A bye would represent him/her in the state bracket

7.16.8 WRESTLER'S APPEARANCE DURING CULMINATING EVENTS AWARDS CEREMONIES

Coaches are asked to remind wrestlers that they should be dressed in appropriate attire when receiving awards. Wrestlers should

be wearing either their wrestling uniform, sweat suit, or neat street apparel. T-shirts with inappropriate designs or language should

not be worn.

7.16.9 STATE TOURNAMENT

7.16.91 A wrestler must participate in the regional meet and qualify by placing in the top eight to be eligible for state competition. No

substitution is allowed. If a qualifier fails to make weight or for any other reason is unable to wrestle in the state tournament, a forfeit

will be declared.

The wrestler must compete in the same weight class at regional and state. Only one wrestler per weight class per school will be

scored. Whenever two wrestlers from the same school wrestle a match, pin points will automatically be awarded to the winner,

regardless of the outcome of the match.

7.16.92 In 4A, the top four wrestlers from each regional will be seeded at State. The first place wrestler from the East Conference will be in

the same quarter bracket as the fourth place finisher in the West Conference. The third place wrestler from the East Conference will

be in the same quarter bracket as the second place finisher in the West Conference. The other half bracket would have the same

place winners with the conference reversed. The other wrestlers shall be drawn in after byes are placed as evenly per team as

possible. When a wrestler who was drawn or seeded from regional withdraws, a forfeit is granted and the bracket is not redrawn.

The opposing wrestler receives points for this forfeit. In 3A and 2A, the same process will be used for East and West Regional

placers.

[76]

WHSAA STATE WRESTLING TOURNAMENT BRACKET

8.0.0 SPECIFIC ACTIVITY RULES AND REGULATIONS

8.0.1 The WHSAA, in order to effectively provide equitable activities opportunities for all students, offers a comprehensive activities

program.

8.0.2 Eligibility for fine arts, leadership, spirit groups and vocational WHSAA sponsored activities shall be governed by Rule 6.0.0 (Bona

fide Student), Rule 6.2.0 (Scholarship Rule), Rule 6.5.0 (Semester Requirement Rule), and Rule 5.8.0 (Outside Competition).

8.0.5 SPIRIT GROUPS

8.0.51 The official National Federation Rule Book shall be followed, at all practices, games and all competitions (state, regional and

nationals).

8.0.52 Spirit Teams are defined as cheer teams and dance teams.

8.0.53 Coaches/Advisors and Practice

1. All Cheer and Dance coaches/sponsors that will be instructing any form of cheerleading gymnastics or lifts (tumbling,

partner stunts, pyramid, tosses, etc.) must have a minimum of a Cheer and Dance Safety Certification. This class may be

obtained on https://www.nfhslearn.com

2. All head cheer and dance coaches must pass (80%) the NFHS open book Spirit Rules Test for their specific discipline and

view the WHSAA sponsored spirit rules clinic in order to be eligible for the State Spirit Competition. The test and Rules

Clinic must be completed before their first performance of the school year.

3. Spirit teams will be placed under the direction of a school advisor/coach for all practices and contests.

4. All cheerleaders and dancers should receive proper training before attempting any form of cheerleading gymnastics or lifts

(tumbling, partner stunts, pyramids). Each should receive proper training in correct spotting techniques.

5. All practice sessions should be supervised by the advisor/coach and held in a location suitable for the activities of

cheerleaders (i.e., use of tumbling mats, away from excessive noise and distractions, etc.).

[77]

6. Advisors/coaches must recognize a team’s particular ability level and must limit the team’s activities accordingly. “Ability

level” refers to the team’s talents as a whole, and individuals should not be pressed to perform activities they cannot

perform safely.

7. Good sportsmanship is viewed by the WHSAA as a concrete measure of a team’s understanding and commitment to fair

ethical behavior and integrity. Cheerleading, more than any other activity, can directly influence the behavior of others. It

is important the cheer coach, captain and total team be aware of the sportsmanship guidelines in the National Federation

Spirit Rules Book.

8.0.54 WHSAA Spirit Groups Culminating Event (Wyoming High School State Dance and Cheer Competition)

1. The WHSAA recognizes two classifications for the State Spirit Competition. The schools with the enrollments of 700 and

above shall be 4A, the schools with enrollments from 210-699 shall be 3A. Exception: If there are enough 1A and 2A

schools in a division, then a 2A classification will be considered for the schools with enrollments from 209 and below.

2. To participate at the state spirit competition, each team’s school must be enrolled as a member of the WHSAA with spirit

groups as an activity.

3. To participate in the state spirit competition, each participant must be an active member and in good academic standing at

their school.

4. All teams must be accompanied by their advisor/coach or a designated school official at all times. No team will be allowed

to participate without an advisor/coach or a designated school official in attendance. No Exceptions!

5. The following performance areas will be utilized at the WHSAA Spirit Groups Culminating event:

a. All cheer competition will take place within a performance area of a 54’ x 42’ cheer mat.

b. All dance competition will take place within a performance area of 47’ x 50’. The half court basketball

marking will be used when available.

6. General Competition Information for all Spirit Teams

a. All information and rules in the WHSAA Handbook under Spirit 8.0.5 and the National Federation

Spirit Rules Book will apply to all competition.

b. Squad Size - There is a 22 participant squad size limit in all divisions. Each school will be allowed one

team per category.

c. Time Limit - Each squad will have two and one-half minutes to perform. In Game Day, each squad

will have three minutes to perform. Time of the performance begins at the first sound of music or

when the captain or member of the squad begins the first word of a cheer, chant or dance.

d. State Competition Music - Each school must have their music sent in by designated deadline. All

schools will use the same sound system provided by the competition venue. A school representative

will have the option to be at the music table during their performance. All music will be checked during

the practice time. It will be the coaches responsibility to make sure the correct track is loaded for the

appropriate performance.

e. Interruption of Performance - In the event that an injury causes the competition of a team to be

interrupted, the team would be permitted to leave and regroup and perform prior to the end of the

competition. The WHSAA officials do have the authority to stop your routine if an athlete appears

injured.

f. Judge’s Sheets - Technical judge’s and performance judge’s sheets will be available at the

competition site following the announcement of placers.

g. Participant Seating - All participants must sit in assigned areas on the opposite side of the spectator

area so that paying spectators will be able to have an unobstructed view of the competition area.

Participants must remain seated until the final performance is completed and the mats have been

rolled up. Participants are also asked to remain seated during all performances.

h. Tiebreaker Procedure – Judges break all ties.

7. General Cheer Information

a. GAME DAY

1. Each team will perform a routine composed of three sections: Band Dance, Crowd Leading

(Situational and Time-out cheer), and Fight Song. Time limit not to exceed three minutes

(3:00).

2. Each section is not timed but should be approximately one minute each (1:00)

3. Each team will showcase its best game day presentation that will include an announcer-

lead situation game day element (football centered).

4. Every team will follow the same order: Band Dance, Crowd Leading, and then Fight Song.

5. Situational elements will be the transition between Band Dance and Cheer (crowd leading)

sections.

6. Teams will not be aware of the game day situation prior to the performance, but will be

given examples of situations that will be used.

7. The use of crowd leading tools such as signs, poms, flags, and/or megaphones are

encouraged.

Band Dance Rules and Restrictions

Teams will take the floor when announced

Recorded music performed by marching band/pep band

No stunts or tumbling permitted

Practicality is very important (Crowd entertainment vs. Crowd leading)

Crowd Leading Rules and Restrictions

Emphasis on crowd involvement

Crowd leading tools highly encouraged

No music permitted

Fight Song Rules and Restrictions

Recorded music performed by marching band/pep band

[78]

Up to three consecutive eight counts may be incorporated with stunts, tumbling, and/or jumps.

IF REPEATED, incorporating stunts, tumbling, and/or jumps must be repeated as initially performed.

Skill Restrictions

No basket, sponge, or elevator tosses allowed

No inversions

No twisting dismounts from stunts

Single-leg extended stunts are limited to liberties and liberty hitches

No running tumbling

Standing tumbling is limited to ONE SKILL

b. GIRLS STUNT – Teams with no males; may stunt, tumble, build pyramids.

c. CO-ED STUNT – Teams with any males will be considered a CO-ED team. The males competing on

the co-ed team must have a minimum of 15 days of practice with the squad prior to the competition.

Practices may only be counted after the November practice start date.

d. Performance Cheers - The cheer/sideline must be an appropriate and effective cheer/sideline to use

at a game. The cheer/sideline must be a crowd-participation cheer/sideline. If the team is going to use

a mascot name they may only use their school’s mascot. EXAMPLE: May not use “Beat those

Cowboys.” May use “Go Cowboys.” Performance cheers will not be allowed. Performance cheers

are cheers that have slander directed at other schools, baiting and/or gloating. Cheers need to be

positive and promote crowd involvement. Cheerleaders are strongly encouraged to use signs, poms,

megaphones, etc. There will be a 5 point deduction for each inappropriate performance cheer.

e. Competition Spotters - Spotters will be positioned on the mat during competition. They are strictly

there for safety. Stunts that require a constant spotter must be provided within the team. If you have

a stunt that you feel a WHSAA/Competition spotter may interfere with during competition, please

have your captain inform the spotters prior to the team’s entry onto the mat.

f. The competition area for all divisions of cheer will be 54’ X 42’ on the mat side and 47’ X 50’ on the

floor side

8. General Dance Information

a. JAZZ – A jazz routine incorporates stylized dance movements and combinations, formation changes,

group work, leaps and turns. Emphasis is placed on proper technical execution, extension, control,

body placement and team uniformity. Creative choreography will capture audience and judges’

attention. Having your own “style” will distinguish your team apart from the rest. This division includes

straight jazz, drill, and lyrical styles. Hip Hop style is not allowed.

b. HIP HOP – Routines should include street style movements with an emphasis on execution, style,

creativity, body isolations and control. This style also consists of pop and lock techniques, as well as

Military/Stomping. The uniformity of all movement throughout the performance should complement

the beats and rhythm of the music. Teams may also put an additional focus on incorporations such as

jumps, jump variations, combo jumps, stalls and floor work. No overuse of hip thrusts or inappropriate

moves. No emphasis will be placed on jazz technique.

c. All NFHS rules will be expected to be followed for both categories

8.1.0 JOURNALISM

8.1.1 THE WYOMING HIGH SCHOOL STUDENT PRESS ASSOCIATION

8.1.2 CLASSIFICATIONS

Wyoming high schools are divided into classifications according to size for the yearbook and newspaper state contests. School

classification will be the same as designated for athletic and other nonathletic competition, 1A, 2A, 3A, and 4A.

8.1.3 DUES

Dues in the WHSSPA are in addition to school dues paid to the WHSAA. The amount of dues are established by the Executive

Board of the WHSSPA and are $35 per school. Only high schools that are members of the WHSSPA and that pay activity fees to

the WHSAA may place entries in the WHSSPA publications contests. WHSSPA dues are used to purchase awards for winners of

contests and to pay other expenses of the organization.

Each school sending representatives to the annual Journalism Convention shall pay an additional registration fee to cover costs of

the convention. An additional judging fee is also assessed to schools that wish to receive a publication critique.

8.1.4 OBJECTIVES

The objectives of the WHSSPA are:

1. to upgrade the quality of student publications

2. to encourage student participation through intrastate competition

3. to recognize student achievement

4. to introduce students to journalism as a career

8.1.5 INSIGNIA

[79]

The insignia of the WHSSPA is a Pony Express rider encircled by the name “Wyoming High School Student Press Association”.

This is available to all member schools and may be obtained through the WHSAA. This insignia is carried as a part of the masthead

of Wyoming high school newspapers.

8.1.6 OFFICERS

Officers of the WHSSPA are high school faculty members, elected annually during the Journalism Convention. Past-presidents of

the WHSSPA act as a nominating committee to draw up a slate which is presented to the high school advisers present at the

convention. Officers are President, Executive Director, and Secretary. The Executive Director's term is unlimited. The President

serves a 1-year term, while the Secretary serves a 3-year term. Officers may be reelected. Additional members on the Executive

Board include the immediate Past-president, JEA State Director, and others as designated by the elected officials.

WHSSPA officers serve as a planning committee for the annual Journalism Convention in cooperation with the Commissioner of the

WHSAA. In addition, it is their responsibility to conduct any necessary matters of business that occur between conventions and

make decisions on behalf of the WHSSPA.

8.1.7 HANDBOOK

Officers of the WHSSPA have authorized publication of a Journalism Handbook for the WHSSPA. This handbook includes the

constitution of the association, a history of high school journalism in Wyoming, this section of the WHSAA handbook, a list of Past-

presidents of the WHSSPA, and all guidelines/judging forms for publication contests. A copy of the Journalism Handbook may be

obtained from executive officers of the WHSSPA or the WHSAA office.

8.1.8 PUBLICATION CONTESTS

The WHSSPA sponsors several contests to help achieve the set objectives of the association. Newspapers to be entered for

competition are to be sent to the WHSSPA Executive Director in the spring and yearbooks are submitted in late summer or early fall

to be distributed to selected judge(s). Specific deadline dates are set by the officers annually and notification of the deadline date is

sent to each school in March or April to guarantee compliance with a follow-up notice sent in late August for any new yearbook

adviser who may not have received the first notice. A Runner-up and an All-State winner will be named in each school classification.

A photography contest is held at the annual convention. Photographs which may be entered in the contest must have been printed

in a publication from contest time to contest time, either school newspaper, magazine, yearbook or a local newspaper. There are six

categories into which photographs may be classified: news photo, feature photo, sports photo, portrait, special effects photo, and

color photo. Any school may enter up to six photos in each category. A 1st, 2nd, and 3rd place winner in each category will be

named if entries are sufficient, and certificates will be awarded. One grand sweepstakes picture and one runner-up from all photos

will be chosen.

Additional competitions will be scheduled on an annual basis and conducted during the convention. Attendance at the convention is

not required to enter newspapers, yearbooks, or photographs into competition. However, winners of those competitions, as well as

winners of convention contests, will be announced at the convention.

8.1.85 WHSSPA Video Broadcast Submission Requirements and Guidelines

1. Member schools may submit entries in any or all of three categories: News Story, Sports Story and Feature Story. Entries

must have aired during the previous school year.

2. Any member school may submit one entry per category, for a maximum total of three entries.

3. Cost per school is $30, regardless of the number of entries.

4. Each entry should be the only video on a single VHS tape, rewound to the starting point. Each tape should clearly label

category, name of school and student(s) name(s).

5. News Story and Sports Story maximum length is two minutes. (1:15 is standard and should be generally observed for

both News and Sports). Feature Story maximum length is four minutes. (2:00 is standard in Feature, but if the Feature is

aired in two parts, 4:00 is acceptable)

6. If videos and judging evaluations are not to be picked up at the State Convention during the awards ceremony, they

should include a SASE for their return.

7. 4A, 3A, 2A and 1A school entries will be judged together.

8 1.9 CONVENTION

The state Journalism Convention is held in October. Convention sites are selected from those schools extending an invitation to

host the event.

Days of the convention are designated as Monday and Tuesday. This is to allow student athletes and others with weekend

commitments the opportunity to attend the convention without missing football/volleyball games, homecoming events, etc.

Format of the convention allows for workshop/learning sessions planned for both novice and advanced high school journalists.

These sessions are in the form of short course lectures, panel discussions, individual seminars, hands-on workshops and other

such methods as deemed appropriate for teaching journalistic techniques to students. Separate sessions will be designed to provide

newspaper emphasis and yearbook emphasis; other workshops may be planned to meet identified needs of the group. Contests will

be planned for convention participants in writing and other contests as are appropriate for high school journalists.

Awards will be given for winners of the contests during the awards assembly at the convention. In addition, winning newspapers and

yearbooks are also announced. Pony Express Awards are to be given as certificates of appreciation and to be presented to those

individuals and groups who contribute to the success of the WHSSPA. Pony Express Awards may be given at the convention, or

they may be announced at a business meeting of advisers of the association and awarded in an appropriate manner at the

discretion of the executive board.

[80]

Outside speakers are brought to the convention to provide insight in current career opportunities, trends in publications, and serve

as motivational speakers. In addition, career writers and publishing authors are invited to address the convention participants.

Yearbook publishing companies are invited to attend and urged to set up display tables. In addition, representatives may be invited

to present workshops. Other business firms with interest in high school journalism are also invited to participate. Planned

involvement, however, should be coordinated by the planning committee of the WHSSPA.

8.1.10 SCHOLARSHIP

A $500 journalism scholarship is funded by Walsworth Publishing Co. and the WHSAA, and is open to any Wyoming high school

senior. The adviser of the student must approve the application which should include a portfolio illustrating examples of the student's

work, a transcript of the student's grades, three letters of recommendation, and a letter of intent to major in journalism. The

application must be received by the WHSSPA executive committee by March 1. The scholarship will be mailed directly to the

registrar of the institution.

8.2.0 MUSIC

8.2.1 CLASSIFICATION

The WHSAA classifies schools into four classes for interscholastic music purposes. This classification is the same as used for

basketball.

No group from a given school may compete in more than one class. A school may advance in classification, but may not under any

circumstance, compete in a lower classification than the one in which its enrollment places it. Summer music activities are neither

approved nor disapproved by the Board of Directors.

8.2.2 DISTRICT ORGANIZATION

Each district organization is responsible for conducting the musical activities within its own district according to the rules set forth in

this publication. It shall also be each district's responsibility to finance its own musical activities. Each district organization is

responsible for the election of a president who shall serve on the WMEA Executive Board. The President should be elected at one

of the following: All-State or Spring Music Festival. The name of the District President must be reported to the State President by

April 1. The term of District President is two years and elections will take place every other year. District Presidents may hold

successive terms.

The state is divided into six districts. Schools may not participate in any district music festival other than the one held in the district in

which they have been assigned. The districts are as follows:

1. SOUTHWEST

Afton (Star Valley)

Evanston

Kemmerer

Pinedale

Big Piney

Farson-Eden

Lyman

Cokeville

Jackson

Mountain View

2. NORTHEAST

Arvada-Clearmont

Hulett

Newcastle

Tongue River

Big Horn

Kaycee

Sheridan

Upton

Buffalo

Midwest

Sundance

Wright

Campbell County

Moorcroft

Thunder Basin

3. NORTH BIG HORN

BASIN

Basin (Riverside)

Cody

Meeteetse

Thermopolis

Burlington

Greybull

Powell

Worland

Byron (Rocky Mountain

Lovell

Ten Sleep

4. SOUTH BIG HORN BASIN

Baggs (LSR)

Lander

Rock Springs

Dubois

Rawlins

Shoshoni

Green River

Riverton

Wind River

5. SOUTHEAST

Burns

Encampment

Pine Bluffs

Cheyenne Central

Hanna/Elk Mountain

Rock River

Cheyenne East

Laramie

Saratoga

Cheyenne South

6. NORTH PLATTE

Chugwater

Glenrock

Lingle-Ft. Laramie

Southeast (Youder)

Douglas

Guernsey-Sunrise

Lusk (Niobrara County)

Torrington

Glendo

Kelly Walsh

Natrona County

Wheatland

Each District President should call a meeting in the fall, in conjunction with the regular district activities meeting, to confirm all host-

sites and a host-site chair for district events. Dates for the year's music activities should also be discussed and confirmed. In the

event any school becomes the substitute host, that school's personnel will automatically assume all clinic/festival responsibilities. It

[81]

is recommended that each district elect or appoint a Vice President who could assume the duties of the President should an

emergency arise.

8.2.3 ELIGIBILITY

All students participating in interscholastic musical activities will meet the following eligibility requirements:

1. The student must be academically eligible according to the guidelines set forth by the WHSAA Rule 6.2.0 as well as by

semester Rule 6.5.0.

2. No entry will be accepted unless it is signed by the appropriate music teacher and by the school principal, who shall attest

to each student's eligibility.

These are minimum rules, which must be adhered to by all pupils in interscholastic activities. A school may adopt more stringent

requirements at its discretion provided students are treated equally.

8.2.4 SPECIAL MUSIC ACTIVITIES

8.2.41 DISTRICT CLINICS

The district clinics are organized to provide an opportunity for high school students in band and choir programs to experience

membership in a large ensemble under the direction of a guest conductor of recognized excellence.

1. Site Selection and Host-Site Chair

District clinics are typically held within 10 days prior to Thanksgiving. Each district should set a rotation schedule to

determine the site of the host school. Host schools should know well in advance in order to have adequate preparation

time for the clinic. One person from the upcoming host school will be elected or appointed at the clinic to serve as

organizing chair for the next year's clinic.

2. Duties of the Host School/Host-Site Chair

a. Select clinician/directors for the band and choir groups. The amount of the fee has been set by the

WHSAA/WMEA and the standardized contract available through the WHSAA office MUST be used.

b. Select, in consultation with the band and choir clinician/directors, the music that will be included in the clinic

repertoire.

c. Notify all schools of the selections prior to the summer break in order for them to order their own music.

d. Arrange for suitable rehearsal and concert sites.

e. Aid out-of-town participants by providing information on housing and eating establishments.

f. Publish a complete schedule of events including times, locations, and instructions, no later than October 10, to

enable all participants ample time to make plans for travel, housing, meals, etc.

g. Arrange for the printed concert program.

h. Be responsible for keeping records of guest clinician's expenses so that each school can be billed on a pro-rata

basis for their participating students.

i. Pay the guest clinician/directors in a timely fashion immediately following the district clinic.

8.2.42 DISTRICT FESTIVALS

The district festivals are organized to provide music students an opportunity, as individuals and members of an ensemble, to

perform and be evaluated by a music educator other than their own. It enables students to compare their performances with that of

other area schools and provide incentive for improvement and continued participation. District Festivals may be held during weeks

37 through 42 of the WHSAA calendar. Festivals serve as opportunities for assessment on the state or district standards based

upon a common rubric score.

1. Site Selection/Host-Site Chair Selection

It is suggested that districts set up a rotation system so that festival sites can be designated well in advance. The Host-

Site Chair should be elected or appointed at festival, one year in advance. Such planning can be tentative in nature and

can, if necessary, be changed at the fall meeting.

2. Duties of Host School/Host-Site Chair

a. Procure certified adjudicators.

b. Schedule events and facilities and supply schedules to participating schools at least five days before the

festival.

c. Arrange for necessary help to administer the festival. Local expenses of festivals, such as janitorial services,

furnishing ticket takers and other officials should be paid by the host school in lieu of travel expense that the

school would have incurred had the festival been held in another community.

d. Receive all entries and fees.

e. Provide for each adjudicator, a copy of "Instructions to Adjudicators."

f. Provide certified adjudicators with WHSAA adjudicator forms.

g. Provide participating schools with adjudicators' ratings and comments immediately after the conclusion of the

festival.

h. Bill a visiting school for any damages inflicted by its students.

i. Report any act of discourtesy to the WHSAA immediately following the district festival.

j. Submit a complete financial report to the secretary of their school district and the WHSAA office.

3. Fees

Each district has the authority and responsibility for financing its own music activities and, therefore, each district shall

establish the fees for their district festivals.

[82]

4. Selection of Adjudicators

Each district festival shall contract only adjudicators who have successfully completed a WHSAA/WMEA adjudication

certification clinic and are certified by the WHSAA/WMEA.

a. Lists of certified adjudicators are on file at the WHSAA office.

b. The amount of the fee has been set by the WHSAA/WMEA and the standardized contract available through the

WHSAA office MUST be used.

c. Each district festival shall adhere to the following principles when employing adjudicators:

1) Should live outside the district in which he/she is being employed.

2) Shall be required to be thoroughly familiar with the "Instructions to Adjudicators".

5. Instructions to Adjudicators

a. Each judge is employed to aid in a program of music education. The results of this judging can either be a help

or a hindrance. Care should be exercised in the wording of both oral and written comments in order that they

may be detailed, constructive and helpful. Judges shall avoid the use of sarcastic remarks.

b. The judges must keep in mind that they are judging secondary school students, and not college, university or

professional groups. Judging should be strict but fair.

c. Judges should note particularly the quality of music selected for performance as well as the appropriateness of

each selection so far as its technical and musical demands are concerned in relation to the student's length of

study.

d. The time allowances for individual events should be sufficient to enable the judges to orally discuss various

aspects of the performance in order to assure that the student and/or director understands the criticisms and

suggestions as well as commendations.

e. Judges must ensure that the assigned rating is consistent with the verbal and written comments delivered to the

performer(s).

6. Judging Standards

Solos

Division I, Superior

The best conceivable performance for the event and the class and age of the participant being judged: Worthy of the

distinction of being recognized as a first place winner. May be compared to a percentage grade of 94-100.

Division II, Excellent

An unusual performance in many respects, but not worthy of the highest rating due to minor defects in performance or

ineffective interpretation. A performance of distinctive quality may be compared to a percentage grade of 86-93.

Division III, Average

A good performance, but not outstanding. Showing accomplishment and marked promise, but lacking in one or more

essential qualities.

May be compared to a percentage of 70-85.

Division IV, Fair

Lacking in preparation and presentation, shows significant defect in technique or musical understanding. Comparable to a

percentage grade of 69 or below.

No ratings below IV are to be given.

7. Regulations for Festival Events

All directors and participants should pay particular attention to the following:

a. Selection. Entrants may choose music from the current national or comparable lists. Vocal soloists may include

two numbers of contrasting styles and must spend at least three minutes in actual singing.

b. Scores. Students and directors must adhere to copyright requirements. Illegal copying of materials is

punishable by fine, imprisonment, or both.

1) Each soloist shall supply the judge with one score of the selection with the measures numbered.

Each soloist shall pick up his/her music after conferring with the adjudicator.

2) Directors shall supply the judges with authorized conductor's scores for small ensembles with the

measures numbered.

3) For large groups, directors shall furnish the judges with original scores or authorized copies only of

each selection with the measures numbered.

4) Groups may not perform if they do not furnish original scores or authorized copies.

c. Time Limits. (Including time for setting up and tuning)

1) For a solo, maximum playing or singing time is to be eight minutes with a maximum scheduled time of

ten minutes.

2) For a small instrumental ensemble, maximum performance time is eight minutes with a maximum

scheduled time of ten minutes.

[83]

3) For a small vocal ensemble, maximum performance time is eight minutes with a maximum scheduled

time of ten minutes.

d. Repetition.

1) A soloist shall not re-perform a selection he/she has used at any evaluative festival in any previous

year.

2) Conducted ensembles may not sing or play a selection that was an evaluative festival selection from

the previous year

3) Small ensembles may not perform a piece that is being performed by their corresponding large

ensemble in the same year.

e. Memory. Piano and vocal solos must be memorized. Vocal ensembles shall perform their selections from

memory, but instrumental ensembles may use scores.

f. Direction. Small ensembles shall perform without direction by either an adult or student director.

g. Sight Reading. Subject to district regulations.

8. Events

The following events may be held at district festivals. Vocal ensembles, with the exception of the triple trio, are limited to

two per part. The maximum number of participants for any ensemble, except triple trio, is eight. Districts will regulate their

own events.

a. Vocal Events

1) Large Ensembles: Men’s Choir, Women’s Choir, Show Choir/Vocal Jazz, Mixed Chorus,

Madrigal (Mixed group of voices of not less than eight or more than 16 performers and must perform

madrigal music.)

2) Small Ensembles: may include any combination of voices from 2-9 provided no more than 3 per part.

3) Solos

b. Instrumental Events

1) Large Ensembles: Band, Orchestra, String Orchestra, Jazz Band

2) Small Conducted Ensembles: Brass Choir, String Ensemble, Woodwind Choir, Percussion Ensemble

Instrumental Jazz, Guitar Ensemble

3) Small Ensembles

Duets

Brass Sextet

Brass Quartet (2 cornets, horn and trombone, however trombone, baritone, bass or cornet may be

submitted for the third or fourth part.)

Brass Quintet (2 cornets and three of horn, trombone, baritone, or tuba.)

Bb Clarinet Trio

Bb Clarinet Quartet

Mixed Clarinet Quartet (2 B Flats, Alto and Bass or 3 B Flats and 1 Bass)

Percussion Ensembles

Flute Trio

Flute Quartet

French Horn Quartet

Piano Quartet (violin, viola, cello, piano)

Saxophone Quartet

Saxophone Sextet

String Sextet

String Quartet

String Trio

String Quintet (any combination, may include piano)

Violin Trio and Quartet

Viola Trio and Quartet

Cello Trio and Quartet

Trombone Trio

Trombone Quartet

Woodwind Quintet (flute, oboe, clarinet, horn, and bassoon)

Woodwind Trio (any three different woodwind instruments)

4) Solos

Alto Clarinet Marimba

Alto Saxophone Oboe

B Flat Clarinet Piano

Baritone Horn Piccolo

Baritone Saxophone Snare Drum

Bass Clarinet String Bass

Bassoon Tenor Saxophone

[84]

Cello Trombone

Cornet Trumpet

English Horn Tuba

Euphonium Tympani

Flute Vibraphone

Guitar (acoustic) Viola

Harp Violin

Horn Xylophone

8.2.5 STATE STRING CLINIC

The String Clinic Orchestras are organized to provide an opportunity for high school aged students of the violin, viola, cello, bass

and harp to participate in a program designed to enrich their orchestra experience through membership in a large orchestra under

the direction of guest conductors of recognized excellence.

Eligibility

Student string musicians from any accredited high school in Wyoming are eligible and welcome, whether or not there is an orchestra

program at their school.

1. Site Selection

The State String Clinic is typically held on the first Monday and Tuesday of November. During the current year’s clinic, the

host school will be selected for the next year’s event.

2. Duties of the host school

a. Appoint one person who will serve as site chair.

b. Select the guest clinician/conductors (3) for the three orchestras: A Orchestra (highest level), B Orchestra, and

C Orchestra. The conductor of the C group will be a current active Wyoming music educator whose emphasis is

strings.

c. Select, in consultation with other string teachers and the guest conductors, musical selections that will be

included in the clinic repertoire.

d. Notify all schools of the musical selections prior to the summer break in order for them to order their own music

for B & C Orchestra.

e. In spring, the Host Chair will order the music for the "A" Orchestra, based on the assumption of one part from

each school (i.e., 1-1st violin, 1-2nd violin, 1-viola, 1-cello and 1-bass). The cost of this music will be included in

the pro-rated cost of the clinic.

f. Send one copy of each part to each string program by September 1. Fingerings and bowings provided by the

guest conductors should be included in this mailing. (Original scores for this music may be purchased by the

individual directors if so desired).

g. Collect the music on the concert night and send to the All-State Music Library in Cheyenne.

h. Arrange for suitable rehearsal and concert sites.

i. Provide out of town participants with information on housing and eating establishments.

j. Publish a complete schedule of events including times, locations, and instructions no later than September 30

to enable all participants ample time to make plans for travel, housing, meals, and any other arrangements.

k. Pay the guest conductors in a timely fashion immediately upon conclusion of the State String Clinic.

l. Arrange for the printed concert program.

m. Be responsible for keeping records of guest conductor’s expenses and the cost of the "A" Orchestra music so

that each school can be billed on a pro-rata basis for their participating students.

8.2.6 WYOMING STATE MARCHING BAND FESTIVAL

Wyoming State Marching is designed to promote and enhance music education in the State of Wyoming through the marching arts.

Performance opportunities are designed to give new, developing, and experienced ensembles educational feedback to improve the

quality of their ensemble. It is the responsibility of the elected WMEA Marching Band Chair to organize the event with a consistent

approach in mind to help students demonstrate their best!

PURPOSE

Bands should expect consistent procedures to exist in all the sponsored Festivals and Competitions. From the moment students and

staff get off the bus to re-boarding their buses at the end of the event they should be treated with respect and provided with the very

best and consistent warm-up procedure, performance opportunity, judging equality and overall educational experience possible.

The Wyoming State Marching Band Festival is open to all Wyoming high school bands through grade 12. Classifications, as

recognized by the WHSAA shall be utilized. An entry fee of $100.00 per band will be assessed to defray expenses.

8.2.61 SITE SELECTION

The WHSAA has determined that Casper will be the site for the State Marching Contest. The event will be held indoors at the Ford

Wyoming Center. Formerly known as the Casper Events Center according to dates contracted with the Events Center in alignment

with week 15 of the WHSAA calendar.

[85]

8.2.62 DEFINITIONS

PERFORMERS

1. All performers must be students of the band program.

1A. Scholastic Bands are permitted to have a director or staff member conduct; however, at least one student drum major should

direct if the ensemble is larger than 30 performers. Open division bands must be conducted by students or omit a conductor entirely.

No directors or staff members are permitted to conduct in the open division.

1B. Bands are allowed to include homeschooled students and students from schools that don’t offer marching bands so long as an

official Combination School Agreement has been made with the administrators of each school filed with the WHSAA.

1C. Band programs may include students that are not enrolled in the class so long as the proper arrangements are made with

administrators of each school. (examples might include; color guard members, students enrolled in another music class

strings/choir, guitar, or similar)

2. Adults are permitted in the performance area to assist student performers with mobility limitations.

3. Directors and Staff are permitted to enter the performance area to troubleshoot electronic or prop malfunctions during the

performance but should not directly contribute to the performance from inside the performance area.

4. In the event of a student safety concern or injury, adults may enter the performance area to assist as necessary.

5. Volunteers are allowed to assist in the process of moving equipment on or off the field but must vacate the performance area

between drum major salutes.

6. Directors or staff may manipulate electronic devices during the performance from outside the performance area. (Example:

outside the front sideline with a mixer or from the stands with a tablet or other device)

DIVISION

Grouping of ensembles chosen at the time of registration Scholastic or Open.

CLASSIFICATION

Grouping of ensembles into classes based on school enrollment.

BAND - All members of the participating unit including playing members, auxiliary personnel (flags, rifles, majorettes, drill teams,

etc.) and command personnel (drum majors, color guard captains, etc.)

PERFORMANCE REGULATIONS

8.2.63 COMPETITIVE AREA

The performance area inside the Casper Events Center will be smaller than a regulation size football field. Length of the field will be

180 feet (60 yards or 20 yard line to 20 yard line) and the width will be 107 feet (front sideline to back hash-marks). Distances from

the front side line to the near hash marks and from the near hash-marks to the far hash marks will be the same as on a regulation

size football field 53’4”.

Special considerations - The front sideline is approximately 8 and one-half feet from the seating area wall and the back hash is

approximately two and one-half feet from the back wall , a curtain runs the length of the 15 yard line on side one, and the

horseshoe seating area cuts off the back portion of the 20 yard line approximately halfway between the hashes extending backfield

on side two.

Power is available at the 50 yard line along the front wall.

Staging and Warm-up Areas

Parking lots

Warming up outside of the venue is permitted so long as traffic flow is not impeded.

Bands should refrain from the use of wireless microphone systems in the warm up area.

Pre-Warm Up Room

This area on the 2nd floor of the events center is open to the concourse so please do not play or manipulate color guard equipment.

Only the band scheduled for the pre-warm up room may be in the room. You can see from the back lot through the window when a

band leaves. That is your cue to take the room.

Warm-Up Room

Please have the door closed.

[86]

Staging Area (Tunnel/Backstage Area)

Bands should position themselves to take the field in the tunnel to enter on side two and/or the area on side one behind the curtain

on side one while the band before them is performing on the floor.

This area is SILENT... not quiet. Please be respectful of the performing band while in this tunnel area.

Prop/Front Ensemble Staging

Due to limited space backstage on side one, props and front ensemble equipment is not permitted inside the building until your band

enters to go to the pre-warm up room.

Each band must designate a student or adult to stay with equipment once it is inside the building.

Any props or equipment larger than a double door has the option of using roll up garage doors on side one operated by event

volunteers.

At the conclusion of the performance, all bands must remove all equipment and props from the building completely. No equipment is

allowed to be stored in the building before or after the performance. This includes storing instruments in the concourses of the

events center.

8.2.64 FIELD ENTRANCE/EXIT

Performance Procedure

Times established on the schedule will be strictly followed. Bands will not be allowed to encroach on another bands time before or

after the performance. All members of the band must wait for their performance window to enter the performance area. This

includes front ensemble, props, and color guards needing additional time to set equipment.

Bands may enter the performance area when the event announcer introduces the group. “Please welcome to the field _insert band

name here_” A field entrance may be made from the tunnel on side two, backfield side one, or front field side one.

As part of the registration process, bands will provide a script to the event coordinator for the announcer to read before each

performance. Bands may opt to include their musical selections, show theme, student leaders, soloists, etc in this script. or have

nothing announced as they take the field.

The event announcer will wait to see the drum majors in position before making the next statement

“Drum majors; _insert drum majors names here__, is your band ready?” - this statement may be omitted if desired.

Announcer awaits the salute

“Presenting their ___insert year here___ production, ___insert show title here___, the Wyoming High School Activities Association

is proud to present drum majors _insert drum majors names here_ and the ___insert school and band name here___”

At the conclusion of the show

The __insert band name here___ is under the direction of _insert directors and staff; names here_ Drum majors; _insert drum

major names here_ . “Join us in celebrating the year these students have had.” (Or similar celebratory statement added to the script)

Bands exiting the field must follow the event flow designated by the event coordinator. Bands should exit the performance area

expeditiously at the end of their performance so as to not delay the event or interfere with the next band. The band may elect to exit

the field using a percussion cadence.

Award Retreat

Following the performance schedule, each band must have a student representative such as drum major, color guard captain,

and/or student leaders, report to the floor for the awards retreat. Please limit the number of representative leadership to five

students or less to make enough space for all the bands.

8.2.65 TIMING

All bands must report to the designated reporting location at their reporting time so that they will be ready to step off at their starting

time. All bands must be on and off the floor within their 15 minute time slot. This time may include an on field warm-up or concert

selection(s). Judging will begin with the salute from the drum major and conclude with a final salute when the band finishes their

performance.

PENALTIES

The penalty for exceeding the 15 minute window in any space (pre-warm up, warm up, performance area) is 1 point for every

second over the 15 minutes. This time will be documented by event volunteers and the announcer and communicated to the

tabulator for possible score deductions.

8.2.66 JUDGES

[87]

Six judges shall be used.

1. Music Judge 1

2. Music Judge 2

3. Percussion

4. Marching Judge 1

5. Marching Judge 2

6. Color Guard

SCORING SYSTEM

Scoring With Color Guard Without Color Guard:

860-688 - I Superior 700-560 - I Superior

687- 516 - II Excellent 559-420 - II Excellent

515-0 - III Good 419-0 - III Good

Point Allotment:

360 - Music

300/240 - Marching

100 - Percussion

100 - Auxiliary

Scoring totals and caption target score 85%

Percussion

Winds

Color Guard

Marching

Marching no Guard

Outstanding Music

160/

300/

240/

460/

136

255

204

391

Caption selection is as follows.

Percussion- percussion judge and music judges

Winds- music judges

Color guard- color guard judge and marching judges

Marching- marching judges

Outstanding Music- percussion and music judges

Adding up all of the scores, and subtracting any penalty points will determine the final rating. Trophies/plaques will be awarded to

each band with a superior rating and an excellent rating. Bands receiving a good rating will receive a certificate.

Should it occur for any reason that a member of the performing band fall to the ground, there will be no penalty for the fall or the

return to an upright position to resume marching. This festival does not include an inspection.

Performing band directors may contact the starter or the festival coordinator. Directors may not contact any other judge during the

festival.

When bands are not performing it is recommended that they sit in their assigned seating area. It is the responsibility of each

program director to monitor student behavior.

Captions will be awarded to bands in the following areas. Percussion, Winds, Color Guard, Marching and Outstanding Music. If no

band receives a high enough score in any caption, then the caption award will be given to the two highest scoring bands in that

caption.

Music total point 85%

Percussion

Winds

Color Guard

Marching

Marching no Guard

Outstanding Music

160

320

160

300

240

620

136

272

136

255

204

527

Caption selection is as following.

Percussion- percussion judge and music judges

Woodwind- music judges

Brass- music judges

Color guard- color guard judge and marching judges

Marching- marching judges

Outstanding Music- percussion and music judges

Adding up all of the scores, and subtracting any penalty points will determine the final rating. Bands will perform against their own

class. Trophies will be awarded to each band with a superior rating and an excellent rating. Bands receiving a good rating will

receive a certificate.

Should it occur for any reason that a member of the performing band fall to the ground, there will be no penalty for the fall or the

return to an upright position to resume marching. Any director is also permitted to be on the field at this time.

This festival does not include an inspection.

Performing band directors may contact the starter to the festival director. Directors may not contact any other judge during the

festival.

[88]

A band exhibiting any extraordinary behavior for which no specific rule or penalty is provided shall be penalized for each such

violation at the discretion of the individual judge observing such behavior. (This includes talking by anyone other than command

personnel.) When bands are not performing it is recommended that they sit in their assigned seating area.

8.2.67 REGISTRATION

Registration opens at 7:30am on the second Tuesday of September and will close at 7:30am on the second Wednesday of

September.

It is the responsibility of the marching band chair to create the State Marching schedule. Any band will have 7 days from the release

of the schedule to address any schedule related issues with the marching band chairperson for possible changes. After the 7 day

period, the final schedule will be posted on the WHSAA website and no changes will be made.

Performance Order

Bands will perform in reverse order of score from the previous year. Lowest score performing first and highest score performing last

regardless of classification. All Scholastic Class (halftime) bands will perform in the first portion of the event. Open Class bands will

perform in the second portion of the event.

8.2.68 FESTIVAL/COMPETITION

TBA

8.2.69 USE OF NATIONAL COLORS

Use of the National Colors is optional.

Should a unit opt to use the National Flag(s), the following guidelines are recommended for its use.

Use of these guidelines shall not be authority, either expressed or implied, to violate any national, state, or provincial laws at

variance with them.

1. The bearer of the National Flag, while in possession of the National Flag, shall never engage in any dance or theatrical steps.

2. The National Flag shall never be permitted to touch the ground.

3. The National Flag shall always be afforded the general respect and dignity associated with our National Symbol.

8.2.7 ALL-STATE MUSIC GROUPS

Outstanding students will be selected to All-State Honor Groups for band, orchestra, and choir. These groups will present a joint

concert in conjunction with the Wyoming Music Educators Association's Annual State Conference. This conference and clinic are

normally held the third Monday and Tuesday in January.

8.2.72 SELECTION OF ALL-STATE SITES

Schools wishing to host All-State should submit their request to the WMEA Executive Board at the spring board meeting 18 months

prior to All-State. The WMEA Board will make a final decision and forward the information to the WHSAA. Host sites have typically

been chosen following this alphabetic rotation schedule: Casper, Cheyenne, Cody, Evanston, Gillette, Laramie, Sheridan.

Host-sites for the All-State Music Conference should be able to provide the following facilities:

1. Rehearsal rooms for 120-150 piece band, 150-200 voice choir, and 100-150 piece orchestra.

2. Concert facility for the above groups with seating for 1500 for the All-State Gala Concert.

3. Securable display area the size of a small gym.

4. Housing and meal facilities for 800.

5. Conference facilities for 350, including 10 – 12 meeting rooms, technology, hospitality and equipment.

8.2.73 ORGANIZATION OF ALL-STATE

The WMEA President will coordinate all activities at All-State.

The WMEA President-elect will be in charge of exhibits.

The Host-Site Chair(s) will be in charge of all arrangements at the All-State site.

Band, Orchestra, and Choir Vice Presidents will each organize their respective performing group and be responsible for selecting

the guest conductor for said group. As soon as a tentative agreement is reached with the guest conductor, the WHSAA should be

contacted to send out contracts and make arrangements for housing, travel, and fees. The Band, Orchestra, and Choir Vice

Presidents shall select the participants in the All-State Honor Groups.

8.2.74 DUTIES OF HOST SCHOOL, HOST-SITE CHAIR(S) AND COMMITTEES

1. Arrange for rehearsal and concert facilities.

2. Arrange for all necessary physical equipment such as music stands, chairs, choral risers, pianos, etc.

3. Arrange for noon meals for student participants if deemed necessary.

4. Arrange for the student banquet Monday evening.

[89]

5. Arrange for rooms for sectionals and chair placements.

6. Arrange for the printing of the All-State Gala Concert and Host Night Concert programs and tickets.

7. Arrange for ticket sellers, ticket takers, and program passers for the All-State Gala Concert.

8. Arrange for space and security for the exhibit area.

9. Arrange for necessary help to administer the conference. Local expenses such as janitorial services, furnishing ticket

takers, security, facilities, hospitality, graphics and secretarial services shall be paid by the host school district in lieu of

travel expenses which that school district would have incurred had All-State been held in another community.

10. Submit a complete financial report to the WHSAA office and the WMEA Manager upon conclusion of the conference.

11. Complete details and requirements can be found in the WMEA All-State Host Site Manual.

8.2.75 WMEA ALL-STATE SELECTION PROCEDURES

1. Students in grades 9-12 only are eligible to audition for All-State Honor Groups. They must apply through the appropriate

school music teacher. Students, including home school and virtual school, must be enrolled in a school group

corresponding to the All-State group for which they apply unless an appropriate group does not exist. Students must be

enrolled both at the time of application AND at the time of the All-State event. Members of the performing groups will be

chosen by live, recorded audition.

2. General Audition procedures for All-State Honor Groups – Instructions for Member School’s Music Directors and Site

Chairs.

a. Audition materials are posted to the All-State section of the WMEA by the 1st Monday in September. The link to

the registration web site is included in this information.

b. An online registration should be completed for each student by Monday of Week 16. All-state registration closes

at 11:59 PM on Monday of Week 16. Once a student is entered, they may not be removed and the registration

fee is attached to that student entry. No registrations accepted after the registration window closes.

c. Schools are billed for all registered students.

d. Schools must provide proof of payment by Thursday of Week 17 through the WMEA website. Payments may be

in the form of a credit card or purchase order/voucher upload. Payments by check must reach the WMEA office

by Thursday of Week 18. Checks or vouchers are made payable to Wyoming Music Educators Association.

e. Student auditions not paid by Thursday or Week 17 will not be considered for selection to the All-State Honor

Groups.

f. Fees must be paid by group or school (i.e. 1 payment for Douglas Schools, or 1 payment for Laramie Choir).

g. The fee, per student, is $10.00.

h. Payment may be in the form of a school voucher, school check, cashier’s check, money order or director’s

personal check. Student payments are not accepted.

3. Site Chair Responsibilities

Specific procedures for site chairs can be found in the All-State Recording Site Manual at

http://www.wyomea.org/wyomea_all_state.html

a. By the Monday of Week 15, check the registration site at http://bandworld.org/AuditionFileUpload.aspx

b. Download the list of students registered for the site and email the list to the directors.

Auditions must be held between the Friday of week 18 and the Saturday of week 19 on the WHSAA Calendar.

Select the dates for your site and inform the participating schools.

c. Create a master schedule of audition times and places and inform participating schools.

d. Secure all equipment needed for each recording and uploading of auditions.

e. Secure two monitors for each recording room. These must be adults, not students.

f. Provide space, with computer(s), for students to log in and check their recording immediately following their

audition.

g. Review the list of fees invoiced by the Executive Director and sent to host chairs by the 4th Tuesday in October.

h. On the day of the auditions, collect the audition fees (vouchers, check, etc.).

i. Record the students and upload their recordings to the web site. (Please see the All-State Recording Site

Manual for complete audition instructions.)

j. Complete all file uploads by 10:00 PM on Saturday of week 18 on the WHSAA Calendar.

k. Maintain a backup copy of each recording.

l. Complete online Reporting Form by Wednesday of week 19 on the WHSAA calendar.

m. It is the site chair’s responsibility to disqualify any student or school that violated the integrity of the audition

process.

n. It is the site chair’s responsibility to be familiar with the All-State Recording Site Manual and follow the

guidelines within it.

4. Selection and Notification Process

a. Vice Presidents may begin listening to and evaluation audition on the Monday of week 19 and continue through

the Saturday of week 20 on the WHSAA Calendar.

b. Vice Presidents have online access to the student names after Monday of week 21.

c. The Vice Presidents make selections for the All-State Honor Groups and provide a detailed list to the WHSAA

and WMEA by Friday of week 21.

d. The WMEA informs director of their individual student results via email on Monday of Week 22.

e. The WHSAA makes the official All-State rosters public on Tuesday of Week 22 via online posting at

www.whsaa.org.

[90]

f. The WHSAA Official Entry Form submission deadline is December 15. The form is located in the All-State

section of the WMEA website.

5. Facilities and Equipment Needed for Audition Site

a. Warm-up room.

b. Audition room(s) determined by the site chair.

c. Storage room for cases.

d. A registration desk (distribute and collect audition cards, record cancellations, and confirm times).

e. Recorders and two microphones, one mic records the student, the other for announcer.

f. Music stands in the audition room(s).

g. Piano, tuned at A=440 for vocal audition rooms.

h. Metronome for each audition room.

i. Percussion instruments in the audition room should include: 4 Tympani (23” 26" 29" & 32”), xylophone, and

snare drum.

j. Students supply sticks, mallets, or their own instruments if they wish.

k. Each student must supply their own wind instruments, audition material and anything else needed for the

audition..

6. Audition Procedures

a. Two monitors for each audition room must be music educators. One person informs the student of the recording

procedure and leads them through the audition; the other person runs the recording device.

b. A registrar (probably the site chair) to recheck the students when they show up for their audition. Give each

student a card with his/her audition number (as assigned in the audition master sheet) on it to present to the

monitor.

c. Student helpers call students auditioning from the warm up room and to help keep the schedule on time.

d. All students must be recorded during the designated time span - any exceptions may be worked out with the

site chair as long as the deadline for uploading the auditions is met.

e. Build an appropriate schedule for recording auditions with breaks; percussion may require longer.

f. Audition schedule should be posted in the warm-up room and audition room.

g. Recording may not be paused once you have started the auditions.

h. Any entry submitted after the registration window closes will not be allowed to audition or be a part of the

master schedule.

i. Directors may be in the audition room with their students as a silent observer. The director may record the

audition to evaluate with the student at a later time.

j. The tempo should be given only for the sight-reading.

7. All-State Band Tryout Materials

a. Students will play two major scales and arpeggios from memory. The WMEA band vice president will select

two major scales for each instrument from the scale sheet (Db, Ab, Eb, Bb, F, C, G, D, A, E, B, F#). The two

scales will be announced on Friday of week 16 (one week before the first recording day). The scales and

arpeggios must be performed as written on the scale sheet and memorized. Note the rhythm, articulation and

tempo on the scale sheet.

b. A chromatic scale must be performed as written on the scale sheet. Note the rhythm, articulation and tempo on

the scale sheet. The chromatic scale must be performed by memory. Scale sheets will be provided with the

audition materials.

c. Two contrasting etudes (technical and lyrical) will be posted on the first Monday of September at

www.wyomea.org

. The etudes will be selected from four sets, rotated annually, so that no students will

audition on the same materials twice.

d. A sight-reading exercise selected by the Band Vice President, demonstrating the student’s knowledge of

rhythms, articulations and dynamics.

e. Percussion students will audition on snare drum, timpani and mallets.

f. The mallet audition will include an etude, the chromatic scale and major scales with arpeggios.

g. The snare audition will include an etude and a double stoke roll. The Double Stroke roll is played slow - fast -

slow. The roll should be played as fast as possible but not so fast that it becomes a buzz roll. A buzz roll is a

separate rudiment.

h. The timpani audition will include an etude. Tuning of the timpani should be done on the recording. Students are

not allowed to tune before the audition recording has started. The room Supervisor will clear pitches after the

audition.

i. Sight-reading will be performed on either snare drum or the mallets. Students may choose which instrument

better reflects their percussion abilities.

j. Students auditioning who have an interest or ability to play piccolo, English horn, or bass trombone must

perform the additional chromatic scale. At the end of the normal audition, the student will then add the extra

chromatic scale for that instrument. The student will have 30 seconds to warm-up on that instrument.

8. All-State Orchestra Tryout Material

a. During All-Northwest years, the scales will be the same instrument appropriate scales for both auditions. On

alternating years, the scales will be taken from the repertoire of that year and performed in the same format.

b. Students will play two scales, beginning and ending with a “Galamian” turn, in the following keys:

Violin—

[91]

1) Three-octave A Major scale, in sixteenth notes, ascending and descending, slur eight (8)

notes per bow. Quarter note = 88.

2) Three-octave A Melodic Minor scale, in sixteenth notes, ascending and descending,

detaché. Quarter note=88.

Viola—

1) Three-octave D Major scale, in sixteenth notes, ascending and descending, slur eight (8)

notes per bow. Quarter note = 88.

2) Three-octave D Melodic Minor scale, in sixteenth notes, ascending and descending,

detaché. Quarter note=88.

Cello—

1) Three-octave D Major scale, in sixteenth notes, ascending and descending, slur eight (8)

notes per bow. Quarter note = 72.

2) Three-octave E Melodic Minor scale, in sixteenth notes, ascending and descending,

detaché. Quarter note=60.

Bass—

1) Two-octave F Major scale, in sixteenth notes, ascending and descending. Quarter note =

72.

2) Two-octave E Melodic Minor scale, in sixteenth notes, ascending and descending, detaché.

Quarter note=60.

Scale sheets will be provided with the audition materials. Scales do not need to be memorized.

c. Two contrasting excerpts from the All-State literature, chosen by the Orchestra Vice-president (supplied in the

first Monday of September posting at www.wyomea.org).

d. A sight reading exercise selected by the Orchestra Vice-president that demonstrates the students' knowledge of

rhythms, bowings, and dynamics.

9. All-State Choir Tryout Material

a. Sing two scales, using solfege syllables, (do, re, mi, fa, sol, la, ti, do) and take a breath at the top of the scale.

Repeat the top ‘do’ when singing the descending scale (do, ti, la, sol, fa, mi, re, do). The starting pitches for

each part are listed below. Quarter note rhythm, with a tempo of MM 72

Low High

Soprano I F (1st space) A (2nd space)

Soprano II D (below staff) G (2nd line)

Alto I A (below mid C) Eb (1st line)

Alto II G (below mid C) D (above mid C)

Tenor I Db (3rd line) Ab (5th line)

Tenor II C (2nd space) F (4th line)

Bass I G (1st line) Eb (3rd space)

Bass II F (below staff) D (3rd line)

b. Chromatic Vocalise:

Vocalise #1 (All-Northwest years)

Sing the chromatic arpeggio pattern 1-3-5-8-7-5-4-2-1 on the neutral syllables Mah, Oh, Oo in eighth notes. At

the end of the pattern modulate up a half step, then take a breath and repeat the pattern for a total of 7 times.

Each of the patterns must be sung on one legato breath. A breath may be taken after the modulation.

Starting pitches for Chromatic Vocalise #1:

Soprano B (below the treble staff)

Alto A (2 ledger lines below treble staff)

Tenor B (2nd line bass clef)

Bass A (2nd space-bass clef)

Vocalise #2 (non-All-Northwest years)

Sing the chromatic arpeggio pattern 8-5-3-1-3-5-8-5-3-1 using one legato syllable Mah, in eighth note triplets at

the tempo of 76mm. At the end of the Mah pattern, sing modulation up a half step, then take a breath and

repeat the pattern for a total of 6 times.

Starting pitches for Vocalise #2:

Soprano C (third space)

Alto G (second line)

Tenor C (middle C)

ass G (fourth space)

c. Students will sing two excerpts from the All-State literature, chosen by the Choir Vice-president (supplied in the

first Monday of September posting at

www.wyomea.org)

[92]

d. A sight-reading exercise selected by the Choir Vice-president, demonstrating the student's knowledge of

rhythms, intervals, and dynamics.

8.2.78 WHSAA RESPONSIBILITIES

1. Guest conductor contracts, fees, housing, and travel by June 1.

2. Provide WHSAA audition letter to WMEA Executive Director by Sept. 1.

3. Arrange for student nametags and shoulder patches.

4. Post to the WHSAA website the participants selected for All-State on Tuesday of Week 22.

5. Provide official entry forms, and other information to WMEA Manager for posting to WMEA website.

6. Accompanist fees.

7. Prompt payment of All-State guest conductors' fees and expenses and student banquet expenses.

8. Final determination of eligibility of participants.

8.2.79 ALL-NORTHWEST MUSIC CONFERENCE

Wyoming students, providing their school music director is a member in good standing of NAfME (National Association for Music

Education), shall be eligible to participate in the NAfME All Northwest band, orchestra, or choir if selected. Wyoming music groups

may perform at the NAfME All-Northwest Conference providing they follow audition procedures and are duly selected. Expenses for

the above participants are the responsibility of the individual(s) involved and/or their local school district.

8.3.0 SPEECH

8.3.1 PHILOSOPHY

The Wyoming Speech and Debate Association and The Wyoming High School Activities Association believe that speech, as an

activity, offers an unexcelled potential for promoting the democratic ideal. It follows that speech activities programs should be broad

enough to provide adequate areas for maximum student participation. Furthermore, opportunities should be provided for each

student to take an active part at the level of his or her ability to communicate.

An effective speech training program is designed to create a responsible citizen by offering realistic situations requiring judicious

listening, intelligent speaking, and mature patterns of behavior. With proper guidance and motivation, a student, through the many

speech activities, soon begins to develop leadership abilities and express ideas reasonably and persuasively. Through various

speech experiences, a student should become more confident and poised.

By competing with contemporaries in the areas of communication, a student soon learns the value of careful preparation, disciplined

rehearsal, and appreciation for excellence. It is necessary that everyone visualizes speech tournaments and interscholastic meets

not as ends in themselves, but as important teaching devices. They provide the means by which students and teachers can

evaluate the strengths and weaknesses of presentations. By correcting weaknesses and by capitalizing on strengths, students are

guided into self-improvement programs.

8.3.2 GENERAL RULES

These are the expectations for all WHSAA High School Speech and Debate competitions held in the State of Wyoming. Rules

specifically governing the State Tournament may differ and are sited below. Programs and/or individuals found in violation of these

rules will be reported to the WHSAA for appropriate actions toward the school/program.

A. The Number of Allowable Speech and Debate Tournaments:

Each high school student is allowed seventeen preliminary meets a year. Of those meets, a maximum of twelve meets

may be in person, plus the State Speech and Debate Tournament and National Speech and Debate Association (NSDA)

National Qualifying Tournament (Districts). Competing as a novice (a novice competitor is similar to a junior varsity

competitor in other activities) counts toward this total. Out-of-state tournaments count toward this total.

1. This means each individual competitor is allowed to attend ten tournaments, plus the State Tournament and

NSDA National Qualifying Tournament. Out-of-state tournaments also count toward these totals.

2. Schools that violate this rule will not be allowed to compete for team Sweepstakes awards at the season's State

Tournament and will be reported to the WHSAA for appropriate actions.

B. The Speech and Debate Tournament Season:

The speech and debate tournament season will run from the Friday of WHSAA calendar week 17 through the NSDA

National Qualifying Tournament or the State Tournament, whichever is later. Workshop events may be held at any time. A

“workshop” is an event primarily educational in nature, intended to give students a feel for how tournaments are run, and

where no final individual or team placings are tabulated or NSDA points entered for the student, other than service points.

C. Wyoming High School State Forensics Association Membership (WHSFA):

Any interested Wyoming school may become a voting member of the Wyoming Speech and Debate Association by

paying an annual fee of $35.00. Any individual person may become a member by paying their $35.00 fee.

D. Participating and Voting:

[93]

Each school in good standing may exercise a vote on matters coming before the WHSFA and fully participate at the State

Tournament. Each school has only one vote. Schools must be members in good standing prior to the State Tournament

meeting. “In good standing” means:

1. The school has paid its fees to the WHSFA before the first coaches meeting at the state tournament

2. Schools have not had students who have attended more than the maximum number of allowed tournaments

3. Schools have not knowingly entered varsity competitors into junior varsity competition.

4. Any individual person may become a member by paying their $35 fee, entitling them to attend all meetings and

conferences, voice their positions and ideas, but may not vote on issues put before the voting membership.

Each voting member school is allowed only one vote per school.

E. Novice Competitor definition: Any student who has competed in ANY debate event at four tournaments or fewer in the

previous season will be considered a novice debater in Congressional Debate, Lincoln-Douglas Debate, Public Forum

Debate and Cross Examination Debate. Tournament directors and coaches will abide by the following agreements:

disqualifying students who; run affirmative cases outside of the novice case limits established by the NFHS, do not follow

the timelines and parameters of novice cases, use arguments like topicality, counter-plans and critiques before the end of

the novice season. The novice season for all events will occur from the Saturday of WHSAA calendar week 17 through

the end of December. It is the Tournament Director’s responsibility to inform any out of state teams entering debaters at

Wyoming tournaments what these requirements are. This could be adequately done in a tournament invitation.

A novice individual events competitor is defined as anyone who has competed in four tournaments or less, regardless of

the individual event(s) they previously competed in.

F. Lincoln-Douglas Debate Topics:

Each year the Lincoln-Douglas debate topic that will be debated at all Wyoming tournaments will be the topic listed on the

NSDA website. In late February, tournament hosts are encouraged to use the March/April topic at their tournaments

G. Cross-Examination Debate Topic:

Each year the Policy Debate topic designated by the National Federation of High School Activities (NFHS) and the NSDA

will be used at all Wyoming tournaments for the entire season.

H. Public Forum Debate:

Each month the public forum debate topic is designated by the NSDA as posted on their website and will be used at all

Wyoming tournaments for that month. In late February, tournament hosts are encouraged to use the March topic at their

tournaments.

I. Congressional Debate:

Any WHSFA member school hosting an event should be resolved to publish legislation used in Congressional Debate

competition at their competition no later than the Sunday evening prior to the start of their event. All legislation should be

submitted to the hosting school in a google doc format prior to the deadline given by the Tournament Director.

J. WHSAA Obscenity Clause

CHOICE OF MATERIAL:

It is strongly recommended that coaches use good judgment in selection of the material that is high school appropriate.

Judges and community members may be offended, the reputation of the team may be tarnished and competitors may be

ranked lower because of their choice in selections.

Obscenity Clause and Procedure for Grievance:

It is up to each school’s coaching staff to determine that each piece brought to Wyoming high school competitions is not

significantly offensive and that the obscenity, as defined by the Supreme Court of the United States of America, has been

eliminated. Any incident of obscenity clause violation must be reported to a member of the WHSFA executive committee

as soon as reasonably possible.

In the event of a reported incident, the WHSFA Executive Committee will:

a. Contact the coach to investigate the reported violation and to advise the coach about appropriate

action. It will then be decided to move forward or to drop the grievance. Students performing material

against their coach’s advice and approval should be removed from competition.

b. In the event that a resolution is not attained, the Executive Committee may choose to contact the

administration of the school to discuss the incident and decide what further action needs to occur at

that level.

c. If the Executive Committee and administration of the offending school deem it appropriate, the

WHSFA Executive Committee officers will provide a written statement to WHSAA regarding the

conditions and pertinent information about the infraction.

d. WHSAA will review written statements and decide what further actions are necessary:

1. Charges dropped

2. Meeting with coach and administrative representative and WHSAA Board

3. Removal of WHSAA placing or All-State accolades

4. Warning/Probation (If persistent complaints possible suspension from competition

K. Public Observation

[94]

All speech and debate performances that are part of regular tournament competition are open to public observation and,

with the exception of legal limitations, there shall be no restriction as to who may watch, take notes, or “flow” the round.

Audio and video recording, or internet streaming is not allowed unless approved in advance by the WHSFA officer body.

L. Artificial Intelligence

In Wyoming Speech and Debate, generative artificial intelligence should not be cited as a source; while something like ChatGPT

may be used to guide students to articles, ideas, and sources, the original source of any quoted or paraphrased evidence must be

available if requested. Students are prohibited from quoting or paraphrasing text directly from generative AI sources like ChatGPT in

events in which speeches must be the original created work of a competitor.

M. Tournament Hosting

In order to compete for sweeps at the Wyoming State Tournament, a team must have hosted or co-hosted a regular

season tournament within that competitive season. Head coaches can apply for exemptions. The exemption process

would be determined and enforced by WHSFA and WHSAA.

N. Tournament Schedule

Tournament schedules will be set for the following competitive season by the end of May in the school year prior. This

means that each team hosting a tournament will have their tournaments locked in for the upcoming year by June 1st.

O. Intent to Attend

Individual teams will finalize and communicate intended tournament attendance for the upcoming year at the Fall Coaches

Conference.

P. Sweepstakes Eligibility

In order to compete for sweeps at the Wyoming State Tournament, a school must show they have attended at least 51%

of their tournaments in Wyoming. This would be determined/enforced by WHSFA and WHSAA. A section will be added to

the registration process for State where schools would fill out their tournaments attended that season.

Q. School Classification

Active Speech and Debate programs will be split into three classifications 4A, 3A, 1A/2A. Active will be defined as a

program that has paid WHSAA dues & has hired (or is in the process of hiring as confirmed by the AD for the school) a

coach for the season. All programs will be defined as active or non active as of October 15 of the current season. Active

programs will then be split into thirds based on school population size (numbers released by WHSAA based on a rolling

average. These are released at the beginning of the school year every two years. More information can be found here). If

there is an uneven number, the extra spots will be filled from the bottom up. After this date, the classifications will be

frozen for the season, meaning no program will move into another classification category for the remainder of the year. If

a program joins after October 15, they will be placed into the appropriate category based on their school population size

for the current season. This system will be reviewed each year. The classification system for the season will be released

to the coaching body and to WHSAA by the WSDA state officers by Nov. 1.

8.3.3 STATE TOURNAMENT RULES

A. State Tournament Administration

1. Preliminary Considerations in Advance of the State Tournament

The State Tournament Director will activate online registration five weeks prior to the state tournament. The WHSFA

President will send email notification to all eligible schools. The individual school's Forensic Director is responsible for

complying with the instructions therein.

State entry forms must be mailed (or emailed, as appropriate), complete in all particulars, including accompanying judge

information. Congressional Debate legislation emailed or postmarked by the deadline dates as outlined in the on line

registration procedures, in order for a school to be eligible for sweepstakes.

2. Eligibility

No entry will be accepted unless signed by the coach in charge and by the high school principal, who shall attest each

student's eligibility.

Cancellations at registration (not substitution) will cost the infringing school $20.00 for each student dropped and $50.00

in the case of each debate team (Policy, Public Forum or L-D) entry. These penalties can be avoided by contacting the

Tournament Director regarding cancellations prior to registration on Thursday before the tournament begins.

The entry form must be accompanied with the appropriate fees. There will be no refunds for those students who are

registered but do not attend.

3. Fee Schedule

School Registration Fee - $75.00

[95]

Each Cross-X Debate Team - $14.00

Each Public Forum Debate Team - $14.00

Each L-D Debate Entry - $14.00

Each Duet Interpretation Team - $14.00

Each Student Congress Entry - $ 9.00

Each Individual Event Entry Slot - $ 9.00

4. Entry Limitations

A student is limited to two events at the State Tournament. Each individual may enter the following:

• A single event

• Any two events in any pattern (excluding debates, congress, or extemp)

• A debate event, congress, or extemp and another event not scheduled at the same time.

A high school is limited to a total of 20 entry slots. Each student entered in any event slot constitutes as an entry. All team

events count as one entry. An individual student who is entered in two events counts as two entry slots. Schools may

enter their allowable 20 entry slots distributed among the various events as they wish, so long as the maximum number of

entry slots per school remains at 20.

5. Awards

Schools shall compete in the same classification as does their wrestling team or as advised by WHSAA leadership for the

year. The Wyoming High School Activities Association will provide appropriate awards for the winners in each category of

competition. The Wyoming Speech and Debate Association will be in charge of the awards ceremony.

Individual Events: 1st place through 6th place medals. All finalists shall be recognized with a medal. (Duet

Interpretation: 2 medals for each team.)

Student Congress: 1st place through 6th place medals.

Lincoln-Douglas Debate: 1st place, 2nd place, and two 3rd place medals.

Cross-X Debate: 1st place, 2nd place, and four 3rd place medals: 2 medals for each team.

Public Forum Debate: 1st place, 2nd place and four 3rd place medals: 2 medals for each team.

Sweepstakes: A sweepstakes trophy, 2nd place and 3rd place trophies will be awarded for the following

classes: Class 4A, Class 3A, Class 2A/1A. In the event that Class 1A has eight or more

schools entered in the State Tournament, then Class 1A will be awarded a separate

sweepstakes trophy.

Contestant Awards by Class: The top three contestants in each event, in each class, shall receive medals.

These classes shall be 4A, 3A, 2A/1A. These individuals will also be awarded an

“All-State” Certificate provided by the WHSFA

6. Coding

Contestants must be coded for tournament scheduling purposes. The contestant coding system shall be determined by

the Tournament Director. Name tags are not to be issued to participants.

The Tournament Director will distribute a "school code" sheet to coaches at registration.

Judges will not be coded except to indicate school affiliation.

7. Ballot Verification and School Packets

All participants' ballots shall be placed in the appropriate school's packet and be available for checking during the

designated ballot verification periods:

a. At the end of the preliminary rounds of debate and individual events (according to the tournament

schedule)

b. On the last day of the tournament, to review their school packets as needed.

No ballots are to leave the jurisdiction of the tab room. Packets will be available at the conclusion of the Awards Assembly

or, if absolutely necessary, when the school leaves the tournament.

8. Conflict Patterns

A student may not enter two events scheduled at the same time. A student may enter two events scheduled at different

times in different conflict patterns.

The following conflict pattern shall be in operation at the State Tournament:

Pattern (A): Pattern (B):

Cross-Examination Debate Extemporaneous Speaking

Lincoln-Douglas Debate Memorized Humorous Interp.

Public Forum Debate Manuscript Poetry Interp.

Memorized Dramatic Interp. Original Oratory (Memorized)

[96]

Memorized Duet Interp. Student Congress

Manuscript Program Oral Interp Informative Speaking (Memorized)

9. Adjudication Procedures

A Tournament Adjudication Committee shall be established which consists of the elected WHSFA officers and the

Tournament Director (hereinafter referred to as the Tournament Committee). The Tournament Committee shall have full

power to adjudicate any disputes and to clarify interpretations of these rules. The Tournament Committee's decision shall

be final.

Problems, questions, protests, and points of disagreement must be submitted to the Tournament Director in writing. The

Tournament Director will then arrange a meeting of the Tournament Committee.

Under exceptionally extraordinary circumstances, the Tournament Committee has the authority to modify the rules

governing the operation of the State Tournament. The exercise of such authority shall be communicated to all coaches as

soon as possible.

Should a member of the Tournament Committee be unavailable or involved as a party to a protest, the other members of

the Tournament Committee shall appoint a replacement to insure timely consideration of the issue.

In general, protests concerning debate evidence shall follow all general, currently-in-place adjudication procedures.

Specifically, the following procedures shall also apply:

a. Protests shall be filed as soon as the infraction has been noted.

b. The evidence in question shall be examined by the Tournament Committee and proof of authenticity

shall be required to be submitted within two (2) hours. This proof of authenticity shall include: original

or photocopies of the evidence and/or complete source citations of the evidence and/or other

additional substantiation as deemed necessary by the Tournament Committee.

c. Once the validity of the protest has been determined by the Tournament Committee, the burden of

proof lies with the school whose evidence has been called into question.

d. The Tournament Committee shall be accorded maximum flexibility in the exercise of their duties.

10. Late Entry to Rounds

The Tournament Director will provide the only valid permission for late entry to rounds.

11. Disqualification

The Tournament Committee has the authority to disqualify a student's continued participation in an event due to a breach

of state tournament rules. Specific infractions are indicated in these rules. As outlined herein, adjudication procedures

shall be followed.

12. Tab Room

The tab room shall be closed to all high school personnel except as necessary for the officers of the WHSFA to adjudicate

problems and answer questions and except for those coaches assigned to and serving on the tournament staff.

The executive committee will serve in an oversight role at the State Tournament. They shall be available to handle

questions and general tournament procedures.

13. Judges

Judge assignments at the State Tournament are the responsibility of the tournament staff. Except for the strike

procedures as stipulated herein, coaches and students are relieved of any further involvement in the process of assigning

judges.

a. From participating schools: Coaches and "Accompanying" Judges

The following commitment shall be required from those schools participating in the State Tournament:

6 or less entry slots:

1 judge who can judge eight rounds or a combination of judges who will judge 8 rounds.

7-12 entry slots:

2 judges who can judge 8 rounds each or a combination of judges who will judge 16 rounds

13 + entry slots:

3 judges who can judge 8 rounds each or a combination of judges who will judge 24 rounds

Schools will be obligated for judging no more than the following rounds:

6 or less entry slots: eight rounds of judging

7-12 entry slots: sixteen rounds of judging

12-20 entry slots: twenty-four rounds of judging

No school shall be required to judge rounds in excess of their commitment. Schools may provide for all rounds

of judging with as many judges as they wish to provide. They may specify which judge is to cover which part of

the obligation. No judge may be obligated to judge more than eight rounds.

[97]

Exceptions to judging requirements will be determined on a case-by-case basis at the decision of the WHSFA

Executive Committee. All exceptions will be due when State entries are due.

The Commissioner of The WHSAA shall communicate this judging requirement to the Superintendents of

Schools and/or Principals of all Wyoming high schools in advance of the State Tournament.

The entry form will require coaches to indicate which events they prefer and are competent to judge. Coaches

and "accompanying” judges will not be assigned to judge students from their own schools. Coaches and

"accompanying" judges shall receive no personal compensation for judging.

In the case of schools with co-directors of forensics, one coach must serve "personally" and the other coach

must serve as an "accompanying" judge. The intent of this rule is to prevent co-directors from sharing one

judging assignment/obligation.

Each coach should personally judge a minimum of two rounds, regardless of the number of "accompanying"

judges provided.

Each coach of a school entered in debate (either Cross-X and/or L-D) will be expected to judge debate (either

Cross-X and/or L-D) or provide an "accompanying" debate judge (either Cross-X and/or L-D).

Accompanying judges may be substituted for a different accompanying judge upon submission of a judge

information form.

Former Wyoming high school students who are one year out of high school and who were active participants in

competitive speech activities shall not be permitted to serve as "accompanying" judges.

In Congressional Debate coaches and "accompanying" judges may be assigned to judge or serve as

parliamentarian in this event.

Every judge will only judge one session. Judges in Congressional Debate may not be from schools which have

contestants entered in the event; however, only parliamentarians who have no affiliations with members in their

assigned house of congress must be used. The same parliamentarian must be used for all sessions of

congress within a given house.

Coaches and "accompanying" judges are expected to standby when they are not assigned to judge.

"Accompanying" judges should check in at the judges' table 10 minutes prior to the start of each round and, if

not assigned, should remain available within earshot until all ballots have been distributed. Coaches should be

generally available for standby purposes, also.

If an "accompanying" judge should, on a flagrant basis, fail to show up and fulfill standby responsibilities or

should fail to perform judging responsibilities in a professional manner, then a conference shall be called

involving officials of the WHSAA, the WHSFA, the Tournament Director, and the coach of the school which

brought the "accompanying" judge.

JUDGE USE PROCESS

During preliminary rounds, an attempt will be made to balance the mix of judges to maximize the probability that

every student will be judged by a judge from each of the pools.

During out rounds, panels will be balanced by using one judge from each of the four pools when four judges are

used; and three from differing pools when three judges are used. If panels are larger than four, no pool will be

used three times until all pools are used twice. The exception to this is the coach pool, as defined in this

subsection of rules, which may be assigned in excess of the pool. During semifinals and finals, all individual

judges, as designated on their judge assignment sheet, will be required to report to a designated pool area.

No judge that judges an out round of a given event, will judge an out round in the same event unless the

tournament director is able to have them judge entries they have not judged before in out rounds.

In congress, to the extent possible, the parliamentarian and the judges in that house will come from different

pools.

Judge pools will be defined as:

Hired: Those paid judges hired by the tournament director. No more than one-third (1/3) of the pool of hired

judges will be affiliated with any single college or institution; or be graduates from the same high school.

Local: T

hese judges are provided by the tournament host. No local judges will be assigned to judge students

from the hosting school or institution.

Coach: T

hese are Head Coaches and Assistant Coaches as identified by the school on their registration.

Coaches will not be scheduled during the two coaches’ meetings.

Accompanying: T

hese are the judges schools bring who are not identified as coaches. Judges not affiliated with

the host school/community [they come from other communities and are not paid] who volunteer to judge will be

assigned as accompanying judges.

b. Hired Guest Judges

The WHSAA shall determine the payment amounts and the payment system for all hired judges.

[98]

The Tournament Director shall send pertinent information from the State Tournament Rules to all hired-guest

judges in advance of the tournament. This data shall include payment information, event and tournament rules,

judging instructions, the tournament schedule, and sample ballots.

Former Wyoming high school students who are one year out of high school and who were active participants in

competitive speech activities shall not be permitted to serve as hired-guest judges. No college campus should

provide more than one-third of the hired judges.

Alumni of a particular high school shall not be permitted to judge that school unless three (3) years have

elapsed since graduation.

If a hired-guest judge should, on a flagrant basis, fail to fulfill judging responsibilities in a professional manner,

then payment (per round, mileage, per diem) from the WHSAA could be in jeopardy. This is a determination to

be made by the Tournament Committee.

c. "Walk-On" Judges

"Walk-On" judges are those individuals whom the Tournament Director did not expect to attend the State

Tournament. As a general rule, the reliance on "walk-on" judges shall be discouraged by every means possible

in advance of the tournament.

However, should "walk-ons" materialize, the following procedures and rules shall apply:

• "Walk-ons" shall be held in abeyance so that they are not permitted to judge for a period of at least 2 hours

after arrival

• During this 2 hour period, the "walk-on" judges must confer with the President of the WHSFA as to judging

procedures and criteria

• During this 2 hour period, the "walk-on" judges' names and prospective events to be judged will be posted

on the posting boards in the coaches' lounges;

• It is the responsibility of each coach to check the posting board for this data. Coaches who are judging will

be notified concerning "walk-ons"

• Coaches must contact the Tournament Director if the coach wishes to revise his or her judge strike sheets

(by adding the “walk-on" and deleting a previously struck judge if applicable) This revision of the strike

sheets must occur at least 45 minutes before the beginning of the round in which the "walk-on" is to be

used as a judge

• "Walk-on" judges who are one year out of a Wyoming high school and who were active participants in

competitive speech activities shall not be permitted to serve as judges

• "Walk-on" judges who are alumni of a particular school shall not be permitted to judge that school unless

three (3) years have elapsed since graduation

• "Walk-on" judges, if utilized, are not eligible to receive payment per round, mileage, nor per diem

• “Walk-on” judges must fill out a blue judge’s sheet.

d. Judge Strikes

Each school is allowed three overall individual judge strikes. This means the individual judge will be struck

against all entries from the school making the strike. This will apply to all events except Congress. For

Congress, tab staff will attempt to honor strikes but will reserve the right to override a strike if needed due to a

shortage of judges. Strike sheets will be made available to coaches 48 hours before the start of registration.

Strikes must be completed by coaches 24 hours prior to the start of registration. If additional judges are added

during this 48 hour window, additional strike sheets will be made available at registration If a school would like

to “swap” one of their original strikes in order to strike one of these new judges, they may do so at registration,

in which case strikes for the first round may not be guaranteed.

14. Entry Deadline

The entry deadline will be stipulated in the State Tournament Brochure which will be available on line five weeks in

advance of the tournament.

After the expiration of the entry deadline, schools who are entered in the State Tournament will be allowed to change,

correct, update, or otherwise modify their State Tournament entry form provided that they promptly notify the Tournament

Director by email, phone or in writing two days prior to the State Tournament. Two days prior to and through the day of

registration, only name changes or substitutions will be allowed. It is the responsibility of the high school coach to update

any corresponding fee assessment, based on changes made after the entry deadline, with the Wyoming High School

Activities Association office.

Any "drops" occurring at registration will be charged the appropriate cancellation fee as indicated in Section 8.3.3.A.3. No

"additional" entries will be permitted at registration.

In general, high school coaches are expected to be extremely conscientious in regard to the State Tournament entry

forms and the additional information which they are required to submit. They should insure the accuracy of their school's

entry in the State Tournament.

15. Time Limits

Cross- Examination Debate:

[99]

Aff. 8 min. constructive speech Neg. 8 min. constructive speech

Neg. 3 min. cross-x period Aff. 3 min. cross-x period

Neg. 8 min. constructive speech Neg. 5 min. rebuttal speech

Aff. 3 min. cross-x period Aff. 5 min. rebuttal speech

Aff. 8 min. constructive speech Neg. 5 min. rebuttal speech

Neg. 3 min. cross-x period Aff. 5 min. rebuttal speech

Each cross-x debate team will be allowed eight (8) minutes of preparation time without penalty.

Lincoln-Douglas Debate:

Aff. 6 min. constructive speech

Neg. 3 min cross-x period

Neg. 7 min. constructive speech

Aff. 3 min. cross-x period

Aff. 4 min. rebuttal speech

Neg. 6 min. rebuttal speech

Aff. 3 min. rebuttal speech

Each Lincoln-Douglas debater will be allowed four (4) minutes of accumulated preparation time without penalty.

Public Forum Debate:

Speaker 1 Team A - 4 min. Speaker 1 Team B - 4 min.

Cross-fire - 3 min.

Speaker 2 Team A - 4 min. Speaker 2 Team B - 4 min.

Cross-fire - 3 min.

Summary Team A - 3 min. Summary Team B - 3 min.

Grand Cross-Fire - 3 min.

Final Focus Team A - 2 mins. Final Focus Team B - 2 mins.

Each Public Forum debate team will be allowed three (3) minutes of accumulated preparation time without penalty.

1) Pilot new speech times that add one minute to each summary speech and add one minute to each team’s preparation

time. These piloted speech times will be used at all NSDA district tournaments in 2019-2020 and at the 2020 National

Tournament.

Procedure and Order of Speeches: Prior to EVERY round and in the presence of the judge(s), a coin is tossed by one

team and called by the other team. The team that wins the flip may choose one of two options: EITHER the SIDE of the

topic they wish to defend (pro or con) OR the SPEAKING POSITION they wish to have (begin the debate or end the

debate). The remaining option (SIDE OR SPEAKING POSITION) is the choice of the team that loses the flip. Once

speaking positions and sides has been determined, the debate begins (the con team may lead, depending on the coin flip

results). Following the first two constructive speeches, the two debaters who have just given speeches will stand and

participate in a three-minute "crossfire". In "crossfire" both debaters "hold the floor." However, the speaker who spoke first

must ask the first question. After that question, either debater may question and/or answer at will. At the conclusion of the

summary speeches, all four debaters will remain seated and participate in a three-minute "Grand Crossfire” in which all

four debaters are allowed to cross-examine one another. The speaker who gave the first summary speech must ask the

first question. Teams should alternate asking and answering questions rather than allowing one team to dominate so that

a balance between teams is achieved. All speakers are encouraged to participate in the Grand Crossfire. Speakers

should listen respectfully to opponents’ questions and answers.

Paraphrasing, authoritative source versus general understanding. If paraphrasing is used in a debate, the debater will be

held to the same standard of citation and accuracy as if the entire text of the evidence were read. Paraphrasing may be

used to shorten or clarify one specific portion of an original source. It should not be confused with general summary of an

entire book, chapter, study, etc., which may only be used for information that is widely considered to be common

knowledge. Paraphrasing focuses on a single idea, while summary focuses on a general concept. For example, if a

debater references a specific theory by a specific author, the debater must also be able to provide an original source. If a

debater were to reference social contract theory in general, that would not be an authoritative source that would require

citation. However, if the debater references “John Locke’s Social Contract,” evidence would need to be available.

Oratory (Memorized) / Informative Speaking: Orations must not be less than five (5) nor more than ten (10) minutes. A 30

second grace period is allowed.

Extemporaneous Speaking: Extemporaneous speeches must not be less than five (5) nor more than seven (7) minutes. A

30 second grace period is allowed.

Memorized Dramatic Interpretation Presentations must

Memorized Duet Interpretation not be less than

Memorized Humorous Interpretation five (5) nor more than

Manuscript Poetry Interpretation ten (10) minutes. A 30 second grace period is allowed.

Manuscript Program Oral Interp

It is the responsibility of the student to adhere to the time limits. Timekeepers in extemporaneous speaking and debate will

be instructed to notify the judge as to the actual speaking time for each speech.

The following formatting for extemporaneous questions should be used instead of the draw of three pieces of paper with

three questions on them;and these questions will be placed in the judges' ballot envelopes.( Thus, all first speakers will

have the same three choices for questions, for example)

[100]

EXAMPLE:

Round One

Speaker One

1. Was the federal government’s decision to lift restrictions on manufacturing lethal viruses in a laboratory setting wrong?

2. Who is ultimately responsible for the resignation of Lebanon’s Prime Minister?

3. What long-term steps must the International Olympic Committee take to prevent a repeat of the Russian doping

scandal?

Speaker Two

1. How will the GOP tax cuts impact the unemployment rate in the United States?

2. In the wake of the FCC’s decision on net neutrality, what steps can industry take to reassure the public of continued

access to the resources of the Internet?

3. How will new sanctions against Russia impact the relationship between Russia and the United States?

Speaker Three

1. What steps must congressional leaders take to protect congressional employees from sexual harassment and assault

at work?

2. What is the appropriate role of the federal government in protecting consumers from identity theft?

3. How will the new government of Zimbabwe differ from that led by Robert Mugabe?

Speaker Four

1. How can President Trump best protect himself against the consequences of the Russia investigation?

2. Should Honduras call new elections?

3. What steps can be taken to de-escalate tensions between Saudi Arabia and Iran?

Speaker Five

1. What steps must the GOP take to convince a skeptical public of the wisdom behind their tax bill?

2. Is Pakistan’s civilian government once again becoming a pawn of the military?

3. What are the most compelling arguments for the impeachment of Peru’s president?

Speaker Six

1. What must Doug Jones do if he wishes to hold on to his Alabama Senate seat beyond one term?

2. Was the cost of liberating Iraq from ISIS too great?

3. What conditions should North Korea meet before being invited to the negotiation table?

Speaker Seven

1. How easily will Canada be able to transition from illegal recreational marijuana to legal recreational marijuana?

2. What will be the consequences of Poland’s judicial overhaul on its relationship with the European Union?

3. Will democrats be able to take back the House of Representatives in the upcoming primary season?

Round Two

Speaker One

1. Is reported spending by the Pentagon on UFO research warranted?

2. What will be the impact of the European Union’s decision to classify Über as a taxi service rather than an online app?

3. What does the election of Sebastián Piñera as Chile’s president signal about the desires of the nation’s people?

Speaker Two

1. Is the federal government responsible for the high post-hurricane death rate in Puerto Rico?

2. Should the world community call the killings of Myanmar’s Rohingya population a “genocide”?

3. What action needs to be taken in order to promote pay equality in the United States?

Speaker Three

1. Is our failure to invest in infrastructure the root cause of the recent AMTRAK derailment?

2. Are Catalonian aspirations for independence successfully contained?

3. What will be the consequences of the death of Ali Abdullah Saleh for Yemen’s civil war?

Speaker Four

1. Should the federal government expand access to Pell Grants for prisoners wanting to pursue an education from behind

bars?

2. Can a successful opposition to Vladimir Putin be mounted in next year’s presidential election?

3. Is China succeeding in its efforts to shrink India’s sphere of influence in South Asia?

Speaker Five

1. Will President Trump fire Robert Mueller?

2. As Congress works to reauthorize the Higher Education Act, what steps can congressional leaders take to ensure

continued consumer protections for students?

3. Should Palestinians pursue a “One State Solution”?

Speaker Six

1. Should businesses and government wait until an employee is convicted of sexual impropriety before firing the accused?

2. Should Cambodia’s government face penalties for its suppression of political opposition?

3. What will be the impact of Iran’s closer relations with Pakistan and China?

Speaker Seven

[101]

1. How can the United States government decrease political apathy in citizens?

2. Does Joe Arpaio have a chance at a seat in the Senate?

3. What is driving the opioid crisis in the United States?

ETC.

16. Sweepstakes

The high school with the largest accumulated total of sweepstakes points in each class is the winner in that class.

The point system to determine the sweepstakes winners in each class is as follows:

Debate & Interp & Congress 1st place 9 POINTS

Debate & Interp & Congress 2nd place 8 POINTS

Debate & Interp & Congress 3rd place (semifinalists in debate) 7 POINTS

Interp & Congress 4th place 6 POINTS

Congress & Interp 5th place 5 POINTS

Congress & Interp 6th place 4 POINTS

Congress & Interp 7th place 3 POINTS

Non-advancing interp and congress semis & supers 2 POINTS

Non advancing Interp Quarters 1 POINT

Non advancing Debate Quarters 3 POINTS

Non advancing Debate Octafinals 1 POINT

*In the case that we need to break 8 to finals in an event, the 8th place will earn 2.5 points.

17. Harassment and Discrimination Policy

WHSFA Harassment and Discrimination Policy: The Wyoming Speech and Debate Association is committed to providing

its participants, judges, and coaches the opportunity to pursue excellence in their endeavors. This opportunity can exist

only when each member of our community is assured an atmosphere of mutual respect. The WHSFA prohibits all forms of

harassment and discrimination. Accordingly, all forms of harassment and discrimination, whether written or oral, based on

race, color, religion, sex, gender identity or expression, sexual orientation, marital status, citizenship, national origin, age,

disability, neurodivergence, genetic information, or any other characteristic protected by any applicable federal, state, or

local law are prohibited, whether committed by participants, judges, coaches, or observers. Individuals who are found to

have violated this policy will be subject to the full range of sanctions, up to and including removal from the tournament

premises. WHSFA will highlight, continue to refine, and promote best practices for diversity, equity, and inclusion within

the speech and debate community.

The State tournament will add an equity office.

B. Individual Events

There will be four preliminary rounds, a possible quarter final, and a semifinal round, and a final round in all individual

events at the State Tournament.

Individual events which have 60 or more competitors, will break to Quarterfinals.. The first priority will be to break closest

to 24. Secondly, to the extent that multiple options in break points are available, the second priority will be to advance

more rather than fewer students. A minimum of 20 and a maximum of 32 may advance into quarterfinals, depending on

where the clean break occurs. No sweepstakes points will be awarded for quarter finals in Humor, Oratory, Poetry,

Extemporaneous Speaking, Drama, POI, Informative or Duet.

For the preliminary rounds, the low "rank/points" (with rank having priority) will not be cumulated. The low score will not

figure into the determination of student qualification for subsequent qualifying rounds. This "dropped" low score will be

identified at the ballot verification period for individual events. A special note: a "no show" is indicated by a rank of 9 and 0

speaker points (rating). This "no show" designation is not dropped as the low score.

For the elimination rounds, there will be three (3) judges in any subsequent qualifying rounds for the individual events.

Only ranks in the round will be tabulated; speaker points will not be used. Should ties have to be broken, the "judge

preference" system of tiebreaking shall be employed. If ties cannot be broken, tied speakers will advance or place.

In the interpretation events of Poetry, Drama, Humor, POI, and Duet the following provisions shall apply: Individual events

cuttings/material must be from sources of literary merit.

Any source material is permitted as long as it meets standards outlined below:

1. Original source material must not be written by the competitor who is performing it.

[102]

2. Original source material must be publicly accessible throughout the duration of the tournament. Digital printed

publications such as web pages and PDFs retrieved or purchased from web pages are permitted as long as the web page

is publicly accessible throughout the duration of the tournament. Digital unprinted publications such as videos, audio files,

and films are permitted as long as the original source is publicly accessible throughout the duration of the tournament and

the competitor can obtain an official transcript of the original source. (See 2d. for official transcript details.)

a. For print publications such as novels, short stories, plays, or poetry, the original source is the physical book or e-book.

Photocopies of original literature are not acceptable. Presenting the physical book or e-book is sufficient to prove that a

printed publication is publicly accessible.

b. For digital printed publications such as web pages, original source material is no longer required to come from online

publishing sources listed on the NSDA Approved Websites List. The original source must be publicly accessible for

viewing or purchase by a simple internet search or by a URL not requiring passwords or access codes. Competitors must

also present a printed manuscript to be used in the case of a protest, but presenting a printed copy of a website is not

alone sufficient to prove that a digital printed publication is publicly accessible.

c. PDFs are permitted as long as the website from which the PDF is retrieved or purchased is publicly accessible for

viewing or purchase by a simple internet search or by a URL not requiring passwords or access codes. Competitors must

also present a printed copy of the PDF to be used in the case of a protest, but presenting a printed copy of the PDF is not

alone sufficient to prove that a PDF is publicly accessible.

d. For digital unprinted publications such as videos, audio files, and films, the original source must be publicly accessible

for viewing or purchase by a simple internet search or by a URL not requiring passwords or access codes. Competitors

must also present a printed official transcript of the original source to be used in the case of a protest, but presenting an

official transcript is not alone sufficient to prove that the original source is publicly accessible. An official transcript is one

approved by the original source’s producer, licensing agent, or copyright holder. As long as approval has been granted,

an official transcript may be obtained through the aforementioned parties or through an official transcription service such

as TranscribeMe, Scribie, or iScribed, which use non-automated, manual transcription.

In the prepared individual events of Oratory, Poetry, Drama, Duet, POI, Informative, and Humor the following provisions

shall apply: A contestant may not use the same cuttings/material or any portion of that content, in more than one prepared

event at the State Tournament. A contestant may not substantially change cuttings/material content in subsequent rounds

at the State Tournament.

No student may use an interpretive selection that he/she has used in any previous competitive season if the selection has

two of the following three aspects: Author, Title or Source.

Presentations shall be without the use of visual aids or costume, with the exception of Informative which allows visual

aids.

Judge Preference System: To the extent that any two speakers are tied on total ranks (with three judges), then an

examination/analysis of those tied will reveal who was "preferred" by the judges in terms of a comparison only between

those who tied.

For example:

Judge Judge Judge Total Place

X Y Z

Speaker A 1 6 3 10 4th

B 4 4 6 14 6th

C 3 5 1 9 2nd

D 5 2 2 9 3rd

E 2 1 4 7 1st

F 6 3 5 14 5th

- in the tie between speakers C and D:

Judge X prefers C over D

Judge Y prefers D over C

Judge Z prefers C over D

therefore, Speaker C is preferred over D by 2 out of 3 judges and should receive the higher

placement.

- in the tie between speakers B and F:

Judge X prefers B over F

Judge Y prefers F over B

Judge Z prefers F over B

therefore, Speaker F is preferred over B by 2 out of 3 judges and should receive the higher

placement.

The State tournament shall not exclude students in individual events from advancing to the elimination rounds exclusively

on the basis of speaker points. Instead, the primary criteria for advancing to qualifying rounds will be "clean breaks" in

ranks.

Semifinal rounds will be provided in all individual events. The preferred break, first priority, will be to break closest to 12.

[103]

Secondly, to the extent that multiple options in break points are available, the second priority will be to advance more

rather than fewer students. A minimum of 10 students will advance into semifinals, depending on where the clean break in

ranks occurs.

Literature in Interpretation Events: All interpretation competitors must have immediately available either (1) a photo copy

of the title page (author, title, source and copyright date) as well as the performed-portion of the original script, or (2) the

original edition of the unedited literature being used in competition.

Online sources may be accepted if they fulfill the requirements of printed sources. Published sources may not include

work created in part or in whole by the student. Online sources must include a printed copy of the script as published

online including the web address and clear evidence that the source is copyrighted on this site, from which it is taken.

Either must also include:

1. Any words/terms spoken must be highlighted. Lines not mentioned should be left unmarked.

2. Any changes and/or additions must be indicated clearly in ink. Transitional material spoken by the student

should be clearly indicated on the script.

The State Tournament shall not exclude students in individual events from advancing to the elimination rounds exclusively

on the basis of speaker points. Instead, the primary criteria for advancing to semifinals will be "clean breaks" in ranks. In

the individual events, the preferred break, first priority, will be the break point closest to 12. Secondly, to the extent that

multiple options in break points are available, then the second priority will be to advance more rather than fewer students.

A minimum of 10 students will advance into semifinals depending on where the clean break in ranks occurs.

The following schematic illustrates the system to be employed:

# of Students Semifinal

students per panel system

10 5 each

11 5 & 6 2 panels per semifinal

12 6 each advance 3 from each panel

13 6 & 7 into finals

14 7 each

15 5 each

16 5 & 5 & 6

17 5 & 6 & 6 3 panels per semifinal

18 6 each advance 2 from each panel

19 6 & 6 & 7 into finals

20 6 & 7 & 7

21 7 each

Please see Section 8.3.3.A.13.d and e for information concerning the "Judge Strike System" for interpretation and public

speaking events.

Choice of material:

It is strongly recommended that coaches use good judgment in selection of the material that is high school appropriate.

Judges and community members may be offended, the reputation of the team may be tarnished and competitors may be

ranked lower because of their choice in selections.

Obscenity Clause and Procedure for Grievance:

It is up to each school’s coaching staff to determine that each piece brought to Wyoming high school competitions is not

significantly offensive and that the obscenity, as defined by the Supreme Court of the United States of America, has been

eliminated. Any incident of obscenity clause violation must be reported to a member of the WHSFA executive committee

as soon as reasonably possible.

In the event of a reported incident, the WHSFA Executive Committee will:

a. Contact the coach to investigate the reported violation and to advise the coach about appropriate action. It will

then be decided to move forward or to drop the grievance. Students performing material against their coach’s

advice and approval should be removed from competition.

b. In the event that a resolution is not attained, the Executive Committee may choose to contact the administration

of the school to discuss the incident and decide what further action needs to occur at that level.

c. If the Executive Committee and administration of the offending school deem it appropriate, the WHSFA

Executive Committee officers will provide a written statement to WHSAA regarding the conditions and pertinent

information about the infraction.

d. WHSAA will review written statements and decide what further actions are necessary:

1. Charges dropped

2. Meeting with coach and administrative representative and WHSAA Board

3. Removal of WHSAA placing or All-State accolades

4. Warning/Probation (If persistent complaints possible suspension from competition

1) Extemporaneous Speaking

a. Time Limits

Extemporaneous speeches must not be less than five (5) nor more than seven (7) minutes. A 30

second grace period is allowed. Timers will show time to each speaker, from seven minutes down,

changing the displayed time card as each minute elapses. If the speaker’s time expires, the timer will

[104]

stand. In rounds where no timer is present, the judge will show the extemper by some cue or hand

signal when five minutes of speaking has elapsed. The judge may provide additional time cues, but

the judge may not penalize a speaker for being overtime without having provided the five minute

signal. Extemper may use their own timer, or the judge may provide one for the extemper.

b. Topics

All extemporaneous questions should be taken from the past three months of NFHS and NSDA

extemporaneous practice topics.

c. Procedures

Each participant, thirty minutes prior to his or her speaking assignment, will draw three topics. The

participant will select one topic, and, after preparing the speech, give the topic slip (with code number

and speaker's last name on it) to the judge at the beginning of the round. Failing to do so will

disqualify the student. During the final extemporaneous round, each speaker will be asked one

question by the previous speaker at the conclusion of the speech. First speaker will take a question

from last speaker - who will watch the first speaker and, then after the cross-examination, will retire to

prepare his or her own speech. The questioner is allowed to take notes during the speech, but he or

she may not use those notes during the cross-examination. The questioner has up to one minute to

ask a question; the speaker has up to two minutes to respond to the question. The quality of the

question asked and the quality of the answer given are a part of the total presentation and should be

considered with the ranking of the speakers. No one from the same school can question a teammate

if there are 2 from the same team in finals, unless it is unavoidable because a team has more than

half the people in the finals.

d. Preparation

It is suggested that students expecting to participate in this event become familiar with the technique

of writing a statement of purpose, a statement of central idea, and an outline in complete sentences

of the main heading and supporting material. In reading and studying magazines, the

extemporaneous speaker should try to trace and evaluate developments, trends, tendencies and

relationships of current events.

The speaker may bring files of notes or clippings on various subjects to assist in the 30 minute

preparation period.

An adult supervisor shall remain in the extemporaneous speaking preparation room until each round

is completed. This supervisor shall be responsible for the topic draw process and for maintaining

decorum. Extemporaneous speakers must not be "coached" by any person during this preparation

period. Coaching by anyone constitutes grounds for disqualification.

Students may consult published books, magazines, newspapers and journals or articles provided:

1) The materials are either the originals or xeroxed copies of the originals.

2) That the text of the original article or copy is intact and uncut.

3) There are no additional written comments on the original or copy.

4) A topical index without annotation may be present.

No other sources will be allowed in the extemp prep room other than the above. Extemp speeches,

handbooks, briefs or outlines shall be banned.

The use of laptop computers in extemporaneous speaking preparation is permitted as outlined in the

most current version of the NSDA national tournament manual.

e. Standards

An extemporaneous speaker is not expected to display the preparation and polish of a debater or

orator. The student is supposed to have gathered a considerable fund of information relevant to the

topic selected and the extemporaneous speech should test the ability to quickly select, organize and

present those ideas in a unified, significant communication.

2) Original Oratory (Memorized)

a. Time Limits

Orations must be not less than five (5) nor more than ten (10) minutes. A 30 second grace period is

allowed.

b. Quotations

An original oration must be the student's own work. Not more than 150 words may be quoted and it is

presumed that the quotations will be properly identified. Any appropriate subject may be used, but the

orator must be truthful. Any such nonfactual reference, especially a personal one, must be identified.

Violations of this section constitute grounds for disqualification.

[105]

c. Submission of Copies

Copies of orations to be entered in the State Tournament must be in the hands of the Tournament

Director by the close of registration, or the student will not be allowed to compete in this event.

d. Subject Matter

Theoretically, an orator may have any purpose. Students should be encouraged to deal with

problems and subjects which concern them directly and of which they have personal knowledge and

experience. Although emotional appeals are suitable in an oration, students should always support

their main statements by evidence: Explanation, comparison, factual or hypothetical illustrations,

specific instances, testimony, or logical reasoning.

e. Standards and Delivery

Orations are to be delivered entirely from memory, but an oration is to be evaluated by the same

standards that apply to any oral communication, with a slight shift of emphasis. Since the wording and

delivery of an oration are presumed to have been carefully worked out and practiced well in advance,

more polished results will be expected in both of these aspects than would be expected of the same

speaker in, for example, debate or extemporaneous speaking.

Any oration used in a previous school year is not acceptable. A contestant may not use material from

Oratory in any other prepared event at the State Tournament. A contestant may not substantially

change the content of the Oratory in subsequent rounds at the State Tournament.

3) Memorized Dramatic Interpretation

a. Time Limits

Presentations of memorized dramatic interpretation, including introduction, must not be less than five

(5) nor more than ten (10) minutes. A 30 second grace period is allowed.

b. Introductions

The interpreter of memorized dramatic literature should preface the interpretation by a few brief

remarks to establish a personal contact with the audience and to help them achieve a receptive mood

and frame of mind for the material to be presented. A dry, formal statement of biographical data

should be avoided.

c. Standards

Selections for memorized dramatic presentations will be essentially of a serious nature and will create

a solemn and thoughtful mood. Material may be a short story or a cutting from a short story, a

personal essay, a single incident or a cutting from a novel, biography, speech, or a poetic or prose

play.

The material must be from sources of literary merit. Any source material is permitted as long as it

meets standards outlined below:

1. Original source material must not be written by the competitor who is performing it.

2. Original source material must be publicly accessible throughout the duration of the tournament.

Digital printed publications such as web pages and PDFs retrieved or purchased from web pages are

permitted as long as the web page is publicly accessible throughout the duration of the tournament.

Digital unprinted publications such as videos, audio files, and films are permitted as long as the

original source is publicly accessible throughout the duration of the tournament and the competitor

can obtain an official transcript of the original source. (See 2d. for official transcript details.)

a. For print publications such as novels, short stories, plays, or poetry, the original source is the

physical book or e-book. Photocopies of original literature are not acceptable. Presenting the physical

book or e-book is sufficient to prove that a printed publication is publicly accessible.

b. For digital printed publications such as web pages, original source material is no longer required to

come from online publishing sources listed on the NSDA Approved Websites List. The original source

must be publicly accessible for viewing or purchase by a simple internet search or by a URL not

requiring passwords or access codes. Competitors must also present a printed manuscript to be used

in the case of a protest, but presenting a printed copy of a website is not alone sufficient to prove that

a digital printed publication is publicly accessible.

c. PDFs are permitted as long as the website from which the PDF is retrieved or purchased is publicly

accessible for viewing or purchase by a simple internet search or by a URL not requiring passwords

or access codes. Competitors must also present a printed copy of the PDF to be used in the case of a

protest, but presenting a printed copy of the PDF is not alone sufficient to prove that a PDF is publicly

accessible.

[106]

d. For digital unprinted publications such as videos, audio files, and films, the original source must be

publicly accessible for viewing or purchase by a simple internet search or by a URL not requiring

passwords or access codes. Competitors must also present a printed official transcript of the original

source to be used in the case of a protest, but presenting an official transcript is not alone sufficient to

prove that the original source is publicly accessible. An official transcript is one approved by the

original source’s producer, licensing agent, or copyright holder. As long as approval has been

granted, an official transcript may be obtained through the aforementioned parties or through an

official transcription service such as TranscribeMe, Scribie, or iScribed, which use non-automated,

manual transcription. It is recommended that all selections should be obtained from the works of a

writer of recognized stature, NOT from a "declamation agency" or a recording. It is recommended that

overly dramatic or emotional material be avoided.

Material should be thoroughly studied and analyzed, carefully practiced and prepared. The interpreter

should remember, however, that the student is interpreting the author's work to the audience, not

impersonating or directly presenting it.

A student may not use the same selection that he/she has used in any previous competitive season.

A contestant may not use material from his or her memorized dramatic interpretation in any other

prepared event at the State Tournament. A contestant may not substantially change the content of his

or her memorized dramatic interpretation in subsequent rounds at the State Tournament.

d. Delivery

In Memorized Dramatic Interpretation, the material must be presented from memory. No manuscript

or notes are allowed.

Those using a manuscript will be disqualified.

The interpreter does not act out the character or characters involved, but by changes in voice and in

poise, facial expression and modified gesture, SUGGESTS the character and gives the audience an

indication of attitude and frame of mind for the material being presented.

The presentation may not use physical objects or costuming. During the presentation the contestant

must name the author and the book or magazine from which the cutting was made. Additionally:

A. Adaptations to material may only be used for the purpose of transition. The gender

stated by the author must be honored. However, a female contestant may play a male role,

and a male contestant may play a female role.

B. Dramatic interpretation selections must be presented from memory.

C. A performer may play one or more characters.

D. Monologues are acceptable in Dramatic Interpretations. If the selection is prose or

poetry and contains narration performers may present the narration.

E. Videos of previous final round performances are intended to provide educational

examples for coaches and students. They are not intended to serve as a model to directly

imitate or duplicate in performance. The wholesale interpretation of final round

performances is strongly discouraged.

Focus: In dramatic interpretation, use of focal points and/or direct contact with the audience should be

determined by the requirements of the literature being interpreted.

Reuse: A student may not use a cutting from a work of literature the student used in district or

national competition in any previous contest year. A student entered in two events may not use the

same selection of literature in both events.

4) Memorized Duet Interpretation

a. Entries

A memorized duet interpretation team consists of two members.

b. Time Limits

Presentations of memorized duet interpretation must not be less than five (5) nor more than ten (10)

minutes, including introduction. A 30 second grace period is allowed.

c. Introductions

The interpreters should preface their Memorized Duet Interpretation presentation by a few brief,

informal extemporaneous remarks to establish a personal contact with the audience and to help them

achieve a receptive mood and frame of mind for the material to be presented. A dry, formal statement

of biographical data should be avoided.

d. Standards

Memorized duet interpretation involves the portrayal of two or more characters presented by two

individual contestants as a team. Selections for Memorized Duet Interpretation may be of a serious

nature to create a solemn and thoughtful mood or may be of a light or amusing nature to create a

mood of enjoyment and gaiety. Material may be a short story or a cutting from a short story, a

[107]

personal essay, a single incident or a cutting from a novel, biography, speech, or a poetic or prose

play. The material must be from sources of literary merit. Any source material is permitted as long as

it meets standards outlined below: